Home

Library Executive

1. s 133 Row commanods eee 133 Table commands sss 132 files delimited 4 reentet rp 121 importing from non P CAD source 121 formatting component esee 233 Component Format Options 150 dates delimited files footer Footer Format Options headers and footers sss 209 Library Format Options 150 Library Publisher dialog j 209 pattern 235 Pattern Format Options 151 publishing a library reports eese Style caisses etii ines tais symbol ie Symbol Format Options MES enoia aa aOR Saet G gate equivalence sse 11 gate number sese 11 Grate EG sooo Ue d D iedid 11 generating a report 146 glue point 74 H hardware requirements ssss 2 Help Commands CONTENTS dte teen m te 267 How to Use Help eee 267 hidden pins electrical type eere 35 net connections 33 icons Toolbar sss 256 261 import a character delimited file 121 123 198 accessing from Source Browser Bill of Materials component attributes component information considerations External Source File field mapping ses Master Designer PDIF libraries What Can Be Importe
2. Select Source Attributes To Verify Select Target Library Set Library To Verify viAlias E Myset viAlphaNumeric CAPCAD2001DemotDemo lib viComponentLibrary H ER E lib CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale tutor lib CAPCAD2001 Demo Source lib viComponentName v ComponentType Description IviHasDemorgan viHaslEEE Homogeneous viNumberOfPads viNumberOfParts IviNumberOfPins viPatternName viRefDesPrefix Browse I List components not found in library I Verify only components with matching library report txt Iv Setcomponent verify time stamp Iv View Report The Verify dialog allows you to check for differences between selected attributes and a P CAD library or library set You can specify the attributes to verify the target components and output options Select Source Attributes to Verify When the attribute in the Select Source Attributes to Verify check box is selected the attribute is compared to the attributes of the components in the target library or library set Library Executive User s Guide 207 Chapter 14 File Commands File Report Select Target Library Set Library to Verify When the library or library set in the Select Target Library Set Library to Verify box is selected the components in the library or library set are compared to the component attributes of the source e Browse Click the Browse button to navigate to and select the directory and file name of the output difference report The path
3. Component Open Open an existing component Component Save Save the current component Edit Cut Cut whatever is selected in the spreadsheet to the clipboard Edit Copy Copy whatever is selected in the spreadsheet to the clipboard Edit Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard to the current selection Edit Slide Selection Up Slides the selected information up one row in the spreadsheet Edit Slide Selection Down Slides the selected information down one row in the spreadsheet Edit Component Attr Modify the attributes of the current component View Component Information Opens and closes the Component Information dialog View Pins View Opens and closes the Pins View dialog View Pattern View Opens and closes the Pattern View dialog View Symbol View Opens and closes the Symbol View dialog Component Validate Validates the component for errors s pe e em pr e e LL es LL 4 Library Executive User s Guide User Interface Chapter 2 Library Basics Use this button To do this O Edit Undo Allows you to undo the last action E Source Browser Opens the Source Browser dialog You can turn on or off the display of the Toolbar by choosing the View Toolbar command Custom Toolbar You can create a Custom Toolbar for quick access to other applications from Library Executive
4. CreateDate Yes User defined attribute DateTime ModifyDate User defined attribute VerifyDate User defined attribute There are three types of Field names e Primary key e Predefined properties and attributes e User defined attributes There is only one primary key ComponentName This attribute is required for all P CAD library components The ComponentName field contains the name of the component and is the fundamental field used for component selection in P CAD PCB Schematic and Library Executive Predefined properties and attributes are fields that P CAD libraries use to define the structure and function of the component These predefined fields are specifically listed in the Attribute Properties dialog See Edit Commands page 249 for details The user defined attributes are field names that are recognized by P CAD but are not specifically listed in the Attribute Properties dialog Although any user defined attribute may be defined an assortment of preset attributes listed in the above table are available in the Field column list see Selecting Search and Display Fields page 106 These attributes may be useful in determining the feasibility for manufacturing a board such as cost and supplier The data types of these fields impacts how you enter and search for component attributes See Data Types page 105 for a summary of data types available in Library Executive Fields that are read only have values that cannot
5. Normal Al Long 2 Number Pins Left C User ps B acer 100 Omil All Number Pins Right Display IV Symbol Outline E S3 Si ine Wit Iv Pin Name 3 ini 10 0mil H Line width m IV PinDes Default Pin Name dm Default Pin Designator 1 Curent Pin Number Type s mi ol Click Left to single Select Ct Left for multiple or drag for block select fso0n0 seno As 100 0 w sheen sj moo x Symbol Wizard displays the last symbol you created The left side of the wizard contains the fields you need to complete to create a symbol the right side displays the symbol you are creating in a window Notice this window is like any other Symbol Editor window You can resize this window use zoom in and out and place objects into it The Symbol Wizard contains the following items e Symbol Width The width of the symbol being created The slide arrows increase and decrease the width by the amount set in the Pin Spacing field or in 100 mil increments if you hold down the SHIFT key e Pin Spacing The spacing between pins The slide arrows increase and decrease the spacing in 25 mil increments or in 1 mil increments if you hold down the SHIFT key e Number of Pins Left The number of pins on the left side of the symbol e Number of Pins Right The number of pins on the right side of the symbol e Symbol Outline Turns on or off the graphical representation of the symbol e Line Width The
6. To use the spreadsheet to locate a component and therefore identify which library you should add to the current open libraries list follow the steps below 1 Using Windows Explorer browse to the Library Index Library Index xls inthe Lib folder of the P CAD installation directory and double click on the file scon The Library Index displays as a spreadsheet Library Executive User s Guide 41 Chapter 4 Libraries Creating and Updating Libraries ES Eie Edt View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help 2181 JOSO S6R sB BS o we r r5zilAme99 wg aia o BrzU EZSH s c BB EE 5 A AL X Name A C D E E Ix 4 Name Description Manufacturer Class Sub Class Datasheet Date Rev Package Code Package Type Footprint Code 2 AT1010B 1PG84B Field Programmabl
7. 1 to 255 Multiple pins have the same pin designators Multiple pads have the same pad numbers Valid pad numbers range from 1 to the number of rows inclusively A small amount of memory is required 64K or less to hold the pin information for the entire component No more than 5 000 gates may be used ina component 1 or CMN specifies a common pin Common pin in row has a Gate Eq The gate equivalence of acommon pin is used to that does not match any gates specify the scope or range of gates that the common pin applies to Acommon pin by definition must exist for at least 2 gates Common pin in row has a Gate Eq The gate equivalence of acommon pin is used to that matches only 1 gate Library Executive User s Guide specify the scope or range of gates that the common pin applies to A common pin by definition must exist for at least 2 gates 275 Appendix B System Messages Library Message Listing Error Number Message Comment 5704 5705 5706 5707 5708 5709 5710 5711 5712 276 Gate missing symbol Gate missing symbol name NORMAL Symbol name missing from library IEEE Symbol name missing from library DEMORGAN Symbol name missing from library PATTERN name missing from library Number of rows not equal to number of pads Missing PinDes in row Missing PinDes in row Only unused pads are allowed to have a
8. For this example we ll translate sch1 lib Select the Source Library option button to display the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose your libraries Choose sch1 1ib Select the Tango Schematic DOS option button in the Source Format frame The only available destination format is P CAD Binary Click the Destination Library button to display the Library File Listing dialog and type a name for your destination library Type proschl lib Your dialog now appears as shown in the following figure Library Executive User s Guide 193 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources Library Translate Source Library C PCAD2001 SCH LIB C PCAD2001 PROSCH1 LIB Source Format Destination Format C TangoPRO Binary C TangoPRO ASCII C P CAD Binary C P CAD ASCII P CAD Binary PCADAGGI Tango Schematic DOS C Tango PCB DOS C PDIF Translate Close Click Translate to begin the translation process 5 6 Repeatthe process for each symbol library you want to convert 7 Click Close to exit the dialog The translated library is now ready to use with P CAD Schematic but not with PCB because it doesn t have pattern information You can add patterns to the library or you can merge this library with another library having patterns as described in the Library Commands chapter Naming Symbols Symbol names in translated Schematic libraries now have t
9. e Add Row Add Column The Add Row button adds a row to the query table if you wish to duplicate an attribute already on the Query dialog The Add Column button adds another Or column to the Query dialog e Query Click the Query button to search the selected source for components satisfying the specified criteria Refer to Querying Libraries page 103 for more information File Save To Library The File Save To Library command opens the Save Source dialog From this dialog a P CAD library can be created or updated from the components of the imported external source file The Save Source dialog may also be accessed through the Table menu on the Viewer dialogs or from the shortcut menu in the Source Browser for query results cross link results imported files or P CAD libraries The Save Source dialog appears as shown in the following figure Library Executive User s Guide 205 Chapter 14 File Commands 206 Save Source x Source CAPCAD2001XDemoxXDemo lib m Save Mode File Save To Library Create New C Update CAPCAD2001XDemotSource lib Gre T Update only components with meten libram nane Be Hew Corr ponent Iv Create componenttime stamps if not present Attributes To Be Created Attribute Name Ignore 1 RetDesPrefix r Description fai OK Cancel The Save Source dialog allows you to create or update a P CAD library using components from the selected source You
10. generating reports groups of libraries imported files importing library verification opening a component 97 placing components s QUBTVIP Bee entere tct nnn nanai refreshing contents sss saving attributes to a library Shortcut Menu Commands 17 the Query command 117 updating libraries user interface ceteris verification of a library viewing library contents Source Browser View command 260 source file external scettr reete 91 169 Spreadsheet editing techniques sss 12 resizing views ColuM S 11 swap information esee 56 swapping pin and gate ssssssssseeeeee 11 symbol Library Executive User s Guide description ssssssssessssesssesssssssssesssrssseessseesreens 48 editing loading naming next pin next symbol sese 259 pin 11 previous Pinsan 259 previous symbol see 259 selection entis 259 Symbol Commands Symbol Editor 77 accessing from Library Executive 247 Attrib tes ertet 83 automated symbol creation 79 features launching rines 78 loading symbols sss 81 Pin Placement Pin Properties placing reference points 90 renumbering pin des renumbering pin names 89 Renumbering Pins see Rotate or Flip
11. Lesson 8 Verifying Your Libraries Against an MRP File You can also check to see whether your libraries need updating when changes to the MRP database are made If the MRP is equivalent to the library and the library is equivalent to components in the design the components in the design will be up to date with the MRP This section assumes that you have the MRP source imported The MRP source component must be associated with its corresponding ComponentName for library verification It also assumes that you have set up the libraries so that they are available for P CAD Library Executive Add the libraries to the default library set or create your own library set to contain the libraries Step 1 Verifying the MRP Source After importing the MRP source and setting up the chosen libraries as you did in Lesson 1 complete the following steps 1 Select the MRP source file from the Source Browser 2 Choose Verify to open the Verify dialog The Verify command can also be accessed from the Table menu of the file Viewer Library Executive User s Guide 189 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources 190 Verify CAPCAD2001YTutorialAle mrp txt Select Source Attributes To Verify Select Target Library Set Library To Verify E DEFAULT LIBRARY SET viDescription CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib v PatternName viQuantity v ComponentName Browse List components not found in library
12. Verify only components with matching library report t Iv Set component verify time stamp Iv View Report Step 2 Setting up the Verify Dialog In this section you will set up the Verify dialog to generate a difference report The difference report will be displayed to the screen as well as to a specified output file This report will contain components that have differing attributes in the MRP file and the library It will also list the components that are in the MRP file but are not found in the selected libraries In contrast to Design Verification discussed in Lesson 7 the library Verification utility can generate or update a VerifyDate attribute in the library indicating when the library was last verified You will be generating a VerifyDate timestamp with the following steps 1 In the Verify dialog all MRP source attributes are listed in the Select Source Attributes to Verify box Leave all attribute check boxes in this list selected You will be verifying all component attributes 2 The source MRP components are verified against all selected libraries in the Select Target Library Set Library To Verify list Select the library or library set Type the report file name in the box and select the View Report check box 4 Select the List components not found in libraries check box to list in the difference report design components that were not found in the open libraries 5 Check the Set component verify time stamp bo
13. View Symbol View The View Symbol View command opens the Symbol View dialog where you can assign pin data to a component OPTEK_16_N lo x Edit Symbol Component Info Pins View Pattern View Prev Sym Next Sym Prev Pin Next Pin 5 8 J8 258 Library Executive User s Guide View Symbol View Chapter 20 View Commands The attached symbol appears in a browse window The Symbol View dialog may be resized to increase the display area of the browse window To expand the dialog vertically to display additional spreadsheet rows that may not be displayed press the SHIFT key while dragging an edge of the dialog to the left or right When a pin is selected the following occurs e The pin is selected in the Symbol View browse window e The pin s corresponding pad is selected in the Pattern View browse window e The corresponding spreadsheet row is selected in the Pattern View Pins View and Symbol View dialogs e If pin or gate numbers are missing from the rows or misnumbered the correspondence between rows and pins is not maintained Prev Pin Next Pin The Prev Pin and Next Pin buttons automatically select the next and previous pins within the symbol The order of the pins is defined by the symbol pin number sequence set during symbol creation Prev Sym Next Sym If there is more than one gate the Prev Sym and Next Sym buttons automatically select the next and previous gates The Prev Sym
14. 14 pads down 100mil Pad to Pad Spacing 300mil Pattern Width Pad 1 Position of 1 Make sure the Silk Screen checkbox is selected and the Silk Rectangle Width is 200mil and Height is 700 0mil Leave the Pad Styles as defaults P CAD 2001 Pattern Editor No_Library Untitled2 Primary i Pattem Edt View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help 18 x fa Number Of Pads Down 7 H Number Qt Pads Across 100 0mil Pad to Pad Spacing On Center 200mi Patten Width 2 H Patten Height M Padi Position Pad Style Pad 1 Default v F Rotate Pad Style Other pes E M Rotate M Silk Screen gt fioomi 5j Sik Line width zwi 5 Sik Rectangle width 700 0mi sik Rectanale Height fac Z Notch Type Current Pattem Graphics Primary lal jeje le en s 7 ilele tTypei Isl Click Left to single Select Ctr Left for multiple or drag for block select 3 Click Finish to close the Pattern Wizard The Pattern Editor is now displayed in which you can modify the new pattern if necessary by using the standard P CAD PCB drawing tools Library Executive User s Guide 27 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Pattern al gt e g amp g g m z 2 e e ype a B ni Click Left to single Select lt Ctrl gt lt Left gt for multiple or drag for block select 4000 259000 a5s 1000 Ba es foam fno zl 4 Forthis tutorial we will
15. In the Query dialog there are several columns where you can enter search criteria the Criteria And column and the Or columns When combining more than one search expression in a single query both columns may be used to precisely define the desired component This section details how different combinations of two or more search criteria can be used to construct a wide variety of component searches When you enter your search criteria its spreadsheet location defines your intended search If you want to find a component that satisfies criteria X AND criteria Y place X and Y in the same column If you want to find a component to either satisfy criteria X OR criteria Y place X and Y in different columns For example in the following query the search is for a component that has one pin and whose name begins with the number 4 After executing this search a one pin component with the name 4DHX57 might appear on the Query Results table Field Show Cen Or ComponentN ame X IsLike 4 NumberOfPins x 1 On the other hand in the following query the search is for a component that has one pin or whose name begins with the number 4 After executing this search a one pin component with the name 4DHX57 might again appear on the Query Results table However it could be followed by the two pin component 4DXF42S and the one pin component 6HGD32 ezi Criteria And Or ComponentN ame X IsLike 4 Number fPins x
16. Move a Column Select the column in the View dialog Press the left mouse button and the SHIFT key Drag the column to its new location A black line indicates where the column will be placed when the mouse button is released Enable All In the Save To Library and Query dialogs columns containing check boxes can be entirely selected by clicking the column header For example click Show to select all check boxes in the Show column In the Save To Library dialog only one column can be selected at a time clicking a column header button toggles the check box columns Place a Queried Component In the embedded Query dialog double click a component row to select it for placement The workspace appears in Place Component mode with the selected component available for placement Resizing Spreadsheet Views You can resize a spreadsheet view when you want to simultaneously display multiple windows or when you want to add or reduce the number of spreadsheet rows in a window To perform this task Follow these steps Reduce a view to an icon Click the Minimize button 2 Restore a view to its previous size and location Click the Restore button Bl Close a view window Click the Close button X Change the size of a view window Point to the window s border When the pointer becomes a click and drag the border to size the window proportionately Library Executive User s Gui
17. PROFESSIONAL TOOLS FOR BOARD AnD PAYOUT SPERA SPECIALIST Library Executive p cad PCB layout system from Altium Copyrights Software documentation and related materials Copyright O 2002 Altium Limited This software product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved The distribution and sale of this product are intended for the use of the original purchaser only per the terms of the License Agreement This document may not in whole or part be copied photocopied reproduced translated reduced or transferred to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from Altium Limited U S Government use duplication or disclosure is subject to RESTRICTED RIGHTS under applicable government regulations pertaining to trade secret commercial computer software developed at private expense including FAR 227 14 subparagraph g 3 i Alternative IIl and DFAR 252 227 7013 subparagraph o ii P CAD is a registered trademark and P CAD Schematic P CAD Relay P CAD PCB P CAD ProRoute P CAD QuickRoute P CAD InterRoute P CAD InterRoute Gold P CAD Library Manager P CAD Library Executive P CAD Document Toolbox P CAD InterPlace P CAD Parametric Constraint Solver P CAD Signal Integrity P CAD Shape Based Autorouter P CAD DesignFlow P CAD ViewCenter Master Designer and Associate Designer are trademarks of Altium Limited Other brand names are trademarks of their respective companies Altium Lim
18. Save to File As command to save a symbol as a symbol file sym a unique file type that allows you to keep symbols for later use without having to save them to a library Symbol Attributes All symbol attributes including invisible attributes like RefDes and Type can be viewed and modified by choosing the Symbol Attributes command When you choose Attributes the Attributes dialog opens Library Executive User s Guide 83 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor Pin Placement Attributes Attributes Name Ve Type Type RefDes RefDes W cad Reference Add Delete Properties Launch In the Attributes dialog you can view add modify or delete attributes The dialog contains a two column table showing the name of the attribute in the left column and corresponding value in the right column e Adding an Attribute Click the Add button to open the Place Attribute dialog Select an Attribute Category and Name or if defining a new user defined attribute enter a Name and then set the Value for the attribute Click OK and the attribute is added to the table e Viewing or Changing Attribute Properties Select an attribute from the table and click the Properties button or double click the attribute to open the Attribute Properties dialog to view the attribute s properties or change the attribute s value e To Delete an Attribute Select an attribute in the table and click Delete or press the DELETE key e
19. Utils Renumber Ty Default Pin Name Cancel d C Default Pin Designator fi Starting Pin Number fi Increment Value 3 Clear the Display Default Pin Des check box in the Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog 4 Select the Pin Number option button 5 Specify Starting Pin Number and Increment Value as appropriate 6 Click OK Notice that the cursor changes to the crosshair shape You are in a temporary mode of assigning numbers so every time you hold down the left button and drag it over a pin you renumber that pin You can also click a pin to renumber it For example the first pin you drag the mouse over would be number 1 if Starting Pin Number was specified as 1 the second pin number 2 if the Increment Value was specified as 1 As you drag the mouse over a pin while in the Renumber mode it shows that a number has been assigned Once a pin is renumbered you cannot change its number without choosing the Renumber command again The Status Line information area displays the pin number every time you re number a pin The N key increments the pin about to be renumbered by one SHIFT N decrements the number If 6 is the next available pin number pressing N would result in the pin being assigned number 7 pressing SHIFT N would result in the pin being assigned number 5 You can use the unwind feature to reverse the renumbering process The BACKSPACE key unwinds the renumbering 7 Right click
20. be mapped again 12070 Duplicate field name field name The field name already exists in the source Choose a different name for the added renamed or mapped field 12080 Field mapping will reload the original Any changes made to the imported source file in imported file Changes made to the the file Viewer will be lost during field mapping table Viewer will be lost The Map Fields command always maps the original source file Map the fields before modifying the Viewer contents if you would like those changes to be saved 12132 Record at line does not match with One or more of the rows in the imported comma field description Do you want to see delimited file has too many or too few field additional errors Press Cancel to entries Check that all special characters end the import particularly commas within field values have been properly escaped 12133 No source is specified for the query Conducting a Query from the Source Browser Select a source from the source specifies a source to search Utils Query has no browser then select the right mouse means of determining which source is desired menu Query After the first Query has been conducted from the Source Browser Utils Query displays the spreadsheet of the previous Query Library Executive User s Guide 279 A about Library Executive 267 accessing component placement 163 Alias Librar
21. 199 200 map file example 168 mapping layers 223 225 270 component layers seeeeee 228 285 286 drill layers enn 228 for library translation plane layers sse recognizable but unmapped layers 229 unrecognizable layers 229 Master Designer importing PDIF libraries library considerations translating PCB libraries translating Schematic libraries menu Dar eee rer tette ett 3 Merge Patterns Library command 229 merging le Ta I em 229 patterns recien rit 229 Merging PDIF PCB libraries ees 273 PDIF Schematic libraries 273 messages ModifyDate sse 44 47 Search nosset reete iens 110 Module component type eee 50 N naming symbol sse 194 New Component command 241 New Library command 211 New Pattern command 245 New Symbol command 247 Normal component type seen 49 O Open Component command 242 Open Pattern command 245 Open Symbol command 247 operators for query sse 107 P pad numbers rct tertia 51 pad numbers vs pin designators 51 Paste S
22. Copies text from the selected cell s in the spreadsheet to the Clipboard Main window must have focus Edit Copy 18 Library Executive User s Guide Keyboard Shortcuts Chapter 2 Library Basics Press these keys To do this CTRL Down Edit Slide Down Slides the selected information down in the spreadsheet CTRL N Component New A shortcut for Component New This command clears the spreadsheet to load the new component Main window must have focus CTRL O Component Open Opens the Component Open dialog where you can choose a component Main window must have focus CTRL S Component Save Saves changes to the current component without closing it To save the component to a different name or location choose Component Save As To clear the spreadsheet choose Component New Main window must have focus CTRL UP Slides the selected information up in the spreadsheet Edit Slide Up CTRL V A shortcut for Edit Paste You can paste information from the Edit Paste Clipboard to the selected cells in the spreadsheet CTRL X A shortcut for Edit Cut Removes text from the selected cell s in h h l i the Cli Edit Cut the spreadsheet and places it on the Clipboard F1 Displays context sensitive help If you put focus on a Library Hel Executive command or dialog by mouse or keyboard and press Help F1 the Help window appears containi
23. Customize command Command The path to the executable file of the new tool Click the Browse button to navigate to and select the desired file A warning is issued if a non existent path is entered but the entry will still be added Arguments Optional entry used to pass information into the targeted application if desired Initial Directory Sets the initial working directory for the application Display Selects the way the application appears on the screen when initialized Normal the default to display the application as a window in the workspace Minimized to start the application and display it as an icon at the bottom of the screen or Maximized to start the application and display it across the full screen Prompt for arguments Select this check box to automatically display the Arguments dialog where you will enter input to be passed to the program at execution time The entry is saved and recalled the next time the program is run Add Click the Add button to begin adding a new tool You can add a maximum of 16 tools to the Customized Toolbar Remove Select a tool from the custom area and click Remove to delete it from the customized toolbar Move Up Move Down Select a tool from the Custom list and change its position in the list by clicking the Move Up or Move Down buttons OK Click OK to apply additions modifications and exit the dialog Displaying the Custom Toolbar The Custom Toolbar is not displayed in the work
24. Ere aLe EE ROU EEE E EE E E T E A 75 Keyboard Shortcuts iliii id idii aadi E iiie trn ete eruit 75 The Symbol Editor Introducing Symbol Editor 2 2 re deep a o Deed aanas 77 Symbol Editor Featlires rti eter pei e ea e a ae Pret Rud 77 The Symbol Editor Interface citi ER y E eR terit 78 Starting Symbol Editor essen enne nennen 78 SYMbONWIZaNd ec 79 Working with Symbol Files 2 neenon eere ed eene d nea terne deoa edu dcus 81 Loading a Symbol from a Library essem eene 81 Saving a Symbol to a Library essem eere 82 Saving a Symbol as a Symbol file sssee emm 83 Symbol Attributes Pin Pl cemient 3 2 tei tne e pci eic e ade nr clie cae sanc en De ein De TUA Rotate or Flip Pin rene toe Regen ET g Ene C e AREE shancente 86 Pip Properties ode eit ec eet Seu cite ated teda Remate d cea 86 Changing Pin Properties 1 erret rer ree retten eph de de eene de Codice 87 Renumbering Pins pee E 88 Renumbering Default Pin Names sssssseeee eene ene neemen n nnen nennen nennen 89 Renumbering Default Pin Designators see emm eene 89 Placing Reference Points ne edem te Det pere te ete Eh 90 Keyboard Shortcuts 2 in Hee ied cectps cte Te pete recede dide s EP ceste d aduer doen 90 The Source Browser Using the Source Browser eet ep teet xo
25. Iv Attached Symbol Section Symbol Format M Footer Section Footer Format Pattern Section Pattern format Symbol Section OK Cancel This dialog is the point of access for the content and format options of the Library Publisher These options are summarized below e Source Library Click the Source Library button to navigate to and select the directory and filename of the library you want to publish e Save To Click the Save To button to select the directory and filename of the output file e Library Section Select the Library Section check box to include a report on the selected library in the publisher output The Library Format button becomes available allowing you to select the contents of this section including file name size component name list etc Refer to Formatting Options page 232 for additional details e Component Section Select the Component Section check box to include a report on the components in the selected library in the publisher output Several additional options become available including the Component Format button Select Components button Attached Pattern Section check box Attached Symbol Section check box and Footer Section check box e The Component Format button allows you to select the contents of this section including component name pin table attribute table etc Refer to Formatting Options page 232 for additional details e The Select Components button allows you
26. Programs are added to the Custom Toolbar by choosing the Utils Customize command You can start any of the applications by clicking their Custom Toolbar buttons or selecting them from the list of applications that appear in the Utils menu Complete instructions on creating and using a Custom Toolbar are found in Utils Commands page 263 Prompt Line The prompt line at the bottom of the window displays information prompting you on the appropriate action to take You can turn on or off the display of the Prompt Line by choosing the View Prompt Line command Open an existing component fram a library Component Open Library Executive Layout When you first access Library Executive the interface is blank All toolbar functions except Component New and Component Open are grayed indicating they are unavailable When you open a component Component Open or create a new component Component New the Component Information dialog opens and tool bar functions are enabled Three other dialogs provide detailed information about the component and let you create pad to pin associations Library Executive User s Guide 5 Chapter 2 Library Basics User Interface P CAD 2000 Library Executive Demo lib 7400 File Library Component Pattern Symbol Edit View Utils Help plela fale kene El Component Information 7400 Pins View Select Pattern DIP14 Pattern View Select Symbol Number of Gates m Symbol View Referenc
27. Select the source library and click OK Click Destination Library to open the Library Select dialog again Select the destination library and click OK The Library Copy dialog displays the paths and filenames of the source and destination libraries you selected In the Copy Item frame select the type of object you want to copy Component Pattern or Symbol The names of the available objects for the selected type appear in the Multiple Source Names box To select items to copy choose one of the following key combinations e Left click selects a single object When a single object is selected you can enter its destination name in the Single Destination Name box e SHIFT Left Click selects all objects between the last selected object and the next object you click on e CTRL Left Click adds or removes an object from the selection Click the Browse to Add button to add selected single objects to the your selection and click OK Select your Destination Preferences Overwrite Items in the destination file Preserve Items to maintain the existing objects Copy Patterns w component or Copy Symbols w component The last two check boxes are available only when copying components Library Executive User s Guide Library Delete Chapter 15 Library Commands 10 Click Copy The selected objects are copied from the source library to the destination library If you copy an alias into a destination library Library Executive creates a new com
28. details how the search expression is constructed when searching for a unique data type Boolean ComponentType or DateTime When searching for a String or Integer data type only the information available in this section is required A general search expression usually has the form of a query operator followed by a value A combination of search expressions on multiple fields can limit the component search even further making the search for the ideal component quick and easy For details on how to combine more than one search expression refer to And Versus Or page 112 Query Operators To precisely define your search criteria the Query function uses a set of operators selected from a list of available operators When you click the spreadsheet in the Criteria And and Or columns a down arrow appears to the right Click the Down Arrow to display the operator list and then click on the operator you want to use The operator is automatically placed on the spreadsheet Operators may also be typed directly into the spreadsheet The available operators are listed in the following table Library Executive User s Guide 107 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Setting up a Query Operator Function B Exactly equal to If used with a wildcard operator or this operator becomes literal It searches for a set of characters with for example a question mark at the end T TR lt gt IsLike If used with a wildcard operato
29. e EB 2mo al gt s The following Pattern Editor commands and functions are distinctly different in their usage or access than those of P CAD PCB Click Left to single Select lt Ctr gt lt Left gt for multiple or drag for block select svo 7000 asj ooo NMT Eos Wes xl h e Pattern Open Opens pattern files pat that can be modified and saved to a library See Pattern Editor online help for details e Pattern Save to File and Save to File As Saves a pattern file pat This is a unique file type that allows you to keep patterns for later use without having to save them to a library Invalidated or incomplete patterns can be saved in this way See Working with Pattern Files page 65 for details Library Executive User s Guide Pattern Wizard Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor e Pattern Save and Save As Saves the current pattern to a library See Working with Pattern Files page 65 for details Pattern Pattern Wizard Opens the Pattern Wizard which simplifies pattern creation See Pattern Wizard page 61 for more details e Pattern Attributes Allows you to create and modify pattern attributes for the current pattern file including invisible attributes This command is similar to the Attributes function of PCB s File Design Info command which presents design level attributes See Pattern Attributes page 67 for details e Place Pad Opens a dialog where you can set a sta
30. p Component Type ld Refdes Prefix zz Normal Component Style Gate Numbering Alternate Views C Power Homogeneous Alphabetic IEEE C Sheet Connector C Heterogeneous C Numeric DeMorgan C Module 5 Leave the Component Type information as defaults since we are creating a normal component type that is homogeneous all gates use the same symbol with alphabetic gate numbering Since you set the component style to Homogeneous then all Gate Eq values are set to the first Gate Eq value of 1 There are five types of components Normal Power Sheet Connector Module and Link Naming a component type allows that component to properly associate with net connections The component type also determines whether the component will appear in the netlist or bill of materials Adding the Symbol First we will add the symbol NAND to the component This symbol is a representation of the part of a component when placed in a schematic design using P CAD Schematic 1 Click on Select Symbol to choose which symbol you are attaching to the component The Library Browse window displays the symbols available in the selected library 30 Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Component Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Symbol NAND Cancel AZ 2 Our NAND symbol is already selected so click OK to add it to the component You are returned to the Component Information dialog 3 Notice that the NAND sym
31. press Enter or move the cursor to another cell using the arrow keys or the mouse PP Pw C0 QD m w Nw We will only be allocating Pin Names to the power pins in this exercise so type in GND Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Component Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial for pin 7 and VCC as the Pin Name for pin 14 Hidden power pins are automatically connected to the net specified by the Pin Name 9 Now we can add Gate Eq Gate Equivalence of 1 to the gates All gates are equivalent in a homogenous component and so all the gates will be using the same symbol To quickly fill this column type 1 in the first cell of the Gate Eq column and press Enter 10 Assign Pin Eq Pin Equivalence values for the component if pin swapping is required when using the component in both P CAD PCB and Schematic The Pin Eq indicates which pins within a gate are logically equivalent and may be swapped These values must be non zero and identical for a swap to occur between two pins Non swappable pins are indicated with a zero or blank Both input pins Symbol Pin 1 and 2 can be swapped in this example so enter the same code for these pins e g 1 11 Finally we will assign the Electrical Types to each pin e g Input Output and Power The electrical types may be entered quickly by selecting the appropriate cell and typing the first letter of the electrical type name for example I for input and O for output If ther
32. such as e A description of the user interface e A description of the Symbol View Pattern View and Pins View dialogs spreadsheet e A description of the advanced views including the Source Browser and Query e Spreadsheet editing e Library Executive commands e Keyboard specifics User Interface This section provides an overview of the Library Executive user interface Menu Bar The menu bar provides access to Library Executive commands and functions File Library Component Pattern Symbol Edi View Utis Help To activate a menu click the Menu Title or press the ALT key in combination with the underlined letter of the menu title e g ALT C to display the Component menu When the menu appears click the Menu Item or press the underlined key to choose a command A command followed by three dots e g Open opens a dialog when you choose it Toolbar A toolbar provides shortcuts to commonly used commands and functions It appears when you choose the View Toolbar command You can use your mouse to drag it to a new location on your screen Library Executive User s Guide 3 Chapter 2 Library Basics User Interface Tool Tips explain each of the toolbar buttons To activate a Tool Tip place the mouse over the button The Tool Tip pops up n s m xee tele wl kejaj lel The toolbar buttons are shortcuts for the following commonly used commands Use this button To do this Component New Create a new component
33. the Master Designer to P CAD SCH Layer Mapping dialog is opened This dialog lets you select which layers to map and maps the desired layers Layer Description Gate Graphics Layer Lists the target layers available for normal gate representation Default Map Assigns all Master Designer layers to a default layer mapping structure Select All Layers Selects all layers set to MAPPED or IGNORED Unselect All Layers Deselects all layers set to MAPPED or IGNORED Set Layer Mapped Instructs Library Executive to map this layer and translate its data Set Layer Ignore Instructs Library Executive to ignore this layer and any data on it Confirms your selections Cancel Cancels the layer mapping and aborts loading the schematic design When you translate a PDIF part library the Master Designer to P CAD PCB Layer Mapping dialog opens Master Designer to P CAD PCB Layer Map Displays the Master Designer layer mapping assignments A NONE next to the Master Designer layer name indicates that PCB will ignore data on that layer A typical layer assignment looks like this PADCOM Top SA 1 where e PADCOM is the Master Designer layer e Top is the PCB layer assigned to the Master Designer layer PADCOM e Sindicates the layer s status S signal N nonsignal P plane e A indicates the autorouter bias A auto H horizontal V vertical e 1 indicates the layer number P CAD Layer Lists the PCB layers available fo
34. 1 You can put a field name in more than one row This is needed for finding a component that has between 5 and 10 pins for example Field shw cessa o NumberOfPins x 2 NumberOfPins fa am There can be multiple Or columns if you want to search for components with criteria X or Y or Z You can add Or columns to the spreadsheet by clicking the Add Column button Additional columns are included to the right of present Or columns You can also have multiple entries in an Or column if you want to search for components with the criteria X and Y or criteria Land M 112 Library Executive User s Guide Query Results Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Specifying Output You can specify the Query output in two ways e Which fields are displayed in the query result e Whether or not the present query overwrites the previous result To display a particular field in a query result select the Show check box to the right of the field name To preserve the present query results select the New Results Table check box When the new query is executed both the original query result and the new query result tables remain in memory Easy access to all query result tables is available through the Source Browser Refer to The Source Browser page 91 for additional information Executing a Query After setting up your query click the Query button P CAD Library Executive will search the selected source and automatically dis
35. 321 Axial Polariz 9 POLCAP CAPI100 9874 Polarized Ca 10 CAP400 CAP400 8903 Capacitor 11 RES500 RES500 22357 Resistor 12 RES600 RESB00 64532 Resistor 13 RES700 RES700 7897 Resistor 14 RES130 RESI3U 26659 Resistor 15 RES220 RES220 486 Resistor 16 RES6SI SIP amp 80654 Five Bussed 17 RESES SIP6 579806 Three Isolat 18 RES6SI SIP6 1956 Three Isolat 19 RES8SI SIP8 65967 Twelve Dual 20 RES8SI SIP8 12 Four Isolate 21 RES10S SIP10 35437 Nine Bussed 22 RES10S SIP10 24723 Siteen Dual BESI4D DIP14 57887 Seven lsolat From the Viewer all Library Executive functions applicable to an imported library file are available including Query Cross Link Verify and Reports One other important function for imported files Map Fields is also available from the Viewer Refer to Library Basics page 3 for details on the Viewer and its function View Toolbar The View Toolbar command turns on or off the display of the toolbar Current visibility is saved to the cmp ini file and restored in subsequent sessions The toolbar buttons are shortcuts for commonly used commands Once a toolbar is visible on your Screen you can use your mouse to drag it to a new position Tool Tips explain each of the toolbar buttons To activate a Tool Tip place the mouse over the button The Tool Tip pops up View Custom Toolbar The View Custom Toolbar turns on or off the display of the Custom toolbar If no tools have b
36. CAD PCB Every pattern has at least one pattern graphic with the default name of Primary that is created when you use the Pattern Editor You can set up multiple and varying pattern graphics for the patterns associated with components This allows differing pattern graphics to be automatically applied when placing a component depending on whether the component is placed on the top or bottom of the board how it is rotated and the chosen direction of solder flow Pattern graphics may be a different orientation or a different size from the base pattern The pattern graphics are stored in the pattern file within a library You can attach copy pattern graphics from other patterns to a target pattern as long as they are all in the same library You can create new pattern graphics or modify existing pattern graphics using the Pattern Editor Refer to Pattern Graphics in the Pattern Editor page 68 Adding existing pattern graphics to a target pattern 1 Choose library Pattern Graphics The Library Pattern Graphics dialog displays 2 Openasource library where the target pattern and the already created pattern graphics reside Click on Library to open the Library Select dialog and navigate to the required library and click Open 3 Choose a target pattern to which you want to add additional pattern graphics by selecting the required pattern name from the Target Pattern drop down list If only one pattern graphic exists for this target pattern the
37. CAD library Only modifiable attributes not read only are saved to the library Row Commands The Row commands are available from the Row menu or the shortcut menu when a row is selected in the Viewer With the Row commands you can add a row or remove the component in the selected row You can place a component in a P CAD PCB or Schematic design You can also open a component to view its component information Command Description Delete Removes the currently selected row from the Viewer Places the selected component in a running PCB or Schematic design Brings up the application with the Place Part or Place Component dialog open and the component selected Open Opens the Component Information dialog Library Executive User s Guide 133 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Using the Imported Source File The Open command is only available if the row contains the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary fields The Place command requires the row represents a valid component with an attached symbol or pattern For more information about placing a component from the Viewer into a PCB or Schematic design commands see Using the Imported Source File page 134 Using the Imported Source File From the Viewer the command menus access the Library Executive features You can even place components selected in the Viewer directly to a design in PCB or Schematic This section lists the primary
38. CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CA PCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto o x Component Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 5 Inthe Viewer table there are two columns containing values for the Quantity attribute one from the source and one with the header TARGET Quantity from the library The same is true for the Vendor and Cost attributes Select the column TARGET Quantity by clicking the header While holding the SHIFT key click and hold the left mouse button and drag the column until a black line appears adjacent to the Quantity column Release the mouse button and the TARGET Quantity column is placed next to the Quantity column 6 With the two columns containing component Quantity information adjacent to each other you can visually compare changes in inventory Select the TARGET Quantity TARGET Cost and TARGET Vendor columns by clicking the column headers with the SHIFT key pressed Click DELETE to eliminate the original library Quantity values The updated attribute values are in the file Viewer and ready to be saved Step 5 Updating the Library 1 Update the Library by choosing the Save to Lib
39. Cross Link Alias Libraries AlphaNumeric B Myset ComponentLibrary CAPCAD2001XDemotDemo lib CompanentName CAPCAD20013DemoxSourcel lib DEFAULT LIBRARY SET C A PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib CAPCAD20013DemoxSourcel lib is CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp tt HaslEEE Cross Link Result 3 Homogeneous Cross Link Result 4 ModifyDate Cross Link Result 5 NumberOfPads NumberOfParts NumberOfPins Part Number PatternName RefDesPrefix ComponentType CreateDate IHasDemorgan You can also choose the Cross Link command from the File menu on the main Library Executive dialog or from the shortcut menu when the imported external file is selected 2 Inthe Select Source Fields to Cross Link list select the check box to the left of the field name s you want to use to link to the P CAD component libraries 3 Inthe Select Target Library Set to Cross Link list expand the library groupings by clicking the 4 sign to its left Navigate to and select the desired target library or library set 4 Click OK The selected library is searched for the chosen source field When a component with a matching source field is found in the library the component information is displayed in the Cross Link Result Viewer Library Executive User s Guide 203 Chapter 14 File Commands Viewer Cross Link Result 5 Table Column Row PomponentNamd Alias ComponentLibrery ComponentType
40. External Source Component data from a non P CAD source can easily be imported into Library Executive Library Executive User s Guide 99 Chapter 7 The Source Browser Accessing Other Features 100 To import an external source from the Source Browser select the root of the Source Browser tree Sources and choose New Comma Separated File The Map Fields and Cross Link commands are available from the Source Browser shortcut menu when you select an external source file For more information about importing component data from a non P CAD source see Importing Data from an External Source page 121 Cross Linking Cross Linking allows you to quickly combine component attribute information from two different sources Refer to the section Understanding Cross Linking page 130 for details about the cross link feature The Cross Link feature is available from the Source Browser by selecting a library set a library an external source file a cross link result or another query result and choosing the Cross Link command from the shortcut menu Cross Link results stored on the Source Browser tree provide access to view the cross link spreadsheet generate a report query cross link again or save the cross link result to a library by choosing the appropriate commands in the shortcut menu Updating or Creating Libraries You can create or update P CAD libraries from several sources A new library can be created from an external source f
41. Generating Publisher Output You can generate the published library by clicking OK in the Library Publisher dialog after having specified the Library Publisher output options filenames sections formatting and item selection Microsoft Word 97 works in the background to generate a published library document of the specified name Open the document in Word to view make changes or to print To open the document you can select the file name in the recently used file list on Word s File menu If you run Word in the foreground after the Library Publisher has been started be careful not to quit the Word application Exiting Word before Library Publisher has finished will halt the publishing process Library Executive User s Guide 239 CHAPTER 1 6 Component Commands The Component commands allow you to create new components open existing components save components and validate components Component New The Component New command allows you to create a new component for later addition into a component library When you choose the Component New command or click the toolbar button the Open dialog appears Open 2 x Look in a Demo z Sl e File name Open Files oftype Library File lib z Gal Navigate to and select a library where the new component will be stored and in which the component s symbol and pattern information reside When you click Open the Component Information di
42. Keyboard Shortcuts This section contains a list of keyboard shortcuts unique to Pattern Editor Press these keys To do this BACKSPACE Used as unwind command while placing objects with multiple Unwind segments e g lines polygons pads Each BACKSPACE stroke unwinds the previously placed item N and SHIFT N N increments a pad by one when placing or renumbering pads increment SHIFT N decrements a pad by one when placing or renumbering and decrement pads Library Executive User s Guide 75 CHAPTER 6 The Symbol Editor Introducing Symbol Editor Symbol Editor allows you to create and modify symbols quickly Once created a symbol can be saved to a library or as a symbol file that can be modified allowing you to create new symbols Symbol Editor includes the Symbol Wizard that automates symbol generation Symbol Editor s interface is similar to P CAD Schematic This chapter lists Symbol Editor features and describes the Symbol Editor interface detailing those features which are distinct from P CAD Schematic Symbol Editor Features This section highlights some of the important Symbol Editor features The ability to load and save symbols from a P CAD library The ability to load and save partially created symbols Symbol Wizard automates symbol creation Utils Validate command validates a symbol before saving it to a library Enhanced Place Pin and Pin Properties functions support automa
43. Launching a Reference link When the special attribute Reference whose value is a reference link is added to the pattern you can select the Reference attribute and click the Launch button to start a program or web address to display a document or web site For details about this function refer to the P CAD Schematic User s Guide Pin Placement The Place Pin command shows you the next available pin number and lets you increment pin numbers To place a pin 1 Choose Place Pin or click the toolbar Pin button to open the Place Pin dialog 84 Library Executive User s Guide Pin Placement Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor r Text Style Length r Inside Edge Inside Pin Name C Shot None None C Clock C Open PinDes iPinstyie Noma C Open High C Long r Outside Edge E pen Low gt Passive Up Text Styles C User 2 Nong EF Passive Dowr f 3 State z 2 E 0 Om C Polarity In 300 Omil ty E Display Default Pin Name C Polarity Out Een lV Pin Name Hysteresis M Pin Des IV Increment Pin Nami E Beate Default Pin Des T e r Outside None Iv Increment Pin Des C FlowIn gt Pin Numbering F ue P i w Bi Unused Pin Numbers 19 C Analog Sota igital 19 Starting Pin Number C NonLogic 1 Increment Pin Number cont 2 Inthe Text Style frame set the text style for the pin name and pin designator Click the Text Styles button to open the Options
44. Library Commands Drill Symbol Layers DRILL FDRILL Map these layers to lt none gt Information on these layers is not used in pad definitions Tool codes and Drill symbols can be assigned for each hole size for N C Drill and Drill Symbol output in the PCB editor e Paste and Solder Mask Layers MSKGTP SLDMSK MSKGBT Library Executive maps these layers to Top Mask or Bottom Mask It is recommend that you map these layers to none Plane Layers Plane layers are not mapped in Library Executive so you get the default thermal on every plane layer that you create in your PCB design Map these layers to none Recognizable but unmapped Layers Layers that are recognized but recommended not mapped are mapped to none It is recommended that you map internal signal layers to none Unrecognizable Layers Any user defined layers that are not in the list of standard Master Designer layer names are mapped to ignored For instance if you create a user defined Master Designer layer TESTI Library Executive maps this layer to ignored Merging the Libraries To merge the libraries choose Library Merge Patterns Select as the Source Libraries the PCB pattern libraries to be merged into the Destination Schematic library Once the libraries have been merged into an integrated P CAD library you can delete the pattern only library or use it for PCB placement if you don t need integrated library components Library
45. Library Executive User s Guide Library Publisher Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Format Options Ea Iv Iv Iv Iv Vv Iv Iv Iv Iv File Name Set All File Date amp Time Clear All File Size Number of Components Number of Patterns Number of Symbols List of Component Name List of Pattern Names List of Symbol Names This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the library section These options are described below File Name The full path and filename of the library being published File Date amp Time The modified date and time of the library File Size The size of the library Number of Components The number of components contained in the library Number of Patterns The number of patterns contained in the library Number of Symbol The number of symbols contained in the library List of Component Names The names of the components contained in the library List of Pattern Names The names of the patterns contained in the library List of Symbol Names The names of the symbols contained in the library Set All Selects all options Clear All Clears all option selections Done Saves the selected options and returns to the Library Publisher dialog Component Format When including the Component Section click the Component Format button to open the Component Format Options dialog Library Executive User s Guide 233 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Publisher 234 Component Fo
46. MIX H 49 verifying attributes sss 137 Considerations importing PDIF libraries 274 PDIF library eeeeernnnn 269 Contents Help sse 267 Copy Spreadsheet Selection Edit command ete tert re RR 249 Copy Library command 217 copying items between libraries 217 create component sese 6 67 83 Custom Toolbar sse 5 libraries from Source Browser new library new pattern pattern essent pattern attributes wo eects 61 pattern templatess silkscreen lines Symb ceteri aeta symbol attributes symbol templates using Symbol Wizard 79 Create Date s icscccrcsccseississcescavecssssesebonsces 43 47 Search tre teen 110 creating components cseseseseseesseeeeseseseneeteteteeees 191 creating a new library sees 42 creating library sets esses 95 Cross Link File command 126 201 cross linking see 127 130 accessing from Source Browser 100 an imported file iz Result Viewer essen understanding cross reference file custom libraries tetro 40 Custom Toolbar esee 5 displaying m Custom Toolbar View command 261 Cu
47. Mapping page 124 or Cross Linking page 126 for details In both cases any imported field name header can be mapped to a field name recognized by P CAD For example the imported field name Component Price may be mapped to the P CAD recognized field name Cost Any field name can be mapped by choosing the File Map Fields command 5 Choose the desired separator character from the list in the List Separator box or type the character you want to use with the exception of the double quote 6 Select the character to be used to denote comments from the Comment Character list or type the character you want to use except a double quote 7 Click OK to open the Viewer dialog Field Mapping P CAD Library Executive has knowledge of a set of field names including a primary key predefined properties and attributes and user defined attributes These fields are listed in Fields and Data Types page 103 When importing data from an external source the original field names may or may not be recognized by P CAD If unrecognized Library Executive assumes the data within the field are user defined attribute values If recognized the component data within those fields are understood by P CAD Both user defined and predefined attributes can be used throughout Library Executive including library update design and library verification and query If you want to compare for instance the number of pads on the component in the P CAD library
48. NumberOfPads NumberOrPins N Em E nsu 27128A 2 9 54HC125 10 54HC245 15 74HC125 18 74HC138 74HC245 18 74HC373 CA PCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CA PCAD2001 De CAPCAD2001 De CA PCAD2001 De Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal o molejeieiojejoio ojojiso o ojojoio ojojo olo File Query The Cross Link Result Viewer is a spreadsheet attributes found in both the source file and the library are displayed Across the top of the table are the fields found in the source and library If a field name is found in both source and library values from the library field are distinguished by their column header TARGET FieldName The field values for each of the components are listed in the appropriate column The Cross Link Result Viewer dialog is a spreadsheet Refer to Library Basics page 3 for details on manipulating spreadsheets File Query 204 The File Query command opens the Query dialog From this dialog a query can be conducted on the components of the imported external source file The Query dialog may also be accesse
49. P CAD Library Executive by adding items to the Custom Tools toolbar and the Utils menu When you select Utils Customize the Utils Customize dialog opens Utils Customize x Custom amp SCH Add Bemove Move Up Move Down Menu Text IH otepad Command C Program Files Windows NT Accessories Arguments Initial Directory Browse Display T Promptfor arguments Normal C Minimized Maximized OK Cancel The Utils Customize dialog is used to add new tools or delete and modify existing tools on the Custom Tools Toolbar and Utils menu The fields on the dialog are as follows e Custom Tools Lists the custom tools that currently exist e Menu Text The description of the tool being added The Menu Text field allows up to 40 characters The buttons on the toolbar display as many letters as can fit on the button If the name of a tool being added to the custom toolbar is too long to be displayed in its entirety you can change the display by using lower case letters or shortening the name of the new tool You may insert an ampersand amp anywhere in the text string to designate a menu shortcut key For instance if the Menu Text entry is amp Notepad the menu shortcut key for the tool is the letter N Library Executive User s Guide 265 Chapter 21 Utils Commands Utils Customize 266 The Utils menu displays the list of custom tools that have been added directly beneath the
50. Pattern IDIP14 Select Symbol Pattem View Select Symbol Number of Gates 4 Edi Symbol HESS Number of Pads T7 Demyn nee WENT Component Type TC RetdesPrefic eae Normal Component Style Gate Numbering p Alternate Views Pattern View Alphabetic C Numeric T IEEE T DeMorgan C Power Homogeneous Sheet Connector C Heterogeneous Module Prey Syn Next Sym Brev Pin _NextPin Pattern View DIP14 Select Pattem Edit Pattern Component Info Pins Vi Symbol View Prev Pattem Graphic Next Pattem Graphic Current Paltem Graphics Primary Saaceaae mw Prev Pad _ Next Pad Padi PinDes Gate sym Pin t PinName Gate Ea PinEa Elec Type 3 4 1 1 1 ny Wy Microsoft Word y P CAD 2001 L SSilnbox Outlook E Breaking News EM Paint Shop Pro sAm 533PM wESOHSNE Validating and Saving a Component As a final check that the component is correct we can validate it 1 Choose Component Validate or click on the xl button on the Library Executive main toolbar If the component and its pins have been set up properly there should be no errors If you have errors the error description will indicate which part needs to be altered Fix the error s and revalidate the component until the following dialog displays and click OK Information 12219 i No errors found 2 Choose Component Save to complete the c
51. Text Style dialog where you can add or modify existing text styles for your design 3 Inthe Display frame select the Pin Name and Pin Des check boxes to turn on the display of the pin name and pin designator Clear the check boxes to turn off the display 4 Type the default pin name if desired in the Default Pin Name box The default pin name is a placeholder for the real pin name Use this default label to change the orientation or position of the pin name The default pin name like a pin number cannot be edited once the pin is attached to a symbol Select the Increment Pin Name check box so that each time this pin is placed the pin name is one greater than the last pin placed 5 Type the default pin designator if desired in the Default Pin Designator box The default pin designator can be incremented each time a pin is placed by selecting the Increment Pin Des check box 6 The Unused Pin Number box defaults to the next unused pin number unused pins are shown in the list that appears when you click the Down Arrow Choose a number or choose gt to begin numbering from that number onwards 7 The Starting Pin Number box defaults to the next available pin number To change the default value type a new number in the box If you place a pin with a duplicate pin number you hear a warning beep 8 Enter the number positive or negative by which you want to increment pin numbers in the Increment Pin Number box 9 Select the
52. Use the SHIFT key with the slide arrows to increment the value by 0 1mil or 0 01mm e Padi Position Indicates which pad will become pad number 1 when the pattern is created on the PCB design The value is only used for DIP and QUAD patterns The remaining pads will be numbered in a counterclockwise order starting from pad 1 The Pad 1 Position value is not available for ARRAY patterns The first pad of an ARRAY pattern is always the upper left corner pad typically designated A1 If that pad has been removed using the Corner Pads options then the next pad A2 will be used for pad 1 e Pad Style Pad 1 For DIP patterns only Choose the pad style from those in the open PCB design to be used for pad 1 Use the Rotate box to rotate the pad style 90 degrees separately from the other pads of the DIP pattern e Pad Style Others For DIP patterns only Choose the pad style from those in the Options Pad Style dialog in PCB to be used for all other pads Use the Rotate box to rotate the pad style 90 degrees separately from pad 1 s style e Pad Style Top amp Bottom For QUAD patterns only Choose the pad style from those in the open PCB design to be used for the top and bottom pads Use the Rotate box to rotate the pad style 90 degrees e Pad Style Left amp Right For QUAD patterns only Choose the pad style from those in the open PCB design to be used for the left and right side pads Use the Rotate box to rotate the pad style 90 degrees
53. and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Query C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Setall Clear all Iv New Result Table Fed Show Criteria And 0o ComponentName 2 Alias ComponentLibrary 4 ComponentType 5 NumberOfPads 6 NumberOfPins NumberOfParts 8 Homogeneous 9 AlphaNumeric HaslEEE HasDemorgan RefDesPrefix PattemName ModifyDate p x x x x xx xxx x gt June 16 1997 If Add Bow Add Column Query Cancel 5 Click Query All components in the library modified on or after June 16th 1997 will appear in the Query Results Viewer Step 2 Report on Updated Components You can generate a report on these updated components This report can be easily compared with a Bill of Materials from your design You can determine which attribute changes if any impact your final board design 1 From the Query Results Viewer choose Report from the Table menu 2 Select the Report option button in the Style Format frame 3 Type in a header footer and output file name 4 Select all the check boxes in the Page Format frame as well as the File option button in the Output 5 Click OK Load the file into a text file viewer to view and print the report Lesson 7 Verifying Your Design Against a Library In lesson 6 you learned how to generate a report on any library components changed after placement In this lesson you will learn how to verify the com
54. and the external source file both must be named the P CAD recognized name NumberOfPads Mapping fields in the imported source file connects the attributes and their values between the P CAD library and external source The File Map Fields command maps the field name to predefined attribute or property names recognized by P CAD or to other user defined attribute names The primary key ComponentName is the only attribute required to complete the import process This attribute tells Library Executive which component the imported attribute values belong to If the imported file contains the ComponentName field the import process can be completed by Library Executive User s Guide Importing a Character Separated File Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source field mapping If the imported file does not contain a component name attribute refer to Cross Linking page 126 for details on how to include this required ComponentName field The mapped fields are properties and attributes that form the building blocks of a complete intelligent component Map Fields maps the original character delimited file Any modifications made to the file contents within the Viewer prior to mapping will be lost when the Map Fields command is chosen To save these modifications choose Save To Library before mapping To map the imported fields 1 Choose Map Fields from the Table menu of the Viewer to open the Map Fields dialog Map Fields CAP
55. attributes from the current contents of Library Executive memory as displayed in the Viewer Verify does not use the original source file for comparison If changes have been made to a library used as a source for the Verify command choose Reload to refresh the Library Executive s memory before conducting the verification 3 Thetree structure in the Select Target Library Set Library to Verify box allows you to view all Library Executive library sets and their contents at various levels of detail by expanding or collapsing the branches of the tree Groupings containing collapsed levels are shown with a sign To expand the grouping simply click the 4 Expanded groupings are shown with a sign To collapse the grouping simply click the sign Select the library or library set which you want to verify If a library is selected its contents are compared to the selected source attributes chosen in step 2 If a library set is selected all libraries within that set are compared If the List components not found in library box is cleared components in the source that are not in the selected library are listed in the difference report Library Executive User s Guide 139 Chapter 10 Library Verification The Verification Report If the Verify only components with matching library box is selected Library Executive searches the source for components whose ComponentLibrary attribute matches the selected library Only matched components
56. button goes to the last pin of the previous gate the Next Sym button goes to the first pin of the next gate Symbol Selection Click the Select Symbol button to select the attached symbol Changes made in this dialog are reflected in the other view dialogs Attaching a Symbol When you load a symbol into the spreadsheet you have the option to overwrite the current information with the incoming data if a difference is detected between the incoming and current pin designator If you choose to overwrite the spreadsheet data the following conditions are applied for single gate components e Incoming pins whose default pin designators match a row s pin designator are merged with the spreadsheet data and the spreadsheet pin name and symbol pin number are overwritten e Remaining pins and rows that could not be matched using the pin designator are matched by pin name and the pin designator symbol pin number and gate number are overwritten e Any pins remaining are matched using the symbol pin numbers and the pin designators pin names and gate numbers are overwritten Library Executive User s Guide 259 Chapter 20 View Commands View Source Browser Finally any remaining unmatched pins and rows are written to the spreadsheet in the remaining blank rows on a first come first served basis No rows will be overwritten unless a match is found If a pattern is not attached additional rows are inserted to accommodate the remaining pins Mult
57. can be particularly useful when importing an external source file that does not include a ComponentName field 126 Library Executive User s Guide Importing a Character Separated File Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Combining component attributes from a P CAD library and an external source file can help you easily include the required ComponentName field in the imported data In Field Mapping page 124 the field mapping of an imported separated list file was discussed Field mapping is the optimal method of including the required ComponentName field in the imported file if the external source file contains the ComponentName field For example the source file field Name of Component may be mapped to the P CAD primary key ComponentName using the Map Fields command If the external source file does not contain the name of the components the Cross Link command is the optimal method to include a ComponentName field For instance the component information you want to import is organized with a unique Part Number as the database index identifier There is a component name field but the component names are not unique There may be for instance several components named 7400 produced by different manufacturers These components are distinguished by a unique Part Number in the database The Cross Link feature of P CAD Library Executive allows you to link the unique Part Number directly to its corresponding component in the P CAD li
58. can fill in the Number of Pins If a pattern is attached the Number of Pins is supplied Attaching gates automatically increases the number of pins if no pattern is attached Gates If you set the Component Style to Homogeneous then all Gate Eq values are set to the first Gate Eq value Gate numbers appear in order either alphabetically or numerically If the number of gates is greater than 0 you can select an attached symbol by clicking the Select Symbol button IEEE and DeMorgan equivalents are available if those check boxes are selected in the Alternate Views frame View Pins View The View Pins View command opens the Pins View dialog where you can assign pin data Pins View olx Component Inf Pattern View Symbol View Pad Number 256 nput nput Output nput nput Dutput Power Dutput nput nput Output nput nput Power A B Y A B Y G W A B N A B Vi Library Executive User s Guide View Pattern View Chapter 20 View Commands If there is an attached pattern the information in the current row also appears in the Pattern View dialog The corresponding pad is selected in the Pattern View dialog Changes made to row data are automatically updated in the Pattern View dialog If there is an attached symbol the information in the current row of the Pins View dialog also appears in the Symbol View dialog The corresponding pin and gate are selected in the Symbol View dialog Changes
59. can specify the library name save mode and update options Source The source contains the components that are saved to the library It is defined by the location from which you selected the Save To Library Command If Save To Library is chosen from the File menu the source is the imported external source file If Save To Library is chosen from the Source Browser shortcut menus the source could be a Query Result a Cross Link Result an external source file or a P CAD library The Save to Library command saves only component attributes To create a complete integrated component both the electrical and graphical properties must be specified Save Mode frame Create New creates a new P CAD library from the selected source Update updates the selected P CAD library according to the update criteria for specific attributes Library Click the Library button to select the name and directory of the P CAD library to be updated or created You can also type the name of the library directly into the box Create new components If selected components in the source that are not found in the selected library are added to the library when updated Update only components with matching library name If selected components are updated in the P CAD library only if both the ComponentName and the ComponentLibrary field values match Create component time stamps if not present If selected the time stamp attributes CreateDate and ModifyDate are added to th
60. chapter 11 chapter 12 chapter 13 Library Verification Verifying a P CAD Library asinine tede ren Re Rene deed aa dne t 137 Accessing the Verify Command sssssssssseeeeeenen enne enne 138 From the Source Browser ios ced ke detta cedocex a ed esi Hd ee eee d rade dus 138 Fromithe Table Menu treo tetra repe p exe tapini Erde Ete gne Fromthe Fe Menu zr yet Wr OPER E dienes teeasaeedie Setting up the Verify Dialog The Verification Rep OTi a a a E aar E aE tenete sess entente nas Using Verify from PCB and Schematic sssssseeeee emen 141 Verifying a Design sc e e teret LR ERR SRERERA S MER SER ehe NR e Recta ERR UTER RETO 141 Updating the Design 5 21i ene a eet Eee rne te 143 Reports Reports in P CAD Library Executive ssseseeeeene emen ener nnns 145 Accessing the Report Command sss eene emen 146 Generating a Report ssssssssssssssssseseseeenee tenente enne te nemen nnd ener t rnnn nlsi enn Publishing a P CAD Library Setting up the Library Publisher Dialog em 147 Format Options Rc 149 Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols 00 0 eee eeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaas 154 Generating the Report Output oo ee eeeeeeee ene ee erent ee eeeeaeeeenaeeeeesnaeeeeenaeeeenneeeeneaa 154 Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic seee em 155 Setting up a Custom BOM Report enne nennen 15
61. check box to the left of the attribute you want to delete from the library All selected attributes will be deleted from the library Clear the check boxes of the attributes you want to leave in the library 4 Click OK The selected attributes are automatically removed from the library Accessing Other Features From the Source Browser you can perform queries import data from an external source cross link and update or create libraries You can even place components selected in the Source Browser directly to a design in PCB or Schematic The shortcut menus vary depending on the item selected in the Source Browser This section lists the features accessible from selected items in the Source Browser Query With Query you can search for components with particular specifications You can designate a wide variety of component characteristics including cost manufacturer number of pins etc Searches can be conducted both on P CAD libraries and on external sources such as a company wide database You can access Query from the Source Browser by selecting a library set a library an external source file a cross link result or another query result and choosing the Query command Query results are stored on the Source Browser tree where you can view the query spreadsheet generate a report cross link save the query to a library or query again For more information about Query see Querying Libraries page 103 Importing Data from an
62. component s PRT attribute e the cross reference file e the name of the component with prt added as a suffix Attached pattern names are used when patterns from a PCB library are merged into a Schematic library They are also used to determine the auto placed pattern during PCB s netlist load operation Power pin net assignment Power and ground pins are specified either through a cross reference file or the component s PWGD attribute The PWGD attribute takes precedence over an entry in the cross reference file Padstack references There are no padstacks in a Master Designer PDIF library Component pads in a Master Designer PDIF library reference a padstack number only During translation Library Executive User s Guide 269 Appendix A Importing Master Designer Libraries PDIF Library Considerations 270 from Master Designer PDIF to P CAD libraries component pads retain their padstack number As in Master Designer when a component is placed from the library the padstack numbers is used to determine the correct padstack association If a component is placed onto an existing design that was translated from Master Designer PDIF and a padstack with the same number is found then that padstack will be used However if no padstack with the corresponding padstack number is located then the library Default padstack is used instead P CAD integrated libraries P CAD integrated libraries provide the ability to place the same component i
63. components in a P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic design see Component Placement page 163 Accessing the Imported File You can access the imported source file from several locations in Library Executive Accessing from the Source Browser Imported source files are stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on an imported file allows you to view the Viewer spreadsheet map fields cross link generate a report save the imported component attributes to a library or query Cross link results are also stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on a cross link result allows you to view the cross link spreadsheet generate a report query cross link again or save the cross link result to a library Accessing from the View Menu Choosing the View Comma separated File command displays the imported source file in the Viewer Library Executive User s Guide 135 CHAPTER 1 0 Library Verification With P CAD Library Executive you can easily check for discrepancies between components in different sources You can check for differences between the following sources e An external source file and a P CAD library e A PCB or Schematic design and a library e A Query Result and a library e ACross Link Result and a library e P CAD libraries Perhaps you have created a P CAD library from your corporate component database With library verify you can quickly check whether the database has since changed And how it has change
64. current workspace to open the Design Verification dialog Library Executive User s Guide 141 Chapter 10 Library Verification Using Verify from PCB and Schematic 142 Design Verification ix Library Properties Attributes son pen Libraries MAlphaNumeric AODF L Iv ComponentHeight Iv ComponentLibrary Iv ComponentT ype v Description WHasDemorgan Iv HaslEEE IvHomogeneous v Link wJNoSwap v NumberDfPads NumberOfParts v NumberDfPins Part Number PattemName xl Report File J report txt Report components not found in libraries Update Design Using Selected Librane IV View Report pi E T SE Using i iren Close Library Setup The Library Properties Attributes list displays only the primary field ComponentName and the other predefined properties and attributes To add user defined attributes to the Library Properties Attributes list click the Scan button Clicking the Scan button searches all open libraries for user defined attributes and adds them to the list Select the attributes in the Library Properties Attributes list you want to verify between the design and any open libraries A grayed check box indicates that the property or attribute is read only Read only attributes can be verified but not updated in the design The Open Libraries list box contains all open libraries in the current design Design verification reports on differences between components in the design an
65. desired pin length option button from the options in the Length frame Library Executive User s Guide 85 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor Pin Properties 10 11 12 13 Select the desired display characteristics by selecting the Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside and Outside option buttons Click OK Move the cursor to the location in the active window where you want to place the pin and click to place it Drag and drop release to place it more accurately An alternate method for drag and drop is ALT click and then release the ALT You can then move the pin freely with the mouse without having to keep the button depressed To cancel the pin placement right mouse click The Status Line shows the pin number of the pin about to be placed and also indicates if the pin number is a duplicate The N key increments the pin about to be placed by one SHIFT N decrements the number If 6 is the next available pin number pressing N would result in the pin being assigned number 7 pressing SHIFT N would result in the pin being assigned number 5 You can continue to place similar pins by clicking in additional locations Pin attributes previously specified in the Place Pin dialog are also displayed To stop right mouse click or press ESC or click the Select toolbar button The Undo command removes the entire sequence of pins The BACKSPACE key removes the last placed pin Pin names and pin designators can be subselected for movin
66. displays a combination of the attributes in the two source files for the linked components Verify Opens the Verify dialog where you can compare the components on the Query Results Viewer with components in a P CAD library Report Opens the Report dialog where you can generate a report on the components included in the Query Result Viewer Save To Library Opens the Save Source dialog where you can save the components of the Query Result Viewer to a P CAD library Closes the Query Result Viewer For more information about Query Verify Report and Save commands applied to a Query Result Viewer see Using Query Results page 116 114 Library Executive User s Guide Query Results Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Column Commands The Column commands are available from the Column or shortcut menus when a column is selected from the Query Result Viewer With the Column commands you can add remove rename and sort the columns of fields and their values The following table describes the Column commands Command Description Add Adds a column to the Query Result Viewer to the left of the currently selected column Displays a dialog prompting you for the new field name Removes the currently selected column from the Query Result Viewer Rename Opens a dialog where you can designate a new name for the currently selected column There are two methods available to sort columns Allow Duplicates and Resolve Duplicates T
67. field name Click the Down Arrow to display the list of field names 4 Select the desired P CAD field name The field is automatically placed on the spreadsheet and the field type is automatically updated in the Data Type column You can modify the Data Type from the list of data types in the third column Modifying the data type from its default value may be desired for two reasons e Sort order The Integer and String data types have different sorting orders e Display Selecting Boolean data type changes Integer 0 1 values to True False and vice versa Read only attributes are for search and display purposes only The default data type String is always used when saving the remaining attributes to a P CAD library When the Original Field Name is mapped to a New Field Name the field type is automatically updated in the Mapping column The field type indicates whether the attribute is a primary key a predefined attribute or a user defined attribute 5 Click the Add Row button to append a row to the end of the table A list of original field names becomes available in the first column You can map the original field name to more than one P CAD recognized field name This one to many mapping is useful when your corporate database is indexed differently than a P CAD library For example the database contains two 7400 components produced by two different manufacturers The database field Part Number can be mapped to both a Compo
68. for information about spreadsheet editing and manipulation The Map Fields dialog allows you to specify the new field names and data types to which the original fields are mapped The spreadsheet contains the following columns e Original Field Name Lists the field names of the imported external source file along with the original field names New rows can be added to generate a one to many mapping For details refer to Using the Map Fields Command page 200 e New Field Name Lists the field names to which the fields of the imported external source file are mapped along with the P CAD recognized field names Library Executive User s Guide 199 Chapter 14 File Commands File Map Fields e Data Type Contains the data type of the field to be mapped Integer String or Boolean Modifying the data type is used for search and display purposes only Using the Map Fields Command After the external source file has been imported into P CAD Library Executive you can map the field names to the predefined field names recognized by P CAD Map Fields maps the original separated list file Any modifications made to the file contents within the Viewer will be lost when the Map Fields command is used To save these modifications choose Save To Library before mapping To map the imported fields 1 ChooseFile Map Fields to open the Map Fields dialog 2 Click in the New Field Name column A down arrow appears at the right of the selected
69. for translating libraries If you don t specify a cross reference file an error message appears indicating that the number of components pins created for a component does not match the number of entries created for that component in the PDIF file and that power pins might be missing The Pin to Padstack Map button lets you select a pin mapping file pmf that contains pin mapping information used to translate P CAD PDIF part library files P CAD Library Executive 222 Library Executive User s Guide Library Translate Chapter 15 Library Commands uses this pin mapping file to change padstack information to P CAD pad styles The pin mapping file is not used when translating symbol libraries 3 Click Source library The Library File Listing dialog opens where you can select the PDIF files available in the current directory 4 Select the desired PDIF file and then click OK The Library Translate dialog reappears and displays the name of the source library next to the Source Library button 5 Click Destination Library The Library File Listing dialog opens where you can type the path and name of the destination library 6 Click OK The Library Translate dialog reappears and displays the name of the destination library next to the Destination Library button 7 Click OK again to open the Master Designer to P CAD SCH Layer Mapping dialog P CAD to ACCEL SCH Layer Mapping x NETNAM USED CMPNAM USED BORDER USED NULL IGNORE
70. how to convert your component database information to this simple format To import the sample MRP file follow these steps 1 Choose File Import to open the Import Separated List File dialog Import Separated List File x CA PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp b First line contains field names C Generate default field names List Separator Comment Character bd OK Cancel 2 Click the Browse button Navigate to the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory and select the comma delimited source file Ale mrp txt 3 Click the First line contains field names button since the first line of the sample file contains the field names that correspond to the file contents If the first line of the external source file did not contain field names the Generate default field names button should be selected 4 Enter or select a character in the List Separator box Enter or select a character in the Comment Character box 6 Click OK The external source file Viewer appears 170 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Viewer CAPCAD2001YTutorialVAle mrp txt Table Column Row __ Omp Name Pat Name Quantity Description 1 cAP300 cAP300 65753 Capacitor 2 CAP300R CAP300 90956 RadialPolar 3 CAP350 CAP350 14357 Capacitor 4 CAP400A CAP400 65775 Axial Polariz 5 CAP 00A CAP700 80754 Axial Polariz 8 CAP800A CAP800 4382 Axial Polariz 7 CAP1000 C
71. important information about the structure and characteristics of P CAD libraries including e Integrated pattern and custom libraries e Using the Library Index e Creating updating and saving libraries e The relationship between and usage of components patterns and symbols e Pin numbers pad numbers and pin designators e Pattern library naming conventions e Updating libraries with swap information Errors preventing saving e Copying renaming and using aliases e Compacting libraries Integrated Pattern and Custom Libraries A library with components having both pattern and symbol information is an integrated library Both schematics and printed circuit boards can be built with the same components from an integrated library P CAD includes 334 new component libraries containing over 27 000 components These libraries have been developed by the P CAD Library Development Center in accordance with the ISO 9001 certifed component development process that they have established P CAD supports two types of libraries integrated and pattern In P CAD a library can contain three types of items logical components pattern graphics and symbol graphics Components contain only logical information the associated graphics for Schematic symbols and PCB patterns are stored separately This is the key to understanding how P CAD libraries are structured Library Executive User s Guide 39 Chapter 4 Libraries Integrated Pattern and Cust
72. is followed by a brief summary of how to generate the query output Query output is detailed in Using Query Results page 116 The Query dialog is a spreadsheet Refer to Library Basics page 3 for details on manipulating spreadsheets The Query command searches for components from the current contents of Library Executive memory as displayed in the Viewer Query does not search the original source file If changes have been made to a library choose Reload to refresh the library components in Library Executive s memory before conducting the Query Selecting Search and Display Fields For a Query you must select the fields you want to search as well as the fields to be displayed in your query result The search fields are used to specify criteria important to your component search Display fields contain the information you want to view in your query result When conducting a Query both search and display fields should be in your Field list in the Query dialog To put a field in the Field list you can do one of the following e Click the Select All button All of the fields defined for the present query source appear in the Field list e Select desired fields from the pick list When you click the Field column a down arrow appears to the right Click the Down Arrow and the field list appears where you can select the desired field The field is automatically placed on the spreadsheet e The Clear All button removes all fields f
73. libraries In this example choose pcb1 1lib 3 Select the Tango PCB DOS option button in the Source Format frame Note that the only available destination format is P CAD Binary 4 Click the Destination Library button to display the Library File Listing dialog and type a name for your destination library In this example type accpcb1 1lib Your dialog now appears as follows 192 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 7 Source Library C NPCADZOOTSLIBNPCBT LIB CAPCADZOUTALIBNACCPCBT LIB r Source Format Destination Format C TangoPRO Binary P CAD Binary C TangoPRO ASCII C FED ASCI C P CAD Binary C P CAD ASCII C Tango Schematic DOS e c Tango PCB DOS PDIF Translate Close Click Translate to begin the translation process Repeat the process for each pattern library you want to convert In this example translate pcb2 1ib and name itaccpcb2 lib Click Close to exit the dialog The translated libraries are now ready to use with PCB but not with P CAD Schematic because they don t have symbol information You can add symbols to the library or you can merge this library with another library having symbols as described in the Library Merge Patterns command Tango Schematic Only To translate your Tango Schematic symbol libraries choose Library Translate The Library Translate dialog appears 3 2
74. line width The slide arrows scroll through the values defined by choosing the Options Current Line command You can also add a new line width in the Options Current Line dialog Default Pin Name The default pin name of the current pin e Default Pin Designator The default pin designator for the current pin e Current Pin Number The current pin number The slide arrows scroll through each pin number allowing you to assign pin names and Default Pin Designators 80 Library Executive User s Guide Working with Symbol Files Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor e Length Selects the pin length of all pins in the symbol Select User and enter a value to set a custom pin length e Display Turns on or off the display of the Pin Name and Pin Des Working with Symbol Files Symbols can be saved as symbol files s ym allowing you to save partially created symbols and to create symbol templates which you can use to create new symbols Before a symbol can be copied to a library it must pass a validation test If it fails you can save it as a sym file and return to it ata later time Loading a Symbol from a Library You can load an existing symbol from a library and modify it to create a new symbol When you choose Symbol Open the Open dialog appears Open u eee Files of type Symbol sym lib x Cancel Notice that this dialog allows you to open symbol files sym and library files 115 When you c
75. list To be usable in P CAD Library Executive all available libraries must be in one or more library sets A default library set called DEFAULT LIBRARY SET includes any open library files that do not have a set specified explicitly Library sets defined in the Library Setup dialog are saved in the initialization file cmp ini for the next time you start Library Executive Adding Deleting and Renaming Library Sets To add a new library set 1 Click the Add Set button 2 Type the name of the new library set in the box To delete a library set 1 Selecta library set from the Library Sets list 2 Click the Delete button Library Executive User s Guide 95 Chapter 7 The Source Browser Browsing Components Patterns and Symbols 3 Deleting a set removes the set and the libraries it contains To rename a library set 1 2 3 Select a library set from the Library Sets list Click the Rename button Modify the set name in the box Modifying Library Set Contents To add a library to the selected library set 1 2 3 Click the Add Library button Navigate to and select the desired library Click Open Selected libraries can be removed from a library set by clicking Remove Modifying Library Sets from the Source Browser You can add rename and delete selected libraries and library sets directly from the Source Browser by choosing those commands from the shortcut menu Other operations including Que
76. lists all of the pattern graphics associated with the pattern selected in the Source Patterns window Click on an entry to highlight it if you wish to attach it to your target pattern e New Name This field shows the current name for the selected source pattern graphic By default the name is the same as the name of the graphic selected in the Pattern Graphics window list If you want to call the pattern graphic you are attaching by a different name just type the new name into the field overwriting the default e Copy to Target Button Click this button to attach the selected source pattern graphic to your nominated target pattern graphic Library Executive User s Guide 215 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Pattern Graphics 216 Target Pattern Graphics Frame This frame contains a window that displays all of the pattern graphics attached to the target pattern As pattern graphics are copied from the source patterns using the Copy to Target button they appear in this window If you decide that a certain pattern graphic that has been copied to the target is incorrect or not required it can be removed using the Remove From Target button Pattern Graphics Visual Window This window gives a graphical representation of the pattern graphic selected It is shared by both the Source Pattern Graphics and Target Pattern Graphics frames By default the Primary pattern graphic of the first pattern in the Source Patterns list is displayed O
77. more pattern graphics are added to the target pattern this list updates to show all pattern graphics that are currently attached Library Executive User s Guide Library Pattern Graphics Chapter 15 Library Commands e Pattern Graphics Visual Window This window gives a graphical representation of the pattern graphic selected in the Pattern Graphics list window The default display is for the Primary pattern graphic Alternates Tab This tab of the Library Pattern Graphics dialog allows you to browse through all of the patterns in the source library and attach any of the pattern graphics associated with these patterns to your nominated target pattern Library Pattern Graphics Target Pattern s Source Patte hics Source Patterns Pattem Graphics Copy to Target New Name Target Pattern Graphics Primary Cancel Apply Pattern Changes to Library The following fields are available e Source Pattern Graphics Frame This frame is used for browsing the patterns in the source library for pattern graphics that you want to attach to the target pattern The available fields are e Source Patterns This scrollable list window contains all of the patterns within the source library You can browse the pattern graphics that are attached to each pattern by selecting that pattern from the list The attached pattern graphics are listed in the Pattern Graphics list window e Pattern Graphics This window
78. nter entente ne rei A eerie 103 gj 103 Data Types 25er kt estoit tese UR ecc b etnia a oed emot ente 105 Setting up a QUSA e tt ee e ree Hr CU IE EROR eu HERE 106 Selecting Search and Display Fields ssseee 106 Selecting the Search Criteria 107 Special Search Criteria by Data Type sssss eee 109 ANG Versus Or uie RU Seer REPRE EE ERE RE DRE AEN MPELR GUERRA 112 Specifying Output ninn Ae dv ee eee eee eee rte A te edie 113 Executing a Query euet c retten dine rete Degree eee dee dereud eee 113 Query Results reti EI ee ie Dian e eos e Rt iy bac utah tare ture DER lire dds 113 Query Result VIeWer x esiti ee etre eite ec ce eed DE PIRA Se ER ERR uen 113 Query Result Menu Commands seen enne enne 114 Using Query Resulls e rite t teret n Pope nte motn dinge ede Es 116 Accessing Query and Query Results ssssssssseene enne 117 Accessing Query from the Source Browser sssee em 117 Accessing Query from the Utils Menu sese 117 Accessing Query from the File Menu sseee eme 118 Using Query from PCB and Schematic sse 118 Importing Data from an External Source What Can Be Imported uice trop cci eet io bend eL ea de za ges Rc EN 121 Character Separated File Format sssssssssssssseeeeeeeennenn 121 Iriport IMITA
79. or press ESC to end the Renumber sequence The Undo command reverses the entire renumbered sequence Library Executive User s Guide Renumbering Default Pin Names Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor Renumbering Default Pin Names You can renumber Default Pin Names by following these steps 1 Choose the Utils Renumber command to open the Uti s Renumber dialog Utils Renumber Type Pin Number C Default Pin Designator Cancel Starting Pin Name fi Increment Value Select the Default Pin Name option button Notice that the Starting Pin Name value changes to A instead of 1 You can enter any alphanumeric prefix as the Starting Pin Name Follow the steps outlined in Renumbering Pins page 88 to renumber each pin s Default Pin Name as you click on each pin Renumbering Default Pin Designators You can renumber the Default Pin Designators by following these steps 1 Choose Utils Renumber to open the Utils Renumber dialog Utils Renumber Type C Pin Number C Default Pin Name vi a Cancel Starting Pin Designator fi Increment Value Select the Default Pin Designator option button Notice that the Starting Pin Designator value 2 changes to A instead of 1 You can enter any alphanumeric character as the Starting Pin Designator 3 Follow the steps outlined in Renumbering Pins page 88 to renumber each pin s Default Pin Designator as you click each pin Library Executive Us
80. pads along the top and bottom of a QUAD or ARRAY pattern Not used for DIP patterns e Pad to Pad Spacing On Center The vertical distance between the pads of a DIP pattern or the distance between any two pads for a QUAD or ARRAY pattern The distance is measured from pad center to pad center The value may be typed in the box using the appropriate mil or mm number Use the slide arrows to change the value up or down by 10 0mil or 0 50mm Use the SHIFT key with the slide arrows to increment the value by 0 1mil or 0 01mm e Pattern Width The horizontal distance between the Pad columns of a DIP pattern measured from pad center to pad center The distance between the pad columns of a QUAD pattern Library Executive User s Guide Pattern Wizard Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor measured from the outside edges of the pads The Pattern Width value is not available for ARRAY patterns The value may be typed in the box using the appropriate mil or mm number Use the slide arrows to change the value up or down by 10 0mil or 0 50mm Use the SHIFT key with the slide arrows to increment the value by 0 1mil or 0 01mm e Pattern Height The vertical distance between the pad rows of a QUAD pattern measured from the outside edges of the pads The Pattern Width value is not available for DIP and ARRAY patterns The value may be typed in the box using the appropriate mil or mm number Use the slide arrows to change the value up or down by 10 0mil or 0 50mm
81. select a Destination Format option button 5 Click Translate to begin the translation process When the library has been translated an error log file is generated and automatically displayed in the Notepad utility The name of this file is Filename err where FILENAME is the name of the output library 6 Click Close to exit the dialog PDIF Translation This section provides the steps you need to follow to create a fully integrated P CAD library from a PDIF symbol library and its corresponding PDIF part library Translating PDIF Symbol Libraries To create an integrated P CAD library from PDIF symbol and part libraries follow these steps 1 Choose library Translate to open the Library Translate dialog Library Translate CAPCAD2001 LIB DISCRTE FIL Pinto Padstack Map C APCAD2001 LIE DISCRTE PMF Source Library C PCAD2001 DEMO DEMO LIB Destination Library CAPCAD2001 DEMO SOURCE1 LIB Source Format Destination Format C TangoPRO Binary P CAD Binary C TangoPRO ASCII C P CAD ASCII C P CAD Binary C P CAD ASCII 10000 C Tango Schematic DOS Graphics Scale a C Tengo PCB DOS Text Scale 10000 PDIF Translate Close 2 Inthe Source Format frame select PDIF The PDIF Cross Reference and Pin to Padstack Map buttons appear in the dialog The PDIF Cross Reference File contains power and ground pin assignments It also attempts to group heterogeneous components and is not required
82. steps 1 Click Set All to list the source fields in the Field column 2 Click in the Criteria And column to the right of the Vendor attribute an arrow appears Click the arrow to display a pick list which can help you select the operator Enter the expression CTS 3 Sinceonly the Cost attribute will be updated in the library display only the Part Number and Cost attributes The Part Number will be used to cross link to the corresponding library components made by CTS Clear the Show check box to the right of the other attributes 4 Checkthe New Result Table box so that any previous query results are not overwritten The Query dialog should look like the following Query C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_crosslink txt Setall Clear all Iv New Result Table Ba Part Number x 2 Quantity r Vendor X crs 4 Cost fx Add Row Add Column Query Cancel Step 3 Updating the Library with Query Results 1 Click Query to display the Query Results Viewer that contains all source components satisfying the selected search criteria In this case the Query Results Viewer should appear as follows 182 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Viewer Query Result 2 o x Table Column Row __ Part Number Cost 82 5 438811 82 6 438812 82 438813 82 8 438814 82 2 Choose Cross Link from the Query Results Viewer to link the P
83. the Cost attribute for many of these components has changed You will be updating the component Cost in lesson 3 Lesson 3 Importing Without Saving If for any reason you do not want to add the index identifier to your P CAD library you can still import a MRP file without a ComponentName To do so you will be using the Cross Link feature of Library Executive in a slightly different way For more information about the versatility and power of cross linking refer to the Importing Data from an External Source page 121 Although a complete lesson is not presented here you may complete all of the following steps using the same three sample files as above Ale map txt Ale crosslink txt and Ale tutor lib The imported file does not contain a ComponentName field The basic problem is to associate the components in a P CAD library with those of the imported file As with lesson 2 above the first step serves the purpose of inserting the MRP database index identifier as an attribute for its associated component In this case however you do not wish the attribute to be saved So the association between ComponentName and Part Number must be repeated for each import process It only requires one quick easy step When the index identifier is not saved to the library the import process for an external file without a ComponentName becomes 1 Cross Link the Ale map txt map file ComponentName field with the P CAD library The Cross Link result then co
84. the desired source the Report command is chosen in distinct ways Refer to Accessing the Report Command page 146 for details The basic setup of the report dialog is identical independent of the source Customizing this common report dialog is covered in Generating a Report page 146 Accessing the Report Command Choose the Report command to generate a report file on any Library Executive source The Report command can be accessed from the Source Browser the File menu and the Table menu The location from which you choose the Report command defines the components listed in the report output For example choosing Report from a Query Result table generates a report of the components listed in that Query Result This section describes how and where to choose the Report command to get the output you want From the Source Browser Choose the Report command from the shortcut menu after selecting a library library set query result cross link result or external source file in the Source Browser tree The components in the source you select are listed in the report output From the Table Menu Choose the Report command from the Table menu when in the Viewer to generate reports on imported source files query results cross link results and P CAD libraries From the File Menu Choose the Report command from the File menu to generate a report on the imported source file Generating a Report To generate a report on a query result a cro
85. the order that they appear on the Library Executive menu These chapters also provide all related functions and options that work in conjunction with or are alternatives to the listed commands Installation and Setup This section lists the required hardware and software settings you need to install the P CAD Suite System Requirements Make sure that your PC and its software conform to the following P CAD requirements and recommendations Recommended System e Windows NT 4 2000 Professional e PC with Pentium III Processor e 128MB RAM 256MB for high component net count e 400MB Hard Disk Space e Desktop area 1024x768 pixels e 32 bit Color Palette e CD ROM Drive e Mouse or compatible pointing device Minimum System e Windows 95 98 2000Me e PC with Pentium 166MHz e 64MB RAM e 200MB Hard Disk Space without ISO libraries e Desktop area 800x600 pixels e 256 Color Palette e CD ROM Drive e Mouse Installing P CAD Products For up to date installation information refer to the file Readme WRI located on the product CD This file can also be found in the application program folder Program Files P CAD 2002 after installation Note that the setup program on the Product CD can also be used to Repair or Remove an existing P CAD Installation 2 Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Library Basics This chapter provides important information about the basic functions and features of the P CAD Library Executive
86. to a library choose Reload to refresh the library components in Library Executive s memory before conducting the Query The Query dialog is shown in the following figure Query CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Setall Clear all Iv New Result Table m Criteria And z 1 ModifyDate B gt 6 23 97 11 47 2 Alias ComponentLibrary 4 ComponentType 5 NumberOfPads 6 NumberOfPins NumberOfParts 8 Homogeneous 3 AlphaNumeric 10 HasIEEE HasDemorgan 12 RefDesPrefix PattenName 14 Description Add Row Add Column Query Cancel Q b xb x x R Library Executive User s Guide 263 Chapter 21 Utils Commands Utils Shortcut Directory The following options are available in the Query dialog to specify search criteria display fields and output options SetAll Clear All Click the Set All button to display all fields defined in the selected source in the Field column Click Clear All to remove all fields from the Field column e New Result Table Select this check box to generate an additional query result table If the check box is cleared the present query overwrites the previous result e Query Spreadsheet The Field column contains both the search and display attributes for the query Select the Show check box for each field to be displayed in the query result The Criteria And and Or columns contain the query search criteria e Add Row Add Column The Add Row button add
87. to place a capacitor in your design You will be choosing the CAP400 capacitor to place in the blank PCB workspace 1 Select the row containing the capacitor CAP400 by clicking on the row number to its left 2 Click the Place button The Place Component dialog appears with the chosen component selected in the Component Name list 3 Click OK Move the ghosted component outline to accurately place the component on the workspace and click the left mouse button Library Executive User s Guide 185 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources For more details refer to the Place Component command in your P CAD PCB User s Guide Lesson 6 Reporting on Component Library Updates You have been working on a design for the past six weeks It is almost complete but you want to check that changes made to the component library do not critically impact your design In this lesson you will learn how to generate a quick report of all components that have been updated since you loaded the netlist using the timestamp feature of Library Executive With the component update report you can easily verify that all of your design components are current Assume that your calendar indicates the netlist was loaded and most components were placed on June 16th The steps to report on library changes after this date will be detailed below Step 1 Query the Library for a ModifyDate To query the library for all components mo
88. to select which components from the selected library will be included in the report output Refer to Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols page 154 for additional details e Ifyou select the Attached Pattern Section Attached Symbol Section or Footer Section check boxes the appropriate section is added to your publisher output For instance checking the Attached Pattern Section box includes a report of the pattern immediately after the report on the component to which it is attached The footer section is global so if this check box is selected the selected attributes are included in the footer of all pages in the publisher output Library Executive User s Guide 231 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Publisher If any of these sections are included their corresponding format button becomes available Refer to Formatting Options page 232 for additional details on the Pattern Format Symbol Format and Footer Format dialogs e Pattern Section Select the Pattern Section check box to include a report on the patterns in the selected library in the publisher output e The Select Patterns button becomes available allowing you to select the patterns included in this section All selected patterns from the library are included whether or not they are attached to any library components Refer to Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols page 154 for additional details e The Pattern Format button becomes available allowing you to se
89. to the desired file can also be typed directly into the box e View Report Select the View Report check box to display the difference report file on the screen e List components not found in library If selected the components in the source file are listed in the difference report when a component with matching ComponentName is not found in the library e Verify only components with matching library If selected the source attributes are compared only in components that have identical ComponentName and ComponentLibrary field values e Set component verify timestamp When verifying a library the component s time stamp attribute VerifyDate if present is automatically updated with the current date and time If the Set component verify timestamp check box is selected and the VerifyDate attribute does not exist the VerifyDate attribute is added to the component library e Verify Click the Verify button to generate the difference report Refer to Library Verification page 137 for more information File Report The File Report command opens the Report dialog where you can generate a report on the imported external source file The Report dialog may also be accessed through the Table menu on the Viewer dialogs or from the shortcut menu in the Source Browser for query results cross link results imported files or P CAD libraries The Report dialog appears 208 Library Executive User s Guide File Report Report CAPCAD2001
90. types to pad styles in P CAD Library Executive The PIN2PAD utility is a DOS program that is started from the command line To start it you will need e an external ASCII aperture table file optional e aspecial symbol file ssf e a Master Designer binary part library file p1b To run the PIN2PAD utility at the DOS prompt enter pin2pad options s special symbol file gt p library file gt where options are Options Description a specifies the aperture table file displays the help screen special symbol file specifies the special symbol file library file specifies the P CAD binary part library file If you do not use an aperture table when running PIN2PAD the program only translates the graphic information over to P CAD When you run PIN2PAD the program creates the aperture section of the pin mapping file which occurs only if you specify an aperture table file Next the program reads the special symbol file for the mapping between pin types and pad stacks For each pad stack the program loads the binary padstack file and writes the layer and graphic data PIN2PAD also maintains a list of all the layers in all the pad stacks The program uses the part library file s database unit as the database unit for the pin mapping file If some padstacks in the special symbol file have different database units PIN2PAD converts these database units to the part library file s database unit
91. unassigned pins These pads appear as unused in P CAD PCB Connections are not allowed to be placed to unused pads Components created from the translation of Master Designer PDIF PCB libraries contain one pin for every pin that is matched to a pad However a place holder pin is created for every pad that did not have a corresponding pin As a result all pads have a pin and no unused pads are created during translation of Master Designer PDIF PCB design files or Master Designer PDIF PCB library files Be aware that component patterns placed from the Schematic library may be different from the patterns already placed in the PCB design due to differences in unused pads If there are problems placing component patterns from the Schematic library into an existing or imported PCB design use the PCB library patterns e No connect padstacks A component pad translated from a Master Designer PDIF PCB file into P CAD PCB may have an alternate no connect padstack assigned to it Since Master Designer PDIF libraries do not have padstack information all components placed from the library have the connected padstacks assigned e Heterogeneous Components See the section Design Considerations in Using P CAD Files in the P CAD Schematic User s Guide for details Library Executive User s Guide 271 Appendix A Importing Master Designer Libraries Translating Master Designer PDIF Libraries Translating Master Designer PDIF Libraries This section provides t
92. view a selected pattern or symbol by choosing the View command from the shortcut menu Opening a Component To open a component follow these steps 1 Selecta component in the Source Browser tree 2 Choose the Open command from the shortcut menu You can also open a component by double clicking on the component name in the Source Browser tree The Component Information dialog opens Component Information RESASIPISOL ioj x L Select Pattern Bre o Pattern View J Select Symbol Number of Gates Nm Symbol View J REfErEnGE Number of Pads B r Component Type gs GE Refdes Prefix Normal Component Style p Gate Numbering Alternate Views C Power Homogeneous Alphabetic IEEE C Sheet Connector C Heterogeneous Numeric DeMorgan C Module E nac E SYMBOL7_N SYMBOL7_N SYMBOL N SYMBOL7_N Library Executive User s Guide 97 Chapter 7 The Source Browser Deleting Library Attributes The Component Information dialog provides general information about a component From this dialog you can complete many functions including setting the component type as homogeneous or heterogeneous selecting alternate views setting the number of gates and gate numbering style and defining the total number of pins For more information about the Component Information dialog see the View Component Info command in View Component Info page 255 Viewing and Editing a Pattern or Symbol To vi
93. word Primary displays and the primary pattern graphic is shown in the view window If there are other pattern graphics already attached their names will be listed as well 4 Click on the Alternates tab and search through a list of all source patterns in the library and select the new pattern graphic you want to copy to the target pattern Type in a new pattern graphic name and click Copy to Target The new name is added to the Target Pattern Graphics list Click on names in this list to see the pattern graphics associated with the target pattern in the view window Library Executive User s Guide Pin Numbers vs Pad Numbers vs Pin Designators Chapter 4 Libraries 5 Click on the Orientations tab to specify which pattern graphics are to be used for a specific orientation Up to eight different pattern graphics can be used to represent various component orientations depending on whether the component is flipped or rotated by 0 90 180 or 270 6 Click on Apply Pattern Changes to Library and click OK to close the dialog For more details refer to Library Pattern Graphics page 214 in the command reference section Pin Numbers vs Pad Numbers vs Pin Designators An important fact to understand about components and patterns or symbols is that pad numbers do not equal pin designator values and that symbol pin numbers do not equal pin designator values except by a coincidence Pin designators are the critical piece of data t
94. you wish to move click Move Up or Move Down These commands rearrange or modify the contents of this box by moving the selected attribute higher or lower in the list Click Done The properties and attributes in the Footer Contents box are used to create a footer for the published library document Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols When a Component Pattern or Symbol section is included in your published library you can select the items you want to include The Select Components Select Patterns and Select Symbols buttons display their corresponding Component Pattern or Symbol Selection List dialog A sample selection list dialog appears 238 Library Executive User s Guide Library Publisher Chapter 15 Library Commands Selection List x Set All Clear All MIRES4SIPISOL AVEC The box lists all components patterns or symbols in the selected library If selected the corresponding component pattern or symbol is included in the published output To select or clear all check boxes click the Select All or Clear All buttons When the desired items are selected click Done The selected items will be published in their Component Pattern or Symbol Section The selection dialog is not available for attached patterns and symbols in the Component Section If Attached Pattern Section or Attached Symbol Section is selected the patterns and symbols published are those attached to the selected component s
95. 0 P CAD Binary eee tette 220 P CAD Pattern Editor Utils command 265 P CAD PCB component placement 164 P CAD PCB Utils command 264 P CAD Schematic Utils command 264 P CAD Symbol Editor Utils command 265 PCB design verification 0 141 PCB report enhancements 155 PDIF translation sss 222 pick polrit us ase ccrto 74 pin designator sessseeeeeetn designators vs pad numbers equivalence sese mapping file sss name number sastres es eati m ees pin numbers PIDEQ S reat e RD TS pins hidden power sese 33 jumper Pins View dialog 8 56 256 Pins View View command 256 placing components from P CAD PCB sss 164 from Schematic sss 164 from Source Browser 101 from the Source Browser 164 from the Viewer sese 164 requirements asos S aiia 163 Library Executive User s Guide placing points sss 74 placing reference points 90 Power component type eeeeenenne 50 primary key 105 associating with imported attributes 127 definition essere 123 124 importing a file with importing a file witho
96. 00 using pattern libraries should be loaded into PCB with only pattern libraries open If you encounter a component cache error after using Library Executive to change a component that is already placed in a PCB design you must update all occurrences of that component in the design This must be done before you can place any more instances of that component Choose the Force Update command to replace all occurrences of a component of asingle type The Maintain Rotation option in Utils Force Update does not maintain rotations for components in designs loaded from P CAD PCB 6 400 Using the Library Translate Command 1 Choose Library Translate to open the Library Translate dialog Library Translate Source Library C PCAD2001 DEMO DEMO LIB C PCAD2001 DEMO SOURCE1 LIB m Source Format C TangoPRO Binary C TangoPRO ASCII C P CAD Binary C P CAD ASCII Tango Schematic DOS C Tango PCB DOS C PDIF Translate Close Click the Source Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog where you can navigate to and select the library to translate P CAD Binary Destination Format C P CAD ASCII Click the Destination Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog where you can navigate to and select destination library Library Executive User s Guide 221 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Translate 4 Select the desired Source Format option button If you select P CAD Binary
97. 01 Tutorial Ale_mrp tc amp mapped Setall Clear all Iv New Result Table Fed Show Criteria Ang Oo 1 ComponentName fx 2 PatternName ix Quantity 3 4 Description 3 Add Bow Add Column Cancel When Query is chosen the selected source is searched for components satisfying the specified criteria These components are listed in a Query Result Viewer dialog See Viewer Dialog page 10 for more information Library Executive User s Guide 9 Chapter 2 Library Basics About the Spreadsheet Views The Query dialog is a spreadsheet Refer to the information in About the Spreadsheet Views page 10 for details on manipulating spreadsheets The Query dialog can be accessed directly from P CAD PCB and Schematic Components in the embedded Query Result can be placed directly into the current design Refer to Querying Libraries page 103 for additional information Viewer Dialog The Viewer dialog displays the components contained within a variety of sources Query results imported library source files cross link results and P CAD libraries all have their contents displayed in the spreadsheet Viewer Viewer C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Table Column Row a ri Componencen ompenerfryre NumberOfPads NumberOfFins Not CAPCAD2001 Tutorial emea CAP300RP Not C PCAD2001 Tutorial Normal Not C PCAD2001 Tutorial Normal Not CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Normal 5 CAP400AP Not CAPCADZ001 Tuto
98. 211 Library Set pirin toe iue tuti nequi ehe eo eur toi Ue ien deena rine re i 211 library Alas utr rec aetna rr ERE E e Ro dats ee TR ded gad teats AE 212 Creating am Alias 2 eren eet a ee nee t V qo cere eee AE eet 212 Library Pattern Graphics 2 reete nei eoe redde ede ed deer eius 214 Target Pattern Lab ute ete eue eet en itane ineo RUINA REI se EE CERAR 214 Alternates Tab 12r ep ite petite RM UR Ep e PEDE qe Ro ia daess 215 Orientations Tab rr Norbert ther Ead Rees 216 IBleIr In Meroe C c r 217 Copying Library Item srania cicer detect tee eost ete ed Auden dde rei ence c eios 217 Library Delete 4 1e tette t Peter see etae ao eo oibus e deae tiran 219 Deleting a Library Item 25 0222 erre rtr t ve rie Reese 219 Library ROMAMEC RR m 220 Renaming a Library Item ssssssssssssssseerenee eene nnne n nnne 220 Library Translate 3e crei de Eines tei io EG nte Cod quise drop Det dai sea ce aaae 220 Using the Library Translate Command sse 221 PDIF Translation imet tee RD OE DER EIER 222 Merging the Libraries iilii ne iiie ote e Pete de derriere Tenn e SE 229 Library Merge Patterns eierei terere Rete teet teet ee RR Ed e dex ipee 229 Library Publisher re tee eto in oe RE Ide ge ER e PIE d dre REN Me tuten 230 The Library Publisher Dialog senem 230 Formatting Optlons 1 incidir eee ree ne eves 232
99. 3 this example illustrates using the Query dialog directly from the PCB design in which you want to place the component The Query utility is embedded in the Place Component and Place Part commands of PCB and Schematic The basic structure of these embedded Query dialogs are slightly different than the Query accessed directly from Library Executive however its basic function is the same Step 1 Open the P CAD Design To access the embedded Query utility open a P CAD design after you start PCB You will be placing the capacitor in a blank workspace Placing a queried component in a design is just as easy 1 Choose the Place Component command to open the Place Component dialog Library Executive User s Guide 183 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources 184 Place Component Component Name Pattern DIP14 408 5V AN 74L5138 Cancel 74L5244 74L5245 74L8373 7400 7404 7406 KE 7432 74154 74273 zl RefDes _ Value eet Query j Pattern Graphics Library DEMO LIB z Library Setup Primary bi F Auto Swap Graphics oooooonu ooo0oo0oo0o00 2 Click Query to search for a component to place in a design The embedded Query dialog appears Open Libraries SetAll Clear All Scan libraries for user attributes Scan IViDEMO LIB Field Criteria And Or E mmm 1_ ComponentName 2 ComponentLibrary 3 ComponentType 4 NumberOfPad
100. 6 Using an External Source File eene 160 Component Placement Component Placement Requirements emen 163 Accessing Component Placement sssssssssseee eene eene eere nnns 163 From the Source Browser rie e een dete ete ed nora rea eee teed dese deed ote e 164 grece R 164 Placing Components in P CAD PCB seen ener nnne nns 164 Component Placement from P CAD PCB sse 164 Placing Parts in P CAD Schematic sssseseeeeeene emm eee 164 Part Placement from P CAD Schematic sse 165 Extended Library Features Getting Setup for Learning enm nennen 167 Lesson 1 Importing and Updating a Library from an MRP File 169 Lesson 2 Importing an MRP File Without a ComponentName es 173 Lesson 3 Importing Without Saving se em 180 Lesson 4 Using Query to Selectively Update a Library seeeeeses 181 Lesson 5 Using Embedded Query to Find and Place a Component 183 Lesson 6 Reporting on Component Library Updates eene 186 Lesson 7 Verifying Your Design Against a Library sessesessss 187 Lesson 8 Verifying Your Libraries Against an MRP File l enn 189 Lesson 9 Library Creation Using Pattern and Symbol Editor 191 Libra
101. 65753 Capacitor CAP3GGRP CAPSGORP 96956 Radial Polarized Capacitor CAP356 CAP356 14357 Capacitor CAP46GAP CAP4OGAP 65775 Axial Polarized Capacitor CAP76GAP CAP7GGAP 80754 Axial Polarized Capacitor e Ale crosslink txt This file is a comma delimited external source file that in contrast to the file above does not contain the ComponentName field The Part Number field from this company database will be used to link this file to the sample library Tutor lib El Ale crosslink txt Notepad Oo x File Edit Search Help Part Number Quantity Vendor Cost 2387 04 32487 Panasonic 29 2387 69 4218 Panasonic 29 238716 40458 Panasonic 29 238711 4244 Plessey 34 238715 3489 Plessey 34 Map File In order to import an external source file such as Ale_crosslink txt that does not contain the ComponentName an additional step is required to set up the automated import process A simple comma delimited file will be used to initially associate the library ComponentName with a unique MRP database index in this case the Part Number field This additional file is called a map file Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features The map file will only be used once to insert the database index Part Number into the component library The Part Number can then be used alone as the import identifier e Ale map txt This map file is a simple comma delim
102. A metallized noncompliant terminal wrapped around the package body T Through hole A terminal with flat or V shaped cross section extending from the side of the body and intended for attachment to a through hole Library Executive User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Libraries Entering Equivalence Information W Wire An untempered wire lead extending from the body of the package Y Screw A threaded hole 6 Terminal Pin Count Designator Description Number of terminals Include those of the type described by the lead form designator Number of terminal positions Include only if this figure differs from the number of terminals given above Do not apply to Grid Arrays 7 Supplementary Information Designator Description Flange Tab or mounting on PCB board Drill Diameter Modified Terminals numbered from a corner of the pattern Stagger lead form Terminals numbered from a center of one side of the pattern Mounted vertically Spacing lead form Ss lt j4 4 zZz lt 2z 7 This pin at least is absent Letters may refer to the dimensions of a pattern parameter Where this is the case the dimension is given in millimeters and follows the letter Example CAN 12 D9 4 12 pin can with silk screen length of 9 4mm for the dimension D Entering Equivalence Information When adding Schematic information to existing pat
103. AP100 4759 Axial Polariz 8 CAPI1200 CAP120 3 1 Axial Polariz 9 POLCAP CAP100 9874 Polarized Ca 10 CAP400 CAP400 8903 Capacitor 11 RES500 RES500 22357 Resistor 12 RES600 RES600 64532 Resistor 13 RES700 RES 00 7897 Resistor 14 RES1300 RES130 26659 Resistor 15 RES2200 RES220 486 Resistor 18 RESESIP SIPS 80654 Five Bussed 17 RES6SIPI SIP6 579806 Three Isolat 18 RES6SIPI SIP6 1956 Three Isolat 19 RES8SIP SIPs 65967 Twelve Dual 20 RES8SIPI sIPe 12 Four Isolate 21 RESI0SI SIP10 35437 Nine Bussed 22 RESI0S SIPI0 24723 Siteen Dual 23 BESI4DI DiP14 6788 Seven lsolat Chapter 13 Extended Library Features The field names are the column headers with the field values filling in the table contents Step 2 Mapping Fields Now that you have the external source file imported you can use the Map Fields command to map the field names to those recognized by P CAD You will be mapping the Cmp Name and Pat Name fields to their P CAD counterparts ComponentName and PatternName The field mapping is remembered So if you are regularly importing the same external source file this mapping step need only be completed once Subsequent imports of the same file will be automatically mapped To use the Map Fields command on the imported source file 1 From the Table menu of the file Viewer choose Map Fields to open the Map Fields dialog Map Fields C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp tct Origin
104. ASIC FPGA May 95 PG100 QFP Rect R QFP14x20 G100 Y 1414 P MN Introduction a 29 Nov 2000 tal Ready I 2 Click on the lt Date gt tab in the bottom left hand corner to make the component sheet active 3 Search the spreadsheet to find the component you require using the Edit Find command 4 Determine the name of the library in which the required component resides and add it to the open libraries list Creating and Updating Libraries Creating a New Library To create a new library from the selected source follow these steps 1 Choose the Save to Library command Refer to Accessing the Save To Library Command page 46 for additional information The Save Source dialog appears Save Source x Source C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp tt mapped Save Mode Create New C Update Greate new components fe Update only components with etin TT BITE Iv Create componenttime stamps if not present Attributes To Be Created Attribute Name ignare a 2 Description ai 42 Library Executive User s Guide Creating and Updating Libraries Chapter 4 Libraries 2 Select the Create New option button 3 Enter in the desired library name in the File Name box or click the Library button to navigate to and select the desired directory 4 Click Save The Save Source dialog now displays with the desired library name 5 If the Create component time sta
105. Beginning Column Value in the appropriate boxes You can use letters or numbers as a beginning value 5 Checkthe corner where the numbering should begin In the example the upper left corner is selected 6 Ifyou want to skip a letter enter the letter in the Skip Characters box Only letters can be skipped A character used as a Beginning Row Value or Beginning Column Value cannot be designated as a Skip Character 7 Click OK to apply the default pin designator renumbering Placing Points Separate commands let you place Reference Points Glue Points Pick Points and Test Points on your pattern Those commands are discussed in this section Reference Points The Place Ref Point command places a Reference Point on a pattern before it is saved to a library You need to specify a Reference Point on a pattern object before it is saved to a pattern library The Ref Point appears in the same color as the 1x grid color in Options Display When you place a Reference Point on an object the pattern will move with the cursor at the reference point Patterns are flipped and rotated about the Reference Point For most patterns select a reference point in the center of pad 1 Pattern Editor automatically places a Ref Point on a pad or at center of pads if you save a pattern to a library without a Ref Point Glue Points The Place Glue Point command places a glue point on a pattern before it is saved to a library Glue Points are us
106. CAD2001YTutorialAle map txt Original Fieid Neme NewField Name Data Type Mapping 1 ComponentName ComponentName String Predefined 2 Part Number Part Number String Predefined Add Row Delete Re Map You can also choose Map Fields from the File menu on the main Library Executive dialog or from the shortcut menu when the imported external file is selected The fields in the Map Fields dialog are Original Field Name The field names from the imported separated list file or the default field names if generated by P CAD Library Executive New Field Name The field name to be used by P CAD Data Type The field type that defaults to String for any unrecognized field name Mapping Shows if the attribute has been mapped to a recognizable predefined P CAD field name or to a user defined name 2 To map the imported fields to names recognized by P CAD click in the New Field Name column A down arrow appears at the right of the selected field name Click the Down Arrow and the field list appears 3 Select the desired P CAD field name from the list The field is automatically placed on the spreadsheet The field type is automatically updated in the Data Type column for the P CAD recognized name 4 Modify the Data Type from the list of data types available in the third column Modifying the data type from its default value may be desired for two reasons Sort order The Integer and String data types have diffe
107. D Cancel PCAD to ACCEL SCH Layer Map Gate Graphics Layer t Gate M IEEE IGNORED Default Map PINFUN IGNORED PINNAM USED Select All Layers PINCON USED REFDES USED Unselect All Layers ATTR USED DEVICE USED ERN DUTLIN USED NOTES USED 8 Select the desired layers and map them accordingly 9 Click OK While loading P CAD Library Executive displays several messages indicating the system s progress After translating the library a message box appears indicating any errors or warnings If there are none you can click Close Translating PDIF Part Libraries Master Designer PDIF part libraries are translated just as you translate symbol libraries The difference is that you select a PDIF part library file as your source library instead of selecting a symbol library The layer status of the first component ever entered in a part library sets the status for all other parts in that part library Library Executive User s Guide 223 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Translate 224 You can also map pin types in the PDIF Part library file to the pad styles during translation This is useful for Master Designer users who want to bring padstack information into P CAD Library Executive To translate Master Designer binary part libraries do the following Start the PIN2PAD utility in Master Designer This program generates a pin mapping file pmf e Load the pin mapping file into P CAD Library Executive This step maps the pin
108. Demo folder and click Open The Component Information dialog displays Component Information UNTITLED Gl x Select Pattern E Pattern View J Select Symbol Number of Gates p Symbol View deferenoe s Number of Pins o Component Type _ SSS Refdes Prefix mE Normal Component Style Gate Numbering Altemate Views C Power Alphabetic E IEEE Sheet Connector C Numeric DeMiorgen Module C Link Homogeneous Heterogeneous Gate GateEq Nomai 3 Enter the number of gates 4 and press Enter The gates referred to when creating components in this section are referred to as parts when they are being placed in a Schematic design Library Executive User s Guide 29 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Component 4 Notice that the Gate spreadsheet appears at the bottom of the Component Information dialog Gate Equivalence Gate Eq values indicate which gates parts within a component are logically equivalent and may be swapped in a PCB design For two gates to be considered logically equivalent the Gate Eq values must be identical and non zero Equivalent gates must also have the same number of pins A zero value or a blank cell in the spreadsheet indicates that the gate is not swappable Component Information UNTITLED Pins View Select Pattem Pattern View 3 Number of Gates M Symbol View i DE Number of Pins
109. Files P CAD 2001 Demo DEMO lib Symbol r 7400 Match Default Pin Designators to Pin Numbers T Create Component Component Select the library you want to save the symbol to and then specify a symbol name If the symbol was loaded from a library that library appears in the Library box and the symbol name appears in the Symbol box Library Executive User s Guide Symbol Attributes Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor 4 Ifyou want to just create a symbol not a component click OK To create a component automatically that corresponds to the symbol select the Create Component check box before you click OK If the existing default pin designators are correct for the new symbol you do not have to change them You can set the default pin designators to Match Default Pin Designators to Pin Numbers if you select this check box If the Create Component box is cleared an electrically complete component can be generated with this symbol attached Click OK The symbol is saved to the library 6 Ifthe Create Component check box is selected the Save Component As dialog opens Component N ame cP3eod r Component Type Normal C Power C Sheet Connector C Module C Link r Make Jumper Component tie all pins together Cancel 7 Type a component name in the Component Name box select a component type and click OK Saving a Symbol as a Symbol file Choose the Symbol Save to File or Symbol
110. Library Executive User s Guide chapter 16 chapter 17 chapter 18 chapter 19 chapter 20 Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols sse 238 Generating Publisher Output eesseseeeee eene emm nennen 239 Component Commands Component New erre eite Ale etna eae 241 Drag and Drop Library Load 1e neci nc epe ter Se ches sete 242 Component OPEN e 242 Gomiporient S8Ve c Sene d on d RIDE RO COE Ptr ERES 243 Compon nt S8V6e ASs 15 ertt trt P ERR ME REDE EAR TE 243 Component Validate 1 Leiter medie nete cnn eee ebbe deut one 243 Pattern Commands PattertilNGW csnit Daven shea ttr e eec oro e cdi Ede eae ve t Ene va Rea Rec E ea is 245 Pattern Open tod ete EA ce Rem Meade tere ere ente Tu EA 245 Symbol Commands Symbol e Meena ee nn Seen Beek 247 Symbol Operis oie tas rete vel espere E DOE eese toi ane shane ent de Saeee ea ese to dee 247 Edit Commands Edit Undo Spreadsheet Change cease etn ene tenente tette nenne trend 249 Edit Cut Spreadsheet Selection sssssssseeeeee emen 249 Edit Copy Spreadsheet Selection seem eene 249 Edit Paste Spreadsheet Selection ecciesie nne nein iere ndn 250 Edit Slide Selection Up 2 cete ite pectet enean io cte iint Ege LE Pes uec 250 Edit Slide Selection DOWn uite Rte artt R iaaa 250 Edit Se
111. Library Naming Conventions When looking through the pattern libraries most pattern names will be familiar However the following naming conventions may help to clarify the more obscure pattern names Patterns for surface mount packages are built to the current standards developed by IPC Association Connecting Electronics Industries IPC claims that these land patterns are transparent to the manufacturing process but recommends that they should be optimized to suit the soldering type wave reflow and assembly components mounted on one or both sides of the board etc Land patterns for BGA devices follow the assumptions found in standard IPC SM 782A Amendment 2 April 1999 The pads for this standard are defined by the etched copper rather than by the solder mask Land patterns for other surface mount components follow the assumptions found in standard IPC SM 782A Amendment 1 October 1996 All pattern dimensions are calculated in metric units Hard metric dimensions are employed in accordance with the JEDEC JC 11 Metrication Policy SPP 003B February 1998 Departures to this policy are made for some silkscreen dimensions and critical dimensions such as pitch and row spacing Pattern Acronyms The pattern naming convention is in sympathy with the IPC component names and the JEDEC Standard JESD30 B Descriptive Designation System for Semiconductor Device Packages April 52 Library Executive User s Guide Pattern Library Na
112. Merge Patterns The Library Merge Patterns command copies patterns from one or more P CAD libraries containing patterns into another P CAD library that contains pattern references but not actual patterns This command is useful for merging entire libraries If you want to integrate an individual component use the Library Copy command After you translate a Tango Schematic symbol library and Tango pattern library to P CAD format using the Library Translate command the Library Merge Patterns command can be used as a way to merge the translated libraries into a single integrated library 1 Choose Library Merge Patterns to open the Library Merge Patterns dialog Library Executive User s Guide 229 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Publisher Library Merge Patterns m Source Libraries ALE_TUTOR LIB Add Library Merge Remove Library Close a 4 m Destination Library C PCAD2001 DEMO MODFAXO LIB 2 Click the Add Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose libraries containing patterns The library names you add appear in the Source Libraries list Select all the pattern libraries that contain the patterns for the components in the destination library Select a library and click the Remove Library button to remove a library from the Source Libraries list 3 Click the Destination Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog where y
113. Number in the imported character delimited file to the Part Number in the source file that contains both the ComponentName and Part Number One source the external source file contains all of the attributes you wish to import from your company component database and the index identifier Part Number This external source does not have the essential ComponentName field that identifies a P CAD component The other source either a P CAD library or a cross link result contains other component attributes including the Part Number index identifier and the P CAD primary key ComponentName The Cross Link command links the attributes of these two source files by matching the unique Part Numbers of the two sources The result of the cross link is displayed in a Viewer spreadsheet The cross link result will contain every component found in both source files All component attributes from both sources will be included in the result To cross link the imported field an initial association must be made between the unique index identifier s in the external source file and the corresponding components in the P CAD libraries as described in Attaching the Index Identifier page 127 The following steps complete the cross link for the imported fields 1 Choose the Cross Link command from the Table menu of the Viewer to open the Cross Link dialog Library Executive User s Guide Importing a Character Separated File Chapter 9 Importing Data from an Exter
114. P CAD PCB page 164 and Placing Parts in P CAD Schematic page 164 for additional details From the Viewer You can choose to Place a component from a Query Result Viewer or a Cross Link Result Viewer You can also choose to Place a component from a file Viewer while viewing either a P CAD library or an imported library from an external source To place a component from the Viewer the Viewer must include the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary fields Select the row on the table corresponding to the desired component by clicking the row number to its left While the row is selected choose the Place command from the Row menu Drag the mouse to the right to select the desired application name PCB or Schematic Placing Components in P CAD PCB To place a component in a PCB design P CAD PCB must be running with the design in the workspace The Place Component dialog appears with the component selected Refer to your PCB documentation or online help for details on placing a component Component Placement from P CAD PCB Library Executive assists with component placement from P CAD PCB If you search for a component from within the PCB application by running an embedded query you can choose to place a component from the Query Result table To access the embedded Query a Query button appears on the Place Component dialog The Library menu of P CAD PCB also contains the Query command The components satisfying the search criteria are displaye
115. PIN2PAD displays a warning message if any of the following occurs e Any pin type that exists in the library file is not specified in the special symbol file e PIN2PAD is missing unable to locate or unable to load a pad stack file e Apertures are specified in the pad stacks but not in the aperture table Library Executive User s Guide Library Translate Chapter 15 Library Commands PIN2PAD saves the pin mapping file using the part library file s name For example if you run the program using the part file Parts p1b the resulting pin mapping file is named Parts pmf Now that you ve created the pin mapping file load it into Library Executive by following these steps 1 Start Windows and then start P CAD Library Executive 2 Choose library Translate to open the Library Translate dialog 3 In the Source Format frame select PDIF The PDIF Cross Reference 11 and Pin to Padstack Map pmf buttons appear The Pin to Padstack Map button lets you select a pin mapping file pmf that contains pin mopping information that the program uses for translating Master Designer PDIF part library 4 Click the Pin to Padstack Map button to open the Library File Listing dialog 5 Select the desired pin mapping file then click OK to return to the Library Translate dialog 6 Click the Source Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog that displays the PDIF files available in the current directory 7 Selectthe desired PDIF
116. Pattern View nenne Pattern Viewer Pattern Wizard Pins View aia N AANA AER Place Pad Reportes zitiert EE Report Configuration m Save SOUI Cession er end Selection List sss Source Browser Symbol Format Options 151 Symbol View sse Utils Renumber VETY elass 207 MATS TDI RE UN 10 drag and drop load file 243 lorte 242 Library Executive User s Guide E Edit Copy using a commercial spreadsheet 250 Cut using a commercial spreadsheet 249 Paste using a commercial spreadsheet 250 Edit Commands Component Attribute 252 Copy Spreadsheet Selection 249 Cut Spreadsheet Selection 249 Paste Spreadsheet Selection 250 Select Pattern sss 251 Select Symbols sss 250 Slide Selection Down 250 Slide Selection Up sss 250 Undo Spreadsheet Change 249 editing a pattern oo ecesesereeeeseseeteetseseesetseeenes 98 a symboli seii irra 98 Elec Type teen rtm 11 electrical pin types see 11 electrical types assighIng eere tede 35 embedded Query sss 118 equivalence information 56 error messages sesesseseseeseseseeseeeseeseseeseneees 275 example adding databas
117. Pressing the UP key when Library Executive User s Guide 257 Chapter 20 View Commands View Symbol View the entire row is selected or clicking the Prev Pad button selects the previous pad Pressing the DOWN key when the entire row is selected or clicking the Next Pad button selects the next pad If the pad number is missing or misnumbered the corresponding pad is not selected Pattern Selection Click the Select Pattern button to select the attached pattern Changes made in this dialog are reflected in the view dialogs Attaching a Pattern When you load a pattern into the spreadsheet you have the option to overwrite the current information with the incoming data if a difference is detected If you choose to overwrite the spreadsheet data the following conditions are applied e Incoming pads whose default pin designators match a row s pin designator are merged with the spreadsheet data and the pad number overwritten A warning is issued when the pad numbers are different Remaining pads are matched by pad number and the pin designator is overwritten If pin designators are different a warning is issued Rows already matched and merged are not considered for further matches Unmatched pads are matched to the smallest remaining row number and the pad number and pin designator overwritten If either the pad number or pin designator is different a warning is issued This may cause a random sorting of the pad numbers and pin designators
118. TIONS sexes ees se cee eI Een ee erret erred me gd HERREN a tede 122 Importing a Character Separated File sse emen 123 Field Mapping tc DL LIE 124 Cross Hoo n pies 126 Understanding Cross Linking eeese enne emere 130 Setting up a Cross Link 5 1 ie nne eter dendo gene ore rd gne 130 Cross Link Example H inttr tbi t te rien e ER ien 131 Cross Link Example 92 2 12 S ee Haee rea rote ri 131 Viewer Menu Comtmmands 4 trente eoru pre tune Hg ra meo bo e aL een noc Lco dba eiat 131 Table Gomimarids 1 3 cite ceterae teas tte viene ee tete 132 Column Comrmands oe eere edet dee tete ie needed eade dee a dedere deine 133 Row Commands este tenter be hee need ee Hune Aa eese 133 Using the Imported Source File certet ttn oret Renfe adv eroe videt 134 a MEL ME T E 134 Cross LINK tnc eoe ee e eq qe Maen herons 134 Mery i ieri ioco cett coded deep E a Dot Aone ded ooo e dee E ee atk Ail ders Ppe esee ct usate 134 RE POMS isi 134 Updating or Creating Libraries seee eem 135 Placing Components E eene nennen enne nennt 135 Accessing the Imported File a a rer N tte doen de vests 135 Accessing from the Source Browser ene 135 Accessing from the View Menu sssee em emen mener 135 Library Executive User s Guide chapter 10
119. ULT LIBRARY SET includes any open library files that do not have a set specified explicitly Library sets defined in the Library Setup dialog are saved in the initialization file cmp ini for the next time you run Library Executive You can add rename and delete selected libraries and library sets directly from the Source Browser by choosing Delete from the shortcut menus Library Alias An alias is an alternate name for a component pattern or symbol You can create multiple names for the same item with the Library Alias command Aliases allow you the flexibility of using a variety of naming conventions for components patterns or symbols without renaming them For example for what P CAD calls an SN7400N you may want to use a generic alias of 7400 Or if you have components from a vendor using a particular naming convention and you want to continue using that system you can use alias names and display them on your design as such An alias is equivalent to creating a new item except the actual data is only referenced not copied When an alias is created for an item it is not the same as creating copies or renaming For copying or renaming see the respective Library commands The library that you use in the execution of Library Alias Library Delete or Library Rename will remain current if you invoke any of the commands during the same Library Executive session Creating an Alias 1 Choose library Alias to open
120. Up Move Down Library Executive User s Guide 237 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Publisher This dialog allows you to specify the footer contents displayed on each page of the component section To set the Footer Format Options 1 2 Select a component or attribute from the list of Predefined Options Click Add to move the selection to the Footer Contents box To include an attribute that is not predefined type the attribute name in the User Defined Attribute box Click Add The attribute will appear in the Footer Contents box The attribute value for the particular component is found in the library and listed in the Footer Section You can also double click the attribute to add it To remove an attribute from the Footer Contents box select the attribute and click Remove You can also double click the attribute to remove it Text can be included in the footer For example the words Components Designed By can be a footer for your published document To include text type the text into the User Defined Attribute box Click Add Since the name is not recognized as an attribute an attribute value will not appear in the footer The footer contents are the attributes and their values listed in the order that they appear in the Footer Contents box These attributes appear in order on the bottom of the pages in the component section from left to right To organize the Footer Contents box select the property or attribute
121. User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 3 Select the Report components not found in libraries check box to list in the difference report design components that were not found in the open libraries Step 3 Generate a Difference Report You are now ready to generate a difference report that includes both attribute differences between the design and library and design components not found in the open libraries 1 Click Verify A difference report is generated and displayed on the screen The difference report is a simple text file A sample difference report is shown below report txt Notepad File Edit Search Help Verify Design C PCAD2001 Tutorial Demol_u pcb Against Library C PCAD2001 DEMO DEMO LIB Refdes Conponent Property attribute Library Value Design Value c12 C P300 Value lt Not Exist 1 c13 CAP309 Value lt Not Exist gt 1 c16 cAP300 Ualue Not Exist gt 1 c17 CAP300 Value lt Not Exist gt al cn ChP300 Value lt Not Exist gt 1 es CAP300 Value lt Not Exist 1 cs CAP309 Value lt Not Exist gt 1 c21 C P300 Value Not Exist 1 c23 POLCAP Value lt Not Exist gt 160 c22 POLcaP Value Not Exist 16 RNY RESHSIPISOL Value lt Not Exist gt 300 RNS RESHSIPISOL Value lt Not Exist gt 300 RNI RESHSIPISOL Value lt Not Exist gt 120 RN2 RESHSIPISOL Value lt Not Exist gt 120 RNS RESHSIPTSOL Value lt Not Exist 120 af
122. YTutorialAle mrp txt Header Footer Chapter 14 File Commands Page Format Style Format Output Destination Iv Use Bead C Screen Iv Use Foote C Beport File zd oe r List Separator C Printer Filename Iv Pagination Lines per Page t Columns Output Filename REPORT TXT The Report dialog allows you to define the format of the report You can specify the report format the report style format and output options Header Footer When the Report Style Format is selected you can enter any header or footer text you want to appear on the query output Page Format frame Use Header and Use Footer include the information you specified in the header and footer dialog fields Date Page includes the current date and the page number Pagination allows you to create your own pagination lines per page Page Format is activated when the Report Style Format is selected Style Format frame Delimiter Separated puts all data in separated list format This format can be imported into other spreadsheet and database programs Report produces a report format with columns and spaces etc Output Destination frame The options in the Output Destination frame determine the source of your output Screen sends the output to a file and opens the file using the selected File Viewer File sends the output to a file Printer sends the output directly to the current printer List Separator Choose a separator character from the list
123. a The year is either a 2 digit or 4 digit entry If the month and day are number values the year number follows divided by a slash Jul 23 2001 Jul 23 01 7 23 2001 7 23 01 If the year is not included the current year is assumed For example if today s date is January 2nd 2001 then a query expression containing 12 31 will automatically be December 31st 2001 not 2000 Time The time entry if included follows the date The Date and Time values must be divided by a space Time requires only an hour value Minutes and seconds are optional When entering the time and date in a Criteria And or Or column the time is always entered as a series of numbers divided by colons Time value HH MM SS e HH The hour value on a 24 hour clock 0 24 The hour is required if a time value is used in the query expression e MM The minute value 0 59 SS The second value 0 59 For example to find a component that was modified in a library after 11 47 am on the July 23 1997 the following search criteria may be entered in the Query dialog ComponentLibrary 4 ComponentType 15 NumberOfPads amp NumberOfPins NumberO Parts 18 Homogeneous 3 AlphaNumeric HaslEEE HasDemorgan RefDesPrefix PatternName ComponentName Add Row Add Column x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Library Executive User s Guide 111 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Setting up a Query And Versus Or
124. a Pad saving a pattern to a library 82 symbol files ettet a 81 Symbol Wizard sse 79 Symbol View dial g ite ete tette 8 258 Symbol View View command 258 Symbol Viewer accessing from Source Browser 96 98 tir 78 Symbol Wizard sse 79 system requirements sss 2 system messages essessesresseseesseeetesseneers 275 T Tango Tango PCB heel TangoPRO ASCII 289 290 TangoPRO Binary see Tango Schematic text justification 254 times format senectt techn 111 searching for ete bet 111 timestamps uocis 47 using for component search toolbar centem tret tente eie iare 261 Toolbar displaying eee 256 261 toolbar buttons sse 3 Toolbar View command 261 Translate Library command 220 translating libraries TOI flats cete eese eds 220 Master Designer PDIF libraries 272 U understanding Cross Linking 130 Undo Spreadsheet Change Edit command updating a library User Interface ccccccccsscsssssscsscssssscscssssesseess user manual ADO Uti uite I Eee Rien 1 how to S6 it teens 1 Utils Commands Customize ninrita 265 P CAD Pattern Editor sss 265 P CAD PCGB eee vereris 264 P CAD Schematic esses 264 P CAD Symbo
125. a ei e ee bad Ee cere 57 chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Introducing Pattern Editor eere eret eee eb Ree e Re ch itp e seen 59 Pattern Editor Features ope eie td iine A d code Ped ehe ens ed quce e 59 The Pattern Editor Interface nre ntes gerne irem ns Et evva ign 60 otartirig Patterm EGItor ere Oe e er 60 i re 61 Working with Pattern Files sensns nirean eni E emm emen ener 65 Loading a Pattern from a Library ssseseeeeeeene emen 65 Saving a Pattern to a Library ssssssseeeeeee emere 66 Saving a Pattern as a Pattern File 67 Pattern Attributes ecco erected rese oue dde lige ia i e daai 67 Pattern Graphics in the Pattern Editor sese 68 Add Remove and Rename Pattern Graphics sssssssssssssseeeee 68 Pad Pl cement 5 opcre UHR ER MT EE SEHE ERR diea egr t 69 Ro tate or Flip a Pad vis rere ipee e bed terrere te Yr ipe pest 70 Renumbering Pads trie erf Aer ere eate mop hed aa Toon ee Sets 70 Renumbering Default Pin Designators seee eem 71 Default Pin Designators in the Wizard ssssssssssssseeneeeerene nennen 72 Placing Polhts 1 ta ea reete Rete Pee EA EP ERR Note che AAEE EA 74 Reference Points inem i ee Dee ree ena decree te b deeper ede ru 74 Elder RE 74 ule diee m 74 ii Library Executive User s Guide chapter 6 chapter 7 TESI POMS ETT EET ana aa eea eraoo oneee 74
126. acitor SO Small Outline 54 Library Executive User s Guide Pattern Library Naming Conventions Chapter 4 Libraries SOT Small Outline Transistor TO Transistor Outline TP Tape Pack 4 Major dimensions of package mm Designator Description HHXH BGA and PGA Silk Screen dimensions DxE EExd Diode Outline Length by width mmx10 HEHH QFP except Bumpered style Body of the package dimensions E1xD1 THbdHit Thin Shrink Small Outline Short package length by largest overall length including terminals DxH 5 Lead Form or Terminal Shape Designator Description B Butt or Ball A short lead or solder ball intended for attachment perpendicular to the land structure C C bend A C shaped noncompliant lead bent down and under the body of the package F Flat A compliant or noncompliant nonformed flat lead that extends away from the body of the package G Gull wing A compliant lead bent down from the body of the package with a foot at the end pointing away from the package J J bend A J shaped compliant or noncompliant lead bent down and back under the body of the package N No lead Metallized terminal pads located on the body of the package P Pin or Peg A tempered lead extending from the bottom of the package and intended for attachment to a plated through hole in the land structure R Wraparound
127. al Field Name New Field Name Mapping A Pat Name 4 Description Cmp Name PatName Quantity Description String String String String User define User define User define Predefined Add Row 2 Click the Cmp Name entry in the New Field Names column to display the list of component names 3 Click the down arrow to display the list of P CAD recognized field names Select ComponentName This list disappears and ComponentName is displayed in the column Library Executive User s Guide 171 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources Press ENTER The field is recognized by P CAD when the Mapping column changes from user defined to Predefined 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to map the Pat Name field to the P CAD recognized field PatternName Click the Map button You are reminded that the original imported file is mapped any changes you have made to the file contents in the Viewer are lost during the mapping process The file Viewer appears with the two fields mapped Viewer CAPCAD2001YTutorialVAle mrp txt Table Column Row CAP300 6 Capacitor CAP300RP Radial Polar CAP350 Capacitor CAP400AP Axial Polariz 5 cap700aP CAP700AP Axial Polariz All fields in the sample source file are now mapped to their P CAD predefined values if available In this case the predefined fields ComponentName and PatternName are read only as indicated by their red color on the
128. al Nets gnr MLast Used RefDes lud viLibrary Contents let viParts Locations plc MParts Usage ptu Select the Bill of Materials report and click the Customize button to open the Customize Reports dialog Customize Report Bill of Materials Library Executive User s Guide 155 Chapter 11 Reports Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic 156 The Bill of Materials typically lists the component type pattern component value if any number of components with matching characteristics and the reference designator RefDes assigned to each component In the Selection tab you can select and organize the component attributes you want to include in the report along with setting selection criteria for all fields except Count All attributes in the design are available to be displayed in the report by selecting the Show check box for the specific fields The Selection tab also provides access to the Import Files feature which allows you to import component attributes from a non P CAD source See Setting up a Custom BOM Report page 156 to learn how to customize your Bill of Materials report For information about importing component data from an external source to include in your Bill of Materials report refer to Using an External Source File page 160 Setting up a Custom BOM Report When you click the Customize button on the File Reports dialog the Customize Report dialog is op
129. al details Attribute Table Lists the component attributes and their values Set All Selects all options Clear All Clears all selected options Done Saves the selected options and returns to the Library Publisher dialog Library Executive User s Guide Library Publisher Chapter 15 Library Commands Pattern Format When including a Pattern Section in your published library click the Pattern Format button to open the Pattern Format Options dialog Pattern Format ptions Ea Vv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv v 3 0000in min 6 0000in Max Pattern Name Set All Number of Pads Clear Al Bounding Rectangle Siz List of Pad Styles List of Comp Reference List of Alias Names Attribute T able Picture of Patterr This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the pattern section The pattern section check box can be selected in two locations If you select the Attached Pattern Section check box within the Component Section the pattern section will directly follow the component section of the component to which it is attached If you select the Pattern Section check box outside the Component Section the pattern section will follow after the component section for all components and contain all selected patterns in the library consecutively independent of their associated component The options on the Pattern Format Options dialog are Pattern Name The name of the pattern Number of Pads The number of pads i
130. alog appears Library Executive User s Guide 241 Chapter 16 Component Commands Component Open Component Information 7400 m x H Select Pattern prs ti i S Pattern View Select Symbol Number of Gates 4 Symbol View Reference Number of Pads fa Component Type 1 Refdes Prefix fu Normal r Component Style r Gate Numbering r Alternate Views C Power Homogeneous Alphabetic Iv IEEE C Sheet Connector Heterogeneous C Numeric v DeMorgan C Module C Link Gate t 1 Gaet GaeEa Noms IEEE DeMogan 1 TPOPTEK 16 N TPOPTEK 16 TPOPTEK 16 D E From the Component Information dialog you can attach a pattern and set the component type the number of gates in the component alternate representations of the component and the Refdes prefix Drag and Drop Library Load You can also drag and drop a library file 11b into Library Executive From the File Manager click on a filename icon drag it into the P CAD window and release The library file is loaded and the path established for use with the Component New or Component Open commands Component Open 242 The Component Open command opens an existing component from a library This command allows you to access a component for the purposes of attaching different patterns and symbols changing pin assignments pin equivalents etc for components you have created or for viewing the component data Wh
131. an also access the Import Separated List File dialog from the Source Browser Select the root of the Source Browser tree Sources and choose New Comma Separated File from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Browse button to navigate to and select the file containing the character delimited file 3 Click Open The name of the file to be imported is displayed next to the Browse button Library Executive User s Guide 123 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Importing a Character Separated File 124 4 If the first line of the character delimited file contains field names select the First line contains field names option button If the first line of the character delimited file does not contain field names select the Generate default field names option button Default field names will be attached to the imported data The primary key ComponentName is the only attribute required for the import process This attribute tells Library Executive which component the imported attributes belong to To include the ComponentName field in your imported data file there are two possible processes depending on the contents of your external source file field mapping or cross linking Field mapping is appropriate for character delimited files containing the P CAD primary key ComponentName On the other hand cross linking is optimal for importing external source files that do not contain this essential information Refer to the Field
132. an libraries for user attributes Scan ft ComponentName ComponentLibrary ComponentType NumberOfPads NumberOfPins NumberOfParts Homogeneous AlphaNumeric HaslEEE HasDemorgan RefDesPrefix PattenName ComponentHeight Description Link MALE TUTOR UB ODEMO LIB AAAA AAAAARAARARARA R zi Library Setup Add Row Add Column Query Close Step 3 Using Query Results to Place a Component When you click Query the Query Results Viewer appears This Query Results Viewer is identical to that which appears when you access Query directly from Library Executive The Viewer contains all source components satisfying the selected search criteria In this case the Query Results Viewer should look like the following Viewer o x Place __Fomconeremd Cormponentibrery Eonar ent pel unt esciPadz nets CAPTOONAP CAPCADPUDMTUT Normal CAPI200AP C PCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP300 C PCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP300RP C PCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP350 C PCAD2001 TUT Normal Number mo mo ro mo ro mo ro n o CAP400AP CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP450 CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP500 CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal CAPS500AP CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP600AP CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP700AP CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal CAP800AP CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal POLCAP CAPCAD2001 TUT Normal ro no ro ro ro o ro o ro ro ro ro ro ro ro ns E You can use the Query Results
133. and pin designators Pin Des are filled in When you select a symbol gate numbers Gate and pin numbers for that symbol Sym Pin are automatically added Electrical types default to Unknown For information about spreadsheet editing techniques refer to Library Basics page 3 1 Click on the Pins View spreadsheet that you opened by clicking on Pins View Notice that the program has automatically filled in some of the columns from information already supplied We will be checking this information and adding new data 2 Make sure that the pin information corresponds to the pads on the pattern in a way that matches the 7400 component specifications by checking the pin designators 32 Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Component Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial VEC l 3 12 i1 ii il B 1 z i 4 5 E GND 3 In this example the pin designators coincide with the pad numbers and so can be left as entered Pins View iol xj Padi Pinder Gate Sym Pint Pr Nene Gate Ea Pra Eec Tee 1 Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown 4 Notice that rows 13 and 14 do not have Gate and Sym Pin entries This is because there are only 12 pins on the 4 NAND symbols associated with the pattern but there are 14 pads on the DIP14 These two extra rows will be used to specify the h
134. antity The values for this and other attributes have changed recently in the company database or MRP to reflect the current inventory For lessons 1 and 2 you would like to import this data from the company database to update your library The updated library is used for many of the remaining lessons in this chapter External Source Files When importing data from a non P CAD source such as an MRP database the first step is to generate a simple comma delimited file containing the database information In these example files this step has already been completed for you In fact two comma delimited files are provided with the essential difference being whether or not the file contains the primary key ComponentName The first lesson guides you through the steps of importing the MRP data with the primary key using the Map Fields command lesson 2 uses the Cross Link command to import the MRP file without the ComponentName field Refer to the Importing Data from an External Source page 121 for additional information on how to convert your component database information to this simple format e Ale mrp txt This file is a comma delimited external source file that contains the primary key ComponentName The actual field name Cmp Name must be mapped to the field name recognized by P CAD using the Map Fields command Ej Ale_mrp txt Notepad of x File Edit Search Help Cmp Nane Pat Name Quantity Description CAP366 CAP306
135. aration lines right or left You can append another Or column by clicking the Add Column button Fields can be repositioned in the list by using the Up and Down buttons which determines the order in which they are output to the report If you want to import information from a non P CAD source click the Import Files button to open the Import Files dialog Bill of Materials Import Files x Map File SS Comment Character E OK Cancel The External File Map File View and Import buttons are used to add component attributes to the Bill of Materials report A specific character can be designated as the start of acomment line from the options in the list or by entering the desired character in the box For additional information about this option refer to Using an External Source File page 160 Sort Tab In the Sort tab you can select the field s used to sort the report output and choose a sort order The Customize Report Sort tab is shown in the following figure Library Executive User s Guide Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic Chapter 11 Reports Customize Report Bill of Materials Available Fields Selected Fields Insert gt ComponentName A A Value Append gt Options available on the Sort tab are e Available Fields The list of fields in the selected report e Selected Fields The fields used to sort the data the order in which the sort is applied and the fi
136. are compared to that library If the selected source does not have a ComponentLibrary attribute the Verify only components with matching library check box is ignored All attributes in the selected source are verified When verifying a library the component s time stamp attribute VerifyDate if present is automatically updated with the current date and time If the Set component verify timestamp check box is selected and the VerifyDate attribute does not exist the VerifyDate attribute is added to the component library 4 Typethe desired report file name in the box or click the Browse button to navigate to and select a report file name The selected report file name is displayed 5 Click Verify to generate the difference report If you checked the View Report checkbox the difference report is displayed on the screen The Verification Report The verification report contains differences in the components or component attributes between the source and the target library These differences are listed in an easy to read ASCII format The first line of the report includes the verification source which can be a library library set query result or external source file It also names the first target library against which the source is being compared If the selected target was a library set the verification report format is repeated for second and higher numbered target libraries in the set The differences between the source and ta
137. aries Creating and Updating Libraries If the Update only components with matching library name box is selected Library Executive searches the source for components whose ComponentLibrary attribute matches the selected library Only matched components are updated or added to that library When updating a library the component s time stamp attribute ModifyDate if present is automatically updated with the current date and time If the Create component time stamps if not present check box is selected and the ModifyDate attribute does not exist the ModifyDate attribute is added to the component library All attributes that will be updated in the library are listed in the Attribute Conflict Resolution section Read only attributes cannot be modified and cannot be saved to a P CAD library These attributes are displayed in red on the library Viewer and Query Result Table In this section you can specify how to handle discrepancies between the source and the target library Difference handling can be customized for each attribute by the following simple rules e Ifthe Ignore check box is selected the source attribute is ignored It is neither created nor updated in the specified library e Ifthe attribute exists in both the source and the library and the Source check box is selected the source is favored The source attribute value replaces the present library attribute value e Ifthe attribute exists in both the source and the librar
138. art Number to its corresponding component in the library Ale tutor lib 3 Delete the TARGET Cost column to eliminate the out of date library values by clicking the column heading and then pressing the DELETE key 4 Update the library by choosing the Save to Library command Select the Source check boxes to the right of all attributes All attributes for the vendor s components will by updated in the selected library including Cost Lesson 5 Using Embedded Query to Find and Place a Component The Query utility in P CAD Library Executive is a perfect aid in finding the ideal component for a design For a simple example you would like to place a capacitor on your PCB design With P CAD Library Executive the perfect capacitor is right at your fingertips If you intend to place a component in a design the source that you query must contain complete components For example you could query a P CAD library and place any query result component directly into a design If however the source is an external file the imported component attributes must be attached to a pattern a symbol and electrical information before placement To place a component from a Query Result you must also select to display the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary fields in the Query Result Viewer Refer to the Component Placement chapter page 163 for details on the requirements for placing components Although you can use Query from Library Executive as in lesson
139. ary Browse dialog Select one to list it in the Component Pattern or Symbol box of the Library Delete dialog 4 Click the Delete button and the item box becomes blank To continue deleting items follow steps 3 and 4 until you have deleted all the desired items from the library 5 Click Close to exit the dialog If you click Close before Delete the dialog closes and any pending delete is ignored Library Executive User s Guide 219 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Rename Library Rename The Library Rename command renames a pattern symbol or a component If you rename a pattern or symbol all components in the library that reference that pattern or symbol by the original name become incomplete and cannot be placed To use a different naming convention for a pattern symbol or component create an alias for the pattern or symbol by choosing the Library Alias command and use that alias name Renaming a Library Item 1 Choose the Library Rename command to open the Library Rename dialog Library Rename Library CAPCAD2001 Demo Demollib Rename Item Component GNDANALOG amp Component New Name GNDAN C Patten Close C Symbol Click the Library button to open the Library Select dialog where you can navigate to and select the desired library In the Rename Item frame select the type of item to be renamed Pattern Component or Symbol Those types of items within the library are listed in the L
140. ary verification 140 S Save As Component command 243 Save To Library accessing from Source Browser 100 Save To Library command Save To Library File command Save Component command ie saving attributes to a library Schematic component placement 164 design verification we 141 report enhancements 155 screen layout sese 5 search an imported file ess esses sss 134 expressions 107 for a date 110 for a time 111 for components 103 Select Pattern Edit command 251 Select Symbols Edit command setting up a component search setting up a query sssee 106 Setup Library command 2211 Sheet Connector Library Executive User s Guide component type seeseereneenne 50 Shortcut Directory Utils command 264 SOW Em 107 Slide Selection Down Edit command 250 Slide Selection Up Edit command 250 software requirements Source Browser esse accessIlngniae nme o onnen accessing a pattern or symbol 98 collapsing groups eee 94 commands component ICON sseseeeeete 97 component placement 101 contents creating libraries cross linking see 100
141. at exist in the source but not in the library The Verify command only reports differences between the source and target library You can also choose the Verify command directly from P CAD PCB and P CAD Schematic In this case Verify reports on differences between the current design and the target library Using Verify from a P CAD design you can optionally choose to update the writeable component attributes and properties from an open library For details refer to Using Verify from PCB and Schematic page 141 Using Verify from PCB and Schematic With P CAD Library Executive you can access the Verify tool from both P CAD PCB and P CAD Schematic to verify your current design You can also specifically check the design s component attributes in comparison to a set of open libraries With the Design Verifier you can easily keep your design current incorporating updates in the corporate component database as it reflects the changing marketplace As with library verification the Design Verify command compares component attributes only Attributes of the attached symbols and patterns are not included in the difference report Verifying a Design Verifying a design from P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic is similar to using the Verify command in Library Executive This section covers in detail the process of verifying a design To verify a design from Schematic or PCB 1 Choose Verify Design from the Library menu while the design is in the
142. at may be included in attribute names and values when importing them into P CAD Library Executive The ComponentName field value has a maximum length of 30 characters In general attribute names can have a maximum length of 20 characters An attribute value can be up to 250 characters in length e Using and Importing Special Characters Special characters except the double quote may be imported The double quote is used exclusively to enclose a string of characters Any character can be part of the characters inside a double quoted string of characters For example you can include the following component description attribute 3 Input NAND Gate 01 uF with a comma delimiter To import this description the comma delimited file should contain 3 Input NAND Gate 01 uF The comma becomes part of the attribute value as opposed to signifying the beginning of the next attribute Library Executive User s Guide Importing a Character Separated File Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Importing a Character Separated File For any set of component attributes either in a P CAD library or in an external source file there is an attribute or combination of attributes that indicate which component the set of attribute values belongs to In a P CAD library the component name is the identifier that references only one unique component with that name in the library When a ComponentName field is specified all component attributes ass
143. ated Libraries Pattern Libraries ien eere ori prec Aue ete EEG EO E eode e Custom Libraries 1 cette bep rr tva PEU vett eun ipe Ies ERR node Viewing Contents of the Libraries 40 Using the Library Index ses cecinere retineret inen dehet dente dee ie padece gt 40 Creating and Updating Libraries sssseene emm eene 42 Creating a New Library 12 Lii etie tiet teniente ea rete eet oie La 42 Updating an Existing Library seeen meme 43 Saving a Libraty eter val dace dives re rere e inne e t be e s 44 Setting up a Library Setiveni etiidi iii eee ete decens 45 Accessing the Save To Library Command sse 46 Time Stamps eir te eru eic ede etate sese teta be foetus eese altos 47 Components Patterns and Symbols cccccceesecceceeeeeseeeeeaeceeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeesesensueeeeeeeees 47 Component Types a iia aaa ei een rena 49 Pattern Graphics in the Library Executive sssse em 50 Pin Numbers vs Pad Numbers vs Pin Designators eee 51 Pattern Library Naming Conventions eene mee enne 52 Pattern ACronyms eren tete eee ster aeree see e pr de RC OET 52 Entering Equivalence Information seen enm eene 56 Errors that Prevent Saving a Component sse 57 Copying Renaming and Using Aliases ssseeeen emm 57 Gompact PIOQEAIm ens Le tee UR ee idee De ade
144. ated libraries contain components patterns and symbols A component contains the logical and electrical data for a device and two graphical representations e One or more symbols for a Schematic representation e A pattern for a PCB representation Library Executive User s Guide 47 Chapter 4 Libraries Components Patterns and Symbols PinDes E Pin Des 1 E S 4 2 o o7 8 o 10 5 10 5 e e E n o o 7 e amp 8 Schematic View PCB View of a component of a component Each component consists of one or more logical gates packaged into a physical component A single pattern is the basic graphical structure used in the creation and display of an entire component in PCB RefDes jedA eaceococan oaGoqmaaqa A symbol is the basic graphical structure used in the creation and display of a single gate in Schematic as shown in the following figure ree 48 Library Executive User s Guide Components Patterns and Symbols Chapter 4 Libraries The integrated libraries supplied with P CAD can have symbols of different names that are graphically identical PCB cannot use a component or pattern by itself it requires a component pattern combination Schematic needs a component symbol combination When a component is placed it references the pattern and or symbols attached to it for graphical structure Numerous components can reference the same pattern or symbol The component and the pattern and sy
145. ay the list of unused pads Choose a number or choose gt to begin numbering from that number onwards 3 The Starting Pad Number box defaults to the next available pad number To change the default value type a new number in the box 4 Ifyou place a pad with a duplicate pad number you hear a warning beep 5 Enter the number positive or negative by which you want to increment pad numbers in the Increment Pad Number box You re now ready to start placing pads 6 Click OK to begin You can click drag and release for more accurate placement with a ghosted pad outline Library Executive User s Guide 69 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Renumbering Pads The Status Line shows the pad number of the pad about to be placed and also indicates if the pad number is a duplicate The N key increments the pad number about to be placed by one SHIFT N decrements the number Thus if 6 is the next available pad number pressing N would result in the pad being assigned number 7 pressing SHIFT N would result in the pad being assigned number 5 7 Continue adding a sequence of pads by clicking in the workspace As you do each is incremented according to the options you set in the dialog 98 To stop right click press ESC or click the Select toolbar button The Undo command removes the entire sequence of pads The BACKSPACE key removes the last placed pad Rotate or Flip a Pad In Pattern Editor pads can be flipped as well as rota
146. be modified in Library Executive Viewers Data Types Each field contains attribute or property values These values are stored in memory as a particular data type The following data types are supported in Library Executive String String data is a collection of alphabetic or numeric characters All user defined fields are stored in the String data type with the exception of the Timestamps e Integer Integer data values do not contain a decimal point For example the numbers 3 6 and 9 are integers but 8 5 is not e Boolean Boolean data can be one of two values True or False are Boolean True and False data values are also represented by the numbers 1 and 0 respectively e DateTime DateTime data specifies the time an event occurred It can include the day month year hour minute and second Library Executive User s Guide 105 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Setting up a Query e ComponentType The ComponentType data can be one of the following values Normal Power Sheet Connector Module or Link The Data Type of the field is important for searching comparing sorting and displaying component attribute values Setting up a Query To complete a query you must e Set up the search and display fields e Specify search criteria e Specify the desired output e Execute the query The following section discusses defining your search and display fields as well as setting up your search criteria using query operators It
147. ber When a component with a matching source field is found in the target all component information in both sources is displayed in the Cross Link Result Viewer Library Executive User s Guide 129 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Understanding Cross Linking Viewer Cross Link Result 2 Jol xl Table Column Row 1 32487 Panaso CAP300 Not C Accel13 1 4218 Panaso CAP450 Not C Accell3 1 40458 Panaso CAP500 Not CAAccell3 1 4244 Plessey CAP5004P lt Not C Accell3 1 3489 Plessey CAP10004P lt Not C Accell3 1 8766 Plessey CAP12004P lt Not C Accell3 1 1279 Plessey POLCAP lt Not C Accell3 1 8743 CTS J RES6SIPISOL Not C Accell3 1 200481 CTS H RES DIPISOL Not C Accell3 1 54843 CTS RES8DIPISOL Not C Accel13 1 55438 CTS RES10SIPDT lt Not C Accell3 1 7000 CTS RES14DIPB lt Not C Accell3 1 2351 CTS REST4DIPDT Not C Accell3 1 65943 CTS ij RES14DIPI Not C Accell3 1 13083 CTS i RES16DIPB lt Not C Accell3 1 35081 Yageo RES400 lt Not C Accell3 1 456892 Yageo RES850 lt Not C XAccell3 1 97561 Yageo RES300 lt Not C Accel13 1 54324 Yageo RES1200 Not C Accell3 1 44571 Yageo RES1300 lt Not CS amp ccell3 1 The Cross Link Result Viewer is a simple spreadsheet form attributes found in both the source file and the target are displayed Across the top of the table are the fields found in the source and target If a field name is found in both source and
148. blank PinDes A gate was specified in the Component Information dialog but no symbol was attached At least one symbol must be associated to every gate A gate was specified in the Component Information dialog but no symbol was attached At least one symbol must be associated to every gate The attached symbol could no longer be found in the current library The library is either corrupted or the symbol was removed by another operation while creating the component The attached symbol could no longer be found in the current library The library is either corrupted or the symbol was removed by another operation while creating the component The attached symbol could no longer be found in the current library The library is either corrupted or the symbol was removed by another operation while creating the component The attached pattern could no longer be found in the current library The library is either corrupted or the pattern was removed by another operation while creating the component If a pattern is attached then the number of rows of pin information must exactly match the number of pads in the pattern Rows may be left blank if a pattern pad has no corresponding pin associated with it When there is no attached pattern then every row must correspond to a pin and every pin specified must have a pin designator If the row is not needed then move the row to the bottom of the list and use the Component Information dialog
149. bol name has been added into the Gate spreadsheet at the bottom of the Component Information dialog Adding the Pattern Next a pattern is added to the component to represent the component s footprint when placed in a PCB design using P CAD PCB Pad information from the pattern is used for matching pin to pad numbers when editing the Pins View later in this tutorial 1 Click on Select Pattern to choose the pattern this component will use when placed in a PCB design The Library Browse window displays the patterns available in the selected library Library Browse Pattem 2 Our DIP14 pattern is already selected so click OK to add it to the component You are returned to the Component Information dialog Notice that the pattern name DIP14 has been added to the top right of the dialog and the number of pads has been set to 14 3 To view all the different parts of our component click on Symbol View Pattern View and Pins View and arrange the windows on your screen so that you can see what is happening as you change the pin information Library Executive User s Guide 31 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Component Symbol View 1 NAND _ B x P Select Symbol Edit Symbol Component Information UNTITLED Siol SelectPattem DIPT4 Select Symbol Number of Gates 4 Pattern Vie Symbol View EET Number of Pads ig EM Com
150. braries The imported separated list file does not need to have a unique ComponentName field The Cross Link command can link the Part Number in the external source file to the ComponentName field in a P CAD library The result of the Cross Link command is a table containing a combination of component attributes from the two linked component data sources When importing an external source file the common sources to be linked are the external source file a P CAD library and a map file The Cross Link command the above mentioned source files and how they are used in the process of importing an external source file is discussed in Attaching the Index Identifier page 127 which details how a map file is used to link the Part Number to the ComponentName followed by Import By Linking the Index Identifier page 128 which describes how to complete the import process once the ComponentName has been included with the external source file s component attributes The cross linked component attributes are displayed in a file Viewer dialog and are stored in a Cross Link Result This Cross Link Result can be accessed through the Source Browser and used as the source for any P CAD Library Executive function For example cross linked component attributes can easily be used to update or verify P CAD libraries Components in a Cross Link Result may also be placed directly in a PCB or Schematic design if the components are complete The power and flexibility of th
151. bute s For example cross linking a map file with a P CAD library will result in a source containing all of the component properties and attributes stored in the library including ComponentName and the index identifier for each component from the map file for example Part Number If your database uses a combination of Part Number and Manufacturer attributes to reference its components then the source file would contain columns for both these fields and ComponentName For example start by importing a map file that contains the two fields ComponentName and Part Number The Cross Link command links the ComponentName of the map file to a P CAD Library The cross link result then has all of the P CAD library data and an additional user defined attribute column Part Number for each component The cross link result may now be used to save the Part Number attribute to the library or to link to the Part Number attribute of another external source file Import By Linking the Index Identifier The Cross Link command links two source files by matching component attributes Beginning with the newly created source file that contains the ComponentName and the index identifier you can cross link with an external source containing only the index identifier This link adds the ComponentName field required by P CAD to the appropriate components of the external source In the example begun in Attaching the Index Identifier page 127 you want to link the Part
152. butes See Symbol Attributes page 83 for details e Place Pin and Pin Properties Opens the Place Pins dialog where you can set a starting pin number and increment value before placing pins Option buttons make it easy to set display characteristics and a display area shows you the results of your selection See Pin Placement page 84 for details e Utils Renumber Automates pin renumbering in Symbol Editor by dragging the mouse over a series of pins Pins can also be renumbered manually by selecting one pin at a time See Renumbering Pins page 88 for details e Utils Validate Allows you to validate a symbol before saving it to a library See Working with Symbol Files page 81 for details Symbol Wizard Symbol Wizard automates symbol generation providing a quick way to create a symbol A symbol created with Symbol Wizard is like any other symbol you can modify it save it as a symbol file and save it to a library To open Symbol Wizard 1 Make sure no pins have been placed in the active window 2 Choose Symbol Symbol Wizard to open the Symbol Wizard dialog Library Executive User s Guide 79 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor Symbol Wizard P CAD 2001 Symbol Editor Untitled1 MEE Th Symbol Edit View Place Options Library Utis Macro Window Help l x s n s m amp x 8 gs aj R v ese N Le Length 400 0mil Symbol Width 3 Cm RefDes 2000mi Pin Spacing
153. by selecting a library set a library an external source file a cross link result or another query result and choosing Query from the shortcut menu Accessing Query from the Utils Menu Choose Utils Query to open the Query dialog containing the most recent Query conducted Library Executive User s Guide 117 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Accessing Query and Query Results 118 Accessing Query from the File Menu Choose File Query to open the Query dialog containing the most recent Query if any conducted on the external source file The File Query command only queries a non P CAD data source file Using Query from PCB and Schematic When Library Executive is installed a Query button appears on the Place Part dialog in Schematic and the Place Component dialog in PCB 1 Click the Query button to access the Query dialog 2 Toaccess Query from PCB or Schematic you can also choose the Query command that appears in the application s Library menu The appearance and function of the Query dialog when embedded in PCB or Schematic is slightly modified This section describes the changes to the Query dialog and how it is used from PCB and Schematic Embedded Query Dialog When accessing the Library Executive Query embedded within Schematic or PCB the Query dialog has a slightly modified appearance and function The embedded Query dialog is shown below pen Libraries Set All Clear All Scan libraries for user attribut
154. can be associated with field names recognized by P CAD These fields are properties and attributes that define a complete intelligent component This association can be completed by choosing the File Map Fields or File Cross Link commands Map Fields is preferable when the imported file contains the P CAD primary key ComponentName With Map Fields the mapping is remembered so that subsequent external source file imports are mapped automatically Cross Link is preferable when the database does not contain a ComponentName field Cross Link initially requires that the component database index number be linked to the corresponding P CAD library component Once this association has been completed an external source file without a ComponentName may be directly connected to P CAD library components Refer to File Cross Link page 201 for additional information The Map Fields Dialog The Map Fields dialog is opened when you choose Map Fields from the File menu or Viewer Table menu or by selecting the external source file in the Source Browser tree and choosing Map Fields from the shortcut menu The Map Fields dialog appears as shown in the following figure Map Fields CAPCAD2001YTutorialVAle mrp txt _ Original FieldName New Field Name Mapping Cmp Name User define PatName User define Quantity User define 4 Description Description Predefined The Map Fields dialog is a spreadsheet Refer to Library Basics page 3
155. character separated field names Each field name is translated as a component attribute Line 2 and greater contain a list of character separated values corresponding to the attribute For example the first few lines of a delimited file using the letter x as its delimiter to be imported into Library Executive could be Part Type x Part Number x Cost in x Vendor x Quantity 74008L x 0412345 x 0 25 x Intel x 10 RAM128KX8 x 0324314 x 50 0 x National Semiconductor x 25 In the second format there is no list of field names Line 1 and greater simply contain the list of comma separated values In the absence of the field name list default field names are generated for each column of the file In the second format the above example would be simply 7400S8L x 0412345 x 0 25 x Intel x 10 RAM128KX8 x 0324314 x 50 0 x National Semiconductor x 25 For a character separated file of the latter format default field name headers will be attached when imported In both cases the imported field name headers can be mapped to field names recognized by P CAD Import Limitations There are a few limitations regarding what may be imported into Library Executive First there are maximum limits on how long an attribute name or value may be Second list separators and comment characters with the exception of the double quote can be changed to a character of your choice Attribute Names and Values A maximum number of characters th
156. check box is selected several additional sections are available including Attached Pattern Section Attached Symbol Section and Footer Section check boxes If you select the Attached Pattern Section Attached Symbol Section or Footer Section check boxes the appropriate section is added to your publisher output For instance selecting the Attached Pattern Section check box includes a report of the pattern immediately after the report on the component to which it is attached Library Executive User s Guide Publishing a P CAD Library Chapter 11 Reports The footer section is global so if this check box is selected specified attributes are included in the footer of all pages in the publisher output If any of these sections are included their corresponding format button is available Click the item s format button to select the formatting options for that section Refer to Format Options page 149 for additional details on the Pattern Format Symbol Format and Footer Format dialogs 6 Selectthe Pattern Section check box if you want to include a report on the patterns in the selected P CAD library in the publisher output When selected the Select Patterns button becomes available which allows you to select the patterns included in this section All selected patterns from the library are included whether or not they are attached to any library components Refer to Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols page 154 for additional deta
157. check box outside the Component Section the pattern section will follow after the component section for all components is completed In this case the pattern section will contain all of the selected patterns in the library consecutively independent of their associated component Each of these two pattern sections can be formatted separately Click the Pattern Format button to open the Pattern Format Options dialog When all desired pattern format options are selected click Done The selected options are saved and you are returned to the Library Publisher dialog For details about the Pattern Format options refer to Library Commands page 211 Symbol Format Options When including a Symbol Section in your published library click the Symbol Format button to open the Symbol Format Options dialog Library Executive User s Guide 151 Chapter 11 Reports Publishing a P CAD Library Symbol Format Options x M Symbol Name Set All Iv Number of Pins Clear Al MV Bounding Rectangle Size IV List of Comp References I List of Alias Names v Attribute Table M Picture of Symbol 000m Min E0000 Max This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the symbol section by selecting each option s check box The symbol section check box can be selected in two locations If you select the Attached Symbol Section check box within the Component Section the symbol section will directly follow the component secti
158. ciation between the external source file index and its respective P CAD library component is created before linking The unique index identifier s are stored as user defined attributes within the P CAD library The subsequent external source files need only contain this database index value to connect directly with their associated P CAD library components The primary key ComponentName is not necessary Map Fields is preferable when the imported file contains the P CAD primary key ComponentName With Map Fields the mapping is remembered so that subsequent external source file imports are mapped automatically Refer to File Map Fields page 199 for additional information The Cross Link command is also available from the Viewer Table menu or the Source Browser for imported source files P CAD libraries Query Results and Cross Link Results As with the File Cross Link command a selected attribute s in the cross link source is linked to the target P CAD library or library set The Cross Link Dialog The Cross Link dialog is opened when you choose Cross Link from the File menu or Viewer Table menu or by selecting the external source file in the Source Browser tree and choosing Cross Link from the shortcut menu The Cross Link dialog appears as shown in the following figure Library Executive User s Guide 201 Chapter 14 File Commands File Cross Link Cross Link C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp txt Select Source Fields to Cross Link Se
159. cify the scope or ber is greater than number of gates range that the common pin is defined for is larger in row s that the number of gates 5732 Pin Number for gate 4 was never A pin number found in the symbol could not be assigned in the spreadsheet found in the spreadsheet 5733 Duplicate pin number not allowed None in gate Pin numbers must start with 1 and must be contiguous 5734 Pin Number is missing from gate A pin number found in the symbol could not be Pin numbers must start with 1 and found in the spreadsheet must be contiguous 278 Library Executive User s Guide Library Message Listing Appendix B System Messages Error Number Message Comment 5735 Attempt to assign duplicate pin Every pin designator must be unique designator name 5736 The jumper pin in row is not A jumper pin JMP n must be jumpered to jumpered to any other pin another pin with the same n value Invalid jumper pin value in row _ Check jumper pin values 5 5786 Duplicate default pin designators are Default pin designators must be unique now allowed 12039 Field name changes in file external Field mappings are saved so that if a source file of source file name The saved mapping the same name is imported again the fields are in the ini file is ignored mapped automatically When this warning appears the field names in the external source file have been modified since last mapping and must
160. click the Query button in the Place Component or Place Parts dialog to open the Query dialog 2 Select the check boxes next to the open libraries that you wish to query for components 3 Specify the search and display fields in the Fields column To include user defined attributes in the pick list click the Scan button All open libraries are searched for user defined attributes the attributes are added to the list 4 Setupthe search criteria in the Criteria And and Or columns 5 Click Query The Query Results Table appears with the components satisfying the search criteria in each row The component s can then be placed in the PCB or Schematic design or queried again Library Executive User s Guide 119 CHAPTER 9 Importing Data from an External Source One of the most exciting features of P CAD Library Executive is its ability to create and update a P CAD library file from almost any source including your company s component database Once imported the imported attributes can be used to create a P CAD library to verify and update a P CAD library or to search for the optimal component to place directly into a PCB or Schematic design With P CAD Library Executive you can easily keep your P CAD libraries current to changes in component attributes availability and pricing The ability to import data from any non P CAD source combined with the other powerful features of P CAD Library Executive create a quick convenient no fai
161. commended you use the generic PCB pattern libraries in PCB These generic pattern libraries are identified by names starting with pcb e g pcbmain lib Custom Libraries The component libraries supplied with the P CAD family of applications may be updated in future releases so it is strongly suggested that you do not modify the P CAD supplied libraries Save your custom components to a separate library for example Custom lib Then you can install future releases of P CAD libraries and maintain your custom components Viewing Contents of the Libraries To view the contents of any library use the browse function of the Place Component dialog in P CAD Schematic and PCB or use the capabilities of the Source Browser and the file Viewer You can print a complete formatted listing of the components within each library with the report feature For complete information on using the report features see Reports page 145 Using the Library Index Each new P CAD supplied library is based on a component range available from a device manufacturer A complete library index Library Index XLS can be found in the Lib folder of the P CAD installation directory Use this file to review the complete list of new components 40 Library Executive User s Guide Integrated Pattern and Custom Libraries Chapter 4 Libraries Each component entry has the following information Column Description Name This is the Component Type De
162. d Import Separated List File dialog 123 197 Import File command 197 imported file example sse 168 in Source Browser 135 linking 134 placing components we 135 querying ere eet 134 report 134 145 Verifylng ute eere 134 index identifier Library Executive User s Guide definition sssri iiras Installation and Setup installing P CAD products 2 system requirements sse 2 integrated libraries 40 47 229 J jumper pins wee ese tetsesteeeeececeeeeseeseeseeeeeeees 11 K keys shortcut Pattern Editor esee 75 Shortcut Menu Commands 18 Symbol Editor 90 layer mapping libraries erre ees components patterns and symbols 47 creating a new sss 42 creating from an imported file we 135 tUi 40 drag and drop load 242 importing 269 integrated 40 mapping layers for translation 226 merglHg aic PA eT RET 4273 pattern essere 40 publishing contents 147 report esssseeee 145 swap information esseeeee 56 translating 22242 translating PDIF part libraries 223 translating PDIF symbol libraries 222 updating saia 43 updating from an importe
163. d Perhaps you have been working on a design that may contain some of the altered components With design verify you can validate the design directly and update it to reflect any database changes This chapter describes the library and design verification tolls of P CAD Library Executive Verifying a P CAD Library From P CAD Library Executive you can verify difference between a P CAD library or library set and the following sources e an external source file e aquery result e across link result e another P CAD library or library set Depending on the desired source the library verify tool is started in distinct ways Refer to Accessing the Verify Command page 138 for details Library Executive User s Guide 137 Chapter 10 Library Verification Accessing the Verify Command The basic setup of the verification tool is identical independent of the source Customizing the common verification dialog is covered in The Verification Report page 140 The differences between source and library are logged in a report file This difference report is described in The Verification Report page 140 The Verify command compares component attributes only Attributes of the attached symbols and patterns are not included in the difference report Accessing the Verify Command Choose the Verify command to compare a component source to a P CAD library or library set The Verify command can be accessed from the Source Browser the File men
164. d through the Table menu on the Viewer dialogs or from the shortcut menu in the Source Browser for query results cross link results imported files or P CAD libraries The Query dialog appears Library Executive User s Guide File Save To Library Chapter 14 File Commands Query C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Setall Clear all New Result Table Fia Show Gies Tr E ModifyDate X 8 23 9711 47 Alias ComponentLibrary 4 ComponentType 5 NumberOfPads amp NumberOfPins NumberOfParts 8 Homogeneous 9 AlphaNumeric HaslEEE HasDemorgan RefDesPrefix PatternName Description Add Row Add Column Query Cancel p x x x x xx x The Query dialog allows you to specify search criteria to look for components in the selected source You can specify search and display fields search criteria and output options e SetAll Clear All Click the Set All button to display all fields defined in the selected source in the Field column Click Clear All to remove all fields from the Field column e New Result Table Select this check box to generate an additional query result table If the check box is cleared the present query overwrites the previous result e Query Spreadsheet The Field column contains both the search and display attributes for the query The Show column is selected if the field is to be displayed in the query result The Criteria And and Or columns display the query search criteria
165. d all open libraries To add remove or rearrange libraries in the Open Libraries list click the Library Setup button See your PCB or Schematic User s Guides for additional information If the Report components not found in library option button is selected components in the design that are not in the open libraries are listed in the difference report If the Update Design option button is selected the difference report is generated and the design is updated to correspond to the open libraries The Design Verification dialog does not update the VerifyDate attributes The VerifyDate time stamp marks when the library components not the design components have been verified Type the desired report file name in the box or click the Report File button to navigate to and select a report file name The selected report file name is displayed Click Verify to generate the difference report If you selected the View Report check box the difference report is displayed on the screen Library Executive User s Guide Using Verify from PCB and Schematic Chapter 10 Library Verification Updating the Design Design verification not only generates a difference report it also provides the option of updating your design In three easy steps you could import your corporate database update a P CAD library based on changes to that database and update the design you are working on to instantly reflect those database changes By selecting t
166. d file 135 updating or creating 100 Verifying ierit pte tree tiet aptent 137 library saving attributes to a sss 45 Library Commands ALIAS itte Copy Delete Merge Patterns NOW esee Publisher Rename Library Executive User s Guide DOCU Ps sedia nno ERROR er E eres 211 Translate aetate tien 220 library conversion Tango PCB and Schematic 194 Tango PCB only Tango Schematic only 193 Library Executive Library Setup dialog Utils Query Library Index Library Pattern Graphics 214 Library Publisher oo eee 147 230 component format options 150 233 Gal C footer format options formatting options library format options pattern format options w 151 235 POPOL em 154 239 selecting library contents 154 238 symbol format options creating deleting sirince sneren ettet ntes modifying contents ssseeee modifying from the Source Browser 96 renamlDg ziiesteecostin irre e aaa 95 Library Setup dialog sss 95 library verification from the Source Browser 138 I sTe Tor e 140 ELS T o 139 Link component type eese 50 linking Map File seen 161 M Map Fields dialog sss 125 Map Fields File command 124
167. d in a Query Result Viewer Refer to Component Placement Requirements page 163 for details about the requirements for placing a component from a Viewer spreadsheet Placing Parts in P CAD Schematic To place a component in a Schematic design P CAD Schematic must be running with the design in the workspace The Place Part dialog appears with the component s parts selected Refer to your Schematic documentation or online help for details on placing a part 164 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 12 Component Placement Part Placement from P CAD Schematic Library Executive assists with part placement from P CAD Schematic If you search for a component from within the Schematic application by running an embedded query you can choose to place a component s parts from the Query Result table To access the embedded Query a Query button appears on the Place Part dialog The Library menu of P CAD Schematic also contains the Query command The components satisfying the search criteria are displayed in a Query Result Viewer Refer to Component Placement Requirements page 163 for details about the requirements for placing a component from a Viewer spreadsheet Library Executive User s Guide 165 CHAPTER 1 3 Extended Library Features This chapter covers using advanced library features for importing and exporting and converting libraries form other sources such as MRP and Tango It contains a serie
168. d to represent various component orientations depending on whether the component is flipped or unflipped and whether it is rotated by 0 90 180 or 270 To use the orientations when placing components in P CAD Library Executive User s Guide Pad Placement Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor PCB make sure Autoswap is turned on Refer to your P CAD PCB User s Guide for more information about pattern graphics orientations Pattern Graphics in the Pattern Wizard Whenever the Pattern Wizard is invoked it operates on the current pattern graphics The Wizard includes a non editable field that displays the current pattern graphic The Title bar also displays which pattern graphic is current in the format Library name Pattern name Current Pattern Graphics name This means that you can add several blank pattern graphics to a pattern switch to the pattern graphic you want to work with using the Next Previous Pattern Graphics options and then use the Pattern Wizard to place the particular graphic elements Pad Placement In Pattern Editor the Place Pad command shows you the next available pad number and lets you increment pad numbers To place a pad 1 Choose Place Pad or click the toolbar Pad button to open the Place Pad dialog Place Pad Unused Pad Numbers 75 E Starting Pad Number fi Increment Pad Number 2 The Unused Pad Number box defaults to the next unused pad number click the Down Arrow to displ
169. d would be taken literally and no components would be found Dates and Times You can Query for the CreateDate ModifyDate and VerifyDate fields For example you may want to find all components in a P CAD library that have been modified after a certain date This feature may be particularly useful if you are not the only one using and modifying the same library files The CreateDate ModifyDate and VerifyDate attributes can be automatically added to and updated in your P CAD libraries If the Query operator requires a value the query expression for the above fields must contain at least the date Both date and time are optional There are many date and time formats acceptable to the Query utility Date When entering the month and day in a Criteria And or Or column use the following formats Description Month and Day Value A three letter month abbreviation followed by the day number Jul 23 The full month s name followed by the day number July 23 The month number followed by the day number divided by a slash Library Executive User s Guide Setting up a Query The date requires both a month and day Including the year in the date is optional If a year is included the following formats may be used Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Description Month Day and Year Value If the month is either a three letter abbreviation or the full name the day number must be followed by a comm
170. dable and formatting specifications can be applied The Page Format frame becomes available and you can designate a Header Footer Lines per Page and Columns 3 Selectthe desired file Output Destination File Define the Output Filename by typing the name in the box or clicking the Filename button to navigate to and select the desired file e Screen Puts the report out to the screen e Printer The report output is sent directly to the current printer 4 Click Generate Publishing a P CAD Library Library Publisher is a powerful Library Executive feature that generates complete customizable reports directly in Microsoft Word These reports can include pictures of the patterns and symbols in the library Microsoft Word 97 is required for the Library Publisher utility Setting up the Library Publisher Dialog Choose Library Publisher to open the Library Publisher dialog Library Executive User s Guide 147 Chapter 11 Reports Publishing a P CAD Library 148 Source Library CAPrearam FilesXP CAD 2001 Tutorial T utor lib c Program Files P CAD 2001 TutorialT utor doc Iv Library Section Library Format IV Component Section Component Format Select Components v Attached Pattern Section Pattem Format IV Attached Symbol Section Symbol Format M Footer Section Footer Format Pattern Section Pattern Foret Select Patterns Symbol Section This dial
171. de Menu Commands Chapter 2 Library Basics To perform this task Follow these steps Expand the number of displayed spreadsheet Point to the window s border When the oS pointer becomes a gt hold the SHIFT key and drag the border until the desired number of rows appears Menu Commands Additional menu commands exist in the Viewer and from the shortcut menus Viewer Menu Commands This section describes how to use the menu commands for the Library Executive Viewer dialog These commands are listed in the order that they appear on the dialog menu Table Column and Row The Viewer is used for Query Results P CAD libraries Cross Link Results and imported external source files The Viewer menus are identical for the four sources with the exception of the Table command Map Fields available for the external source file Viewer only Table Commands Table commands allow you to access other features of Library Executive including Query Cross Link Verify Report and Library Save They also allow you to rearrange the contents of the table by using cut copy and paste Of particular importance for importing files from an external source are the Map Fields and Cross Link commands which are also entered from the Table menu The Table menu is used in the external source file Viewer dialog The Map Fields command is not available in the Table menu of the Viewer dialog for Query Results Cross Link Results and P CAD
172. de Dr nei Rei ids eiat de ridens 91 Source Browser Commands sse enn eene ennemi nnne 92 The Source Browser Interface 1 eire etm tee ene EE d dene ee Dea 93 Library Selg PE 95 Bjelle 0 P 95 Adding Deleting and Renaming Library Sets se 95 Modifying Library Set Contents sssssssesseeeee emnes 96 Modifying Library Sets from the Source Browser ssesee 96 Browsing Components Patterns and Symbols sssseeeeeeeen 96 Opening a Comporient p cator oet tien e ett kindi ardeat euaid Egncgn sad 97 Viewing and Editing a Pattern or Symbol sss 98 Deleting Library Attributes e iied teen ede decide nete d Ea deed eda det 98 Accessing Other Features enirn ee ke Xo teen iren na nire tx ieu 99 QUII 2 2 EE eie rie tbe cietons ue cot esie ore ege cu ETE eoe bots eS PIED rese ge ban sen ie toe Tyee 99 Importing Data from an External Source ssssssee eem 99 Cross Linking eh ett e REOR OE a RI 100 Updating or Creating Libraries sse emm 100 Mane P 100 RepOLIS ted o entend Ho gc in Mou os Mec Leld S ME Lee secoli oa 101 Component Placement esse enne nee eren nene enne nnns 101 Library Executive User s Guide iii chapter 8 chapter 9 iv Querying Libraries Ur pgenr E c eeeed 103 Fields and Data Types iter tte
173. ded by an operator the operator is assumed to be sLike Wildcard Characters There are two wildcard characters recognized by Query and Wildcard characters can represent any alphanumeric character The wildcard character represents exactly one character the wildcard character can more generally represent zero to any number of characters For example DIP could be DIP24 DIP16 or DIP8 Whereas DIP 4 must remain five characters long and end with the number 4 such as DIP14 or DIP24 Special Search Criteria by Data Type How you specify search criteria depends on what you re searching for Knowing the data type of the field you want to search you can narrow the field of results When searching for an Integer or String all you need to know to create a successful search criteria is summarized in Selecting the Search Criteria page 107 When searching for a Boolean ComponentType or DateTime data type additional details are helpful to understand how to define a successful search This section discusses how to search for Boolean True False ComponentType and DateTime data values True and False Several standard field types defined in P CAD libraries have a Boolean data type Boolean data is either True or False This can also be represented numerically as the numbers 0 or 1 for False and True respectively The following predefined fields are Boolean e Homogeneous Whether or not the component is homogeneous In a homoge
174. dialog Text Style Change the text style of the Pin Name and Pin Des by selecting one of the existing styles in the Pin Name or Pin Des lists To modify or add a new text style click the Text Styles button to open the Options Text Style dialog Display Select the Pin Name and Pin Des check boxes to display the pin name and or pin designator Default Pin Name Enter or modify a default pin name Default Pin Designator Enter or modify a default pin designator Pin Number Changing the pin number is useful when you only want to change one or two pins If you want to renumber a series of pins choose Utils Renumber for smoother and faster action Length Select Short 100 mil Normal 300 mil Long 500 mil or set your own length by clicking the User option and entering a length in the box Inside Edge Outside Edge Inside Outside frames Select the option buttons to turn on various display characteristics These display characteristics include all attribute symbols that may be attached to a pin for design clarification and are for graphical appearance only Library Executive User s Guide 87 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor Renumbering Pins Renumbering Pins 88 The renumbering function in Symbol Editor unlike Schematic supports single select pin renumbering and drag select for multiple pin renumbering To renumber the Pin Numbers 1 Choose the Select tool 2 Choose Utils Renumber to open the Utils Renumber dialog
175. dialog lets you associate pin information with each pattern pad where each row corresponds to the pad number of an attached pattern if a pattern is attached The number of pins cannot be greater than the number of pads The Pins View dialog consists of rows and columns identifying component properties such as Pin Designator Gate and Sym Pin all of which can be edited e g to assign an electrical type Above these rows and columns is a spreadsheet edit box in the top left corner and buttons to open other views Source Browser The Source Browser provides easy access to all of the component data from a variety of sources and most of the commands in Library Executive The Source Browser is shown in the following figure Source Browser Oo x B amp M DEFAULT LIBRARY SET p C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib E Components H E Patterns t Symbols CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_rnrp tet The Source Browser is a storage place for P CAD libraries library sets an imported source file and query results Its tree like structure provides easy access to each of these sources and their contents When a source is selected the shortcut menu provides access to the commands available for execution on that source Refer to The Source Browser page 91 for additional information Query Dialog The Query dialog is a spreadsheet dialog in which component search criteria may be entered as shown in the following figure Query C PCAD20
176. dified after June 16th you will be using the timestamp feature of Library Executive When creating updating and verifying a P CAD library you can use timestamp to add CreateDate ModifyDate and VerifyDate to the library components These dates can then be used for checking the progress of the libraries and the design components that come from them These timestamps must be added to your library before you can query for the timestamp attributes For more information about the timestamp feature refer to Time Stamps page 47 To query a library for a ModifyDate after June 16th 1 Open the Source Browser to add the library to a library set The library is then available for Library Executive utilities If you would like to follow along with this lesson you can use theAle tutor lib lfyou have used this file for any other lessons load a new backup copy of the original library file Any modifications made to this library during the above lessons will have caused the ModifyDate attribute to be updated 2 Selectthe library in the Source Browser tree and choose Query from the shortcut menu The Query dialog appears 3 Click the Set All button to show the fields contained within the library Scroll down the list to find the ModifyDate attribute 4 In the Criteria And column use the pick list to select the gt operator After the operator type June 16 1997 The Query dialog appears 186 Library Executive User s Guide Import
177. ditor especially handy when you need to modify a pattern graphic e g change its size before adding it The Library Executive however includes a more comprehensive way of handling pattern graphics so refer to Pattern Graphics in the Library Executive page 50 Add Remove and Rename Pattern Graphics Load the base pattern that you want to add the pattern graphics to From the Pattern menu select one of the following e Add Pattern Graphics This command allows you to create new empty pattern graphics and add them to the base pattern Also available by clicking on the H button on the main toolbar e Remove Pattern Graphics This command allows you to remove pattern graphics from the base pattern Also available by clicking on the aic button on the main toolbar e Rename Pattern Graphics This command allows you to change the name of any of the pattern graphics already attached to the base pattern Also available by clicking on the Zal button on the main toolbar Next and Previous Pattern Graphics e Choose View Next Pattern Graphic or View Previous Pattern Graphic to switch between the pattern graphics of a pattern as you can only work on one pattern graphic at a time Also available by clicking on the E next and 4 previous buttons on the main toolbar Orientations Choose Utils Orientations to specify which pattern graphics are to be used for a specific orientation Up to eight different pattern graphics can be use
178. e Click the View and Import buttons to view and import the map file respectively When imported the map file is used to map the design s component names with their corresponding index identifier The now recognized index identifier in the external file automatically attaches the imported attributes to their appropriate P CAD components Library Executive User s Guide 161 CHAPTER 1 2 Component Placement With P CAD Library Executive you can place components directly into a PCB or Schematic design from several sources These sources include a Query Result a Cross Link Result an imported library source file and any P CAD library The component placement feature of P CAD Library Executive is a perfect companion to Query Imagine the advantage you will achieve by being able to search for a component by various criteria including Cost And after finding the ideal component you can convenient place that component directly into your design Component Placement Requirements To place a component in a design the component must be in a P CAD library The component must also be complete including all of the required graphical and electrical information If the component is chosen from the Source Browser the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary fields are known A complete component with the required electrical and graphical information may be placed in a design If the component has an attached pattern it includes the required graphical inf
179. e Column menu as well as from the shortcut menu The commands allow you to add remove rename and sort the columns of fields and their values Add Adds a column to the Viewer to the left of the currently selected column Displays a dialog prompting you for the new field name A pick list of predefined field names is available in the Add dialog e Delete Removes the currently selected column from the Viewer e Rename Displays a dialog that requests a new name for the currently selected column e Sort There are two methods available to sort columns Allow Duplicates and Resolve Duplicates The Allow Duplicates command sorts the field values grouping duplicate values together If you would like unique field values use the Resolve Duplicates command The suffixes 1 2 _3 etc are added to the end of repeated values The Resolve Duplicates command may be preferred for example when sorting the ComponentName field since P CAD requires a unique name for each component The Resolve Duplicates command is available only for fields with data type String The sorting method for String and Integer data types differs The default data type String is always used when saving attributes to a P CAD library Only modifiable attributes not read only are saved to the library Row Commands The Row commands for a selected column are available from the Row menu as well as from the shortcut menu With the Row commands you can add a row or r
180. e Cross Link feature aids far more than simply importing external source files Cross Link is a quick way to combine component attributes from a variety of sources Refer to Understanding Cross Linking page 130 to maximize the cross link power at your fingertips Attaching the Index Identifier In order to cross link an external source file you must associate the index identifier one or more fields which uniquely identify each component in your character delimited file to its respective component in a P CAD library If your database component attributes are organized by Part Number and each Part Number is unique for example you will link each Part Number to its P CAD ComponentName Library Executive User s Guide 127 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Importing a Character Separated File 128 Making this link between the components in the external source file and the P CAD library can be accomplished in many ways You can choose to enter the Part Number as a user defined attribute in your P CAD library by typing the index identifier attribute s directly into a Library Executive spreadsheet You can also choose to use a map file to automatically connect the Part Number to the ComponentName by choosing the Cross Link command which is the recommended method The end result of whatever process you choose is a single source file containing both the P CAD ComponentName and the component s index identifier as a user defined attri
181. e Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PG84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 3 A1010B 1PG84C Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PGB84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 4 AT010B 1PGB84M Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PGB84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 5 A1010B PG84B Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PG84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 B AT010B PGB4C Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PGB84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 7_JA1010B PG84M Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PGB84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 8 A1010 PG84B Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA 1991 PG84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 9 A1010 PG84C Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA 1991 PGB4 PGA PGA28x28 P85 10 A1010 PG841 Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA 1991 PG84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 11 A1010 PG84M Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA 1991 PG84 PGA PGA28x28 P85 12 A1010B 1PQ100C Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PQ100 QFP Rect R QFP14x20 G100 13 A1010B 1PQ100I Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 Pato QFP Rect R QFP14x20 G100 14 A1010BE 2PQ100C Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 Paton QFP Rect R QFP14x20 G100 15 A1010B 2PQ100 Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PQ100 QFP Rect R QFP14x20 G100 18 A1010B 3PQ100C Field Programmable Gate Array Actel ASIC FPGA May 95 PQ100 QFP Rect R GFP14x20 G100 Y 17 A1010B 3PQ100I Field Programmable Gate Array Actel
182. e Number of Pads ja Component EMT CET EL E Normal Select Pattern C Power Edit Pattern C SheetCo Component Info I bul a z murum Module Pins View BETTEL AUAA C Link era a a Symbol View Select Symbol CEU Edit Symbol Component Info Pins View Pattern View Prev Pad Ne Pad 1 _ Pea 1 Prey Sym N Pins View Component Info Pattern View Symbol View Prev Pin t 1 Open an existing component from a library Component Open The Component interface comprises four main dialogs The Component Information dialog provides information about a component The three View dialogs provide visual feedback for patterns and symbols as the component is being created This includes highlighting of pins and pads and the automatic selection of a spreadsheet row in all three views based on your selection within the pattern or symbol browse window During component creation as much information as possible is automatically filled in for you Changes you make to one dialog are reflected in the other three Each of the dialogs may be resized to offer more or less viewing area depending on your needs Each dialog can be accessed from any of the other three A brief description of each dialog is presented in this section For a detailed description of these dialogs see View Component Info page 255 Component Information The Component Information dialog shown in the following fig
183. e Pad Style For ARRAY patterns only Choose the pad style from those in the open PCB design to be used for all pads Use the Rotate box to rotate the pad style 90 degrees e Corner Pads For ARRAY patterns only The outside four corner pads and the inside four corner pads if a cutout section is present in the array pattern may be added or removed individually by selecting the check boxes in the Corner Pads group e Cutout Pads Down For ARRAY patterns only The number of pads to be removed from the center of the ARRAY pattern The number of Cutout Pads Down must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the Number of Pads Down Also the number of Cutout Pads Down must be an odd value if the Number of Pads Down is an odd value and even when the Number of Pads Down is even When the Cutout Pads Across value is 0 the Cutout Pads Down value will be ignored Library Executive User s Guide 63 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Pattern Wizard 64 Cutout Pads Across For ARRAY patterns only The number of pads to be removed from the center of the ARRAY pattern The number of Cutout Pads Across must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than the Number of Pads Across Also the number of Cutout Pads Across must be an odd value if the Number of Pads Across is an odd value and even when the Number of Pads Across is even When the Cutout Pads Down value is 0 the Cutout Pads Across value will be ignored Total Pads For ARRAY patterns only The nu
184. e Symbol menu accesses the P CAD Symbol Editor an application that simplifies and automates symbol creation The Symbol Editor is partnered with the Library Executive and is one of the many P CAD Library Executive enhancements Symbol New The Symbol New command starts the Symbol Editor program with the Symbol Wizard in the workspace Symbol Open The Symbol Open command starts the Symbol Editor program and opens a dialog where you can navigate to and choose the symbol to be edited The symbol can be in a symbol file sym or a component library 1ib Library Executive User s Guide 247 CHAPTER 1 9 Edit Commands The Edit commands are only available after you have created or opened a component Component New or Component Open There are toolbar icon equivalents for Cut Copy Paste Attach Symbols Attach Pattern and Component Attr Edit Undo Spreadsheet Change The Edit Undo Spreadsheet Change command reverses your last completed action to the Pins View Pattern View and Symbol View dialogs but not in the Component Information dialog Many component commands such as Component New and Component Save cannot be undone If an action cannot be undone or there is nothing to undo the Undo command appears grayed on the Edit menu The Undo button on the toolbar and the CTRL U keys are equivalent to the Edit Undo Spreadsheet Change command Edit Cut Spreadsheet Selection The Edit Cut Spreadsheet Selecti
185. e component with the current date and time value Attributes to be Created Lists the attributes in the component source When creating a library select the Ignore column for attributes you do not wish to generate in the library output When updating a library select the Ignore column for attributes you do not wish to compare to the target library For the remaining attributes select either the Favor Library or Favor Source Library Executive User s Guide File Verify Chapter 14 File Commands check boxes to resolve conflicting attributes If attribute values differ in the source and library selecting Favor Source updates the attribute whereas selecting Favor Library does not Attributes in the source that are not found in the library are added to the library if the Ignore column is cleared File Verify The File Verify command opens the Verification dialog From this dialog the components of the imported external source file can be compared to those of a P CAD library and a difference report is generated The Verify command compares component attributes only Attributes of the attached symbols and patterns are not included in the difference report The Verify dialog may also be accessed through the Table menu on the Viewer dialogs or from the shortcut menu in the Source Browser for query results cross link results imported files or P CAD libraries The Verify dialog appears Verify CAPCAD20011DemoiDemo lib
186. e is more than one electrical type that starts with the same letter type the letter again to select the next one e g press P until the type Power appears Alternatively select a cell in the Electrical Type column and right click to choose the Electrical Types command from the shortcut menu 12 When entering electrical types by typing in the first letter notice that the power and ground pins were automatically filled in with a value of PWR for the gate number If you used the shortcut menu to enter the electrical types PWR is not automatically added so type in PWR to complete the spreadsheet as below Pins View 1 Input Output Input Input Output Power Output Input Input Output Input input Power z Now we can check and validate our new component before we save it to a library Library Executive User s Guide 35 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Component Visually checking the pin information Before we leave the component views we can have a quick visual check that the pins have been set correctly As you select a Pin Number s row the corresponding pin is highlighted in the Symbol View and its corresponding pad is highlighted in the Pattern View In the example below pin number 13 has been selected and highlighted in all views P CAD 2001 Library Executive Mylibrary I jepxi fi Component Information UNTITLED BEST Symbol View 4 NAND olx Pins View Select
187. e key to library 174 comma delimited file 168 component placement 183 creating a library cross linking see design verification scssss 187 importing a file importing map file sss 174 map TING enne ees 168 reporting on updates to library 186 updating a library 169 172 using query 181 verifying a design sss 187 verifying component attributes 189 Exit File command sss exiting Library Executive external source file s external source files sssss 283 284 F fields AlphaNumeric esee 109 Boolean csetera teneas otn 105 109 Eo REA 107 HasDemorgan eee 109 HaslIEEE ert ter RR 109 Homogeneous essen 109 niic 105 linking en erre 127 list 104 orat UNS 157 Search uidet edes 107 selecting for query sss 106 SEEITIB A rece de ies 105 TYPOS Lore E EER 103 file example of comma delimited 168 example of map file File Commands Gross EN Korie rte 126 201 Dd m M 210 MPOT rete 197 Map Fields 124 199 200 QUIETLY orci n 204 Report eie bee erre eed 208 Save To Library sss 205 VGEIy certe here et e tein 207 file Viewer Column commands
188. e using Library Executive The Source Browser contains any or all of the following items P CAD library sets A library set contains a group of P CAD libraries Many of the Library Executive commands can operate on either an individual library or a group of libraries simultaneously by selecting a library set For more information refer to Library Sets page 95 P CAD libraries A P CAD library can be accessed through the Source Browser Libraries in the Source Browser are always contained within a Library Set You can open the library to view or edit the components patterns and symbols it contains For more information refer to Browsing Components Patterns and Symbols page 96 External source file A component data file from a non P CAD source can be imported into Library Executive The component attributes of the external source file can be used for many of the Library Executive functions including updating a P CAD library For more information see Importing Data from an External Source page 121 Query results A search or query can be conducted on any source for a component or component attribute satisfying specified criteria A Query Result is added to the Source Browser after a Query is complete The Query Result contains all components or component attributes from the selected source that satisfy the search criteria For more information see Querying Libraries page 103 Cross link results Component attributes in two differen
189. e we create the arc 7 Tocreate an arc with a 200mil radius select Place Arc or click the Bs button Place the cursor over the end of the line at the top right of the symbol where you want the arc to start Click and drag the cursor from the top to the bottom and release An arc appears Press F to flip the arc over and then click again at the bottom to place it Right click or press ESC to end arc placement RefDes RefDes rs N CA Type Library Executive User s Guide 25 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Symbol 26 Choose the Select tool to reposition the Refdes and Type fields and move pin number 2 down 100 mils Simply select the objects and drag them to their new positions Double click on pin 3 to open the Pins Properties dialog and add a dot to the Outside Edge Select Pin Name and Pin Des in the Display frame so these values will display with the pins and click OK Pin Properties m Text Style m Length Inside Edge M Inside Pin Name PinStyle C Shot None None C Clock C Open Pin Des PinStyle x Normal C Open High C Long m Outside Edge F Open Low Passive Up Test Styles C User E None C Passive Down C 38tate eru In ht r Display Default Pin Name 300 0mil Ae C Amplifier Coole Dut wE IV Pin Name C Hysteresis M PinDes Default Pin Des E Ponipo
190. ed to hold components in place until they are soldered during manufacturing A glue dot can be placed as part of a pattern before saving the pattern to a library Pick Points The Place Pick Point command places a Pick Point on a pattern before it is saved to a library Pick Points provide reference points in directing the pick and place mechanism or auto insert in manufacturing picking up the component and placing it on the board Test Points The Place Test Point command places a Test Point on a pattern before it is saved to a library 74 Library Executive User s Guide Keyboard Shortcuts Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Test Points can be placed on any non signal layer and can be placed either on the Top or Bottom of the board The side of the board is independent of the layer name For example if you place a test point on the Bottom Silk layer and set the side of board to Top the test point can be tested from the top New design rules attributes have been implemented to allow for checking of test point violations Placing a Point To place a point 1 Choose the appropriate Place command Ref Point Glue Point or Pick Point or click one of the point buttons on the toolbar 2 Click the cursor where you want to place the point You can move a point by selecting it and dragging it to a new location Pick Points and Glue Points can be flipped to the bottom layer They use the line color from the layer that they are on
191. een added to the Custom toolbar the display of the toolbar is turned off As soon as the first custom tool has been added by choosing the Utils Customize command the Custom toolbar display is turned on When custom tools exist in the Custom toolbar you can turn off the display of the toolbar by choosing View Custom Toolbar View Prompt Line The View Prompt Line command turns on or off the display of the prompt line Current visibility is saved to the cmp ini file and restored in subsequent sessions Library Executive User s Guide 261 CHAPTER 2 1 Utils Commands The Utils commands let you move quickly to other P CAD customized applications Utils Query The Utils Query command allows you to search for a wide variety of predefined and user defined attributes in several sources a P CAD library or library set an external library source file a cross link result or the result of a previous query The Query utility can also aid in the search for a component to place into a PCB or Schematic design The Query utility is also embedded directly in the P CAD PCB and P CAD Schematic programs The Query dialog may also be accessed through the File or Table menus on the Viewer dialogs or from the shortcut menu in the Source Browser The Query command searches for components from the current contents of Library Executive memory as displayed in the Viewer Query does not search the original source file If changes have been made
192. eld s sorting order A for Ascending or D for descending is displayed in the Selected Fields list e Insert Click the Insert button to move a selected field from the Available Fields list and insert it above the selected field in the Selected Fields list e Append Click the Append button to move the selected field to the bottom of the Selected Fields list e Remove To move fields from the Selected Fields list back to the Available Fields list select the field and click the Remove button Sorting Order The Sorting Order is set by selecting the desired option button to sort in Ascending or Descending order before moving a field to the Selected Fields list Adding a Custom Report Once the desired options are selected click Add to open the Report Configuration dialog Library Executive User s Guide 159 Chapter 11 Reports Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic 160 Report Configuration Enter Report Name I Cancel Enter the Report Name and click the OK button You are returned to the File Reports dialog where the new report is listed in the Reports to Generate area You can now select the reports and generate output by clicking the Generate button Using an External Source File You can import component attributes from a non P CAD source to be included in the Bill of Materials report For example you may have a company component database that includes additional information about the components not contained
193. ellaneous tab Colors Miscellaneous r Cursor Style Amow C Small Cross Large Cross m Miscellaneous T Draft Mode T Drag by Outline T Thin Stroked Text T Display Default FinDes Iv Display Open Ends Iv Scroll Bars Iv Show Data tips 5 Deselect Display Default Pin Des and click OK Modifying a Symbol Now we can modify the symbol created by the Wizard to form a NAND gate symbol as shown in the following figure Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Symbol Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial RefDes Type 1 First we will add a new grid spacing of 20mil to allow for easier object placement To do this type 20 into the Grid Spacing box located on the status line and press Enter 2 Usethe zoom keys zoom in and zoom out to view the symbol as necessary 3 Now we will make the symbol bigger by selecting and deleting the right hand vertical line of the box Click on the line to select it and press the Delete key 4 Make the remaining body of the symbol 400 mils high by selecting the bottom line and the Type field and moving them down 100 mils as shown RefDes RefDes z 1 E 2 ager ar Type Type 5 Extend the remaining vertical line to meet the bottom line To do this select the vertical line click on the editing handle at the end and drag the line to its new position 6 Selectthe pin number 3 and move it out of the way whil
194. emove the component in the selected row You can place a component in a P CAD PCB or Schematic design You can also open a component to view its component information e Delete Removes the currently selected row from the Viewer 16 Library Executive User s Guide Source Browser Shortcut Menu Commands Chapter 2 Library Basics e Place Places the selected component in a running PCB or Schematic design and opens the Place Part or Place Component dialog open with the component selected e Open Displays the Component Information dialog Refer to View Commands page 255 for additional information The Open command is only available if the row contains the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary field The Place command requires the row represents a valid component with an attached symbol or pattern Source Browser Shortcut Menu Commands When you select an object in the Library Executive Source Browser and click the right mouse button a shortcut menu opens providing access to common commands performed on selected objects The commands on the shortcut menu change depending on the object selected The following commands appear on the shortcut menu Choose this Command To do this Add Library Opens a standard window where you can navigate to and select the library you want to add to a selected library set Cross Link Opens the Cross Link dialog where you can link component attributes in the selected file viewer with their corr
195. en you choose the Component Open command or click the toolbar button the Component Open dialog appears Component Open CA PCAD2001 Demo Demallib Component Name OK Cancel Symbol Pattern Pattern Name Part Num A Symbol Name TPOPTEK 30 N Alternate Normal b Library Executive User s Guide Component Save Chapter 16 Component Commands If the library you want to access is not current does not appear in the Library field click the Library button to navigate to and select the desired library You can also drag and drop a library file lib into a P CAD Library application Select the desired component and click OK The Component Information dialog opens and displays information for the component It also provides access to the different views of the component where you can attach symbols or patterns and edit component properties Component Save The Component Save command saves the current component to its associated library file This command is also accessible by clicking the Component Save toolbar button Component Save As The Component Save As command saves the component to a different library or with a different component name When you choose Component Save As the Component Name dialog opens 7400 Enter the new name for this component or select one from the list Component Validate The Component Validate command verifies all fields for valid entries and reports any e
196. ence file click the PDIF Cross Reference button to open the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose the PDIF cross reference file that corresponds to the library you want to translate 4 Click the Source Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose the PDIF PCB library to translate 5 Click the Destination Library button to open the Library File Listing dialog and choose the destination library name 6 Click Translate to begin the translation process Library Executive translates all components and adds new alias names Library Executive also generates and displays an error log file in the Notepad utility The name of this file is Filename err where FILENAME is the name of the output library 7 Review the log file to make sure that all power and ground pins were defined and that important information has not been lost 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 to translate the appropriate Master Designer PDIF Schematic Library 9 You should now have two P CAD library files one from a Master Designer PDIF PCB library the other from a Master Designer PDIF Schematic library 10 Click Close to exit the dialog Merging the Libraries This section explains how to merge the translated Master Designer PDIF PCB and Master Designer PDIF Schematic libraries 1 Choose library Merge Patterns to open the Library Merge Patterns dialog Library Executive User s Guide 273 Appendix A Importing Master Designe
197. ened with the Format tab selected Customize Report Bill of Materials Report Type Bill of Materials Report Style P CAD Report Header Eooter Page Format Lines per Page 62 Use Header Column Width fi 5 Use Footer i 3 File Extension bom T Design Info MU r Separated List ate Page UU z Iv Include Report Preface Pagination Iv Include Column Heade Format Tab In the Format page you can select the following options Header Enter the name of the heading for the report if you have chosen the P CAD Report Style Format Footer Enter the name of the desired footer if the Style Format of P CAD Report has been selected Library Executive User s Guide Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic Chapter 11 Reports Page Format The Page Format frame applies to reports whose Style Format is the P CAD Report Choose the desired options by selecting the appropriate check boxes for e Use Header to include the information you specified in the Header box e Use Footer to include the footer information entered in the Footer box e Design Info includes the information you entered in the File Design Info command and dialog e Date Page includes the current date and the page number e Pagination allows you to create your own pagination lines per page Lines per Page Enter the number of lines you want printed on each page Column Width Defines the number of characters up
198. enu The Open dialog displays Open 2 x Look in C3 Demo 7 x E3 Demo lib Modfax0 lib Filename Mybb oooO Files of type Library File lib Cancel Z Library Executive User s Guide 37 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Component 38 3 SelectMylibrary lib from the list of libraries available in the Demo folder of the P CAD installation directory and click Open 4 Expand the Default Library Set to display the names of libraries already added Then expand Mylibrary lib to view the components patterns and symbols stored in it Source Browser a x amp ff DEFAULT LIBRARY SET amp fl D Program Files P C4D 2001 5Demo Mylibrary lib S E Components amp 7400 Big Patterns vii 8 3 Symbols R NAND 5 Double click on a component name e g 7400 to display its Component Information dialog 6 Double click on a pattern name e g DIP14 and the pattern will display in the Pattern Viewer You can then edit the pattern by clicking Edit in the Pattern Viewer if required Click Close to return to the Source Browser 7 Double click on a symbol name e g NAND to view or edit the symbol via the Symbol Viewer Click Close to return to the Source Browser For more information about the other features available in the Source Browser see The Source Browser page 91 Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 4 Libraries This chapter provides
199. er s Guide 89 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor Placing Reference Points You can also select a pin choose Properties and then assign a pin number pin name and pin designator Placing Reference Points The Place Ref Point command places a reference point on a symbol before it is saved to a library Symbol Editor automatically places a Ref Point on a pin or at center of pins if you save a symbol to a library without a Ref Point Refer to your P CAD Schematic User s Guide for additional information Keyboard Shortcuts This section contains a list of keyboard shortcuts unique to Symbol Editor Press these keys To do this BACKSPACE Used as unwind command while placing objects with Gianna multiple segments e g lines polygons pins Each Unwind BACKSPACE stroke unwinds the previously placed item N and SHIFT N N increments a pin by one when placing or renumbering pins SHIFT N decrements a pin by one when placing or increment and decrement renumbering pins 90 Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER T The Source Browser Using the Source Browser The Source Browser displays component data currently available in P CAD Library Executive in an easy to use Graphical User Interface GUI It is organized in a tree like structure that shows the relationship between these component data sources The Source Browser provides access to all the information and many of the commands available to you whil
200. er dialog The Edit button on the Symbol Viewer dialog also starts Symbol Editor When you start Symbol Editor the interface appears as shown below P CAD 2001 Symbol Editor Untitled1 iol x IH Symbol Edit View Place Options Library Utis Macro Window Help 81 x m B e m e ee ela elg MI I IBIxIZIA 1 Click Left to single Select Ctrl Left for multiple or drag for block select 52000 roo mes 100 mf shee spes Library Executive User s Guide Symbol Wizard Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor The following Symbol Editor commands and functions are distinctly different in their usage or access than those of P CAD Schematic e Symbol Open Opens symbol files sym which can then be modified and saved to a library See Symbol Editor online help for details e Symbol Save to File and Save to File As Saves a symbol to a file sym which allows you to keep symbols for later use without having to save them to a library Invalidated or incomplete symbols can be saved in this way See Working with Symbol Files page 81 for details e Symbol Save and Save As Saves the current symbol to a library See Working with Symbol Files page 81 for details e Symbol Wizard Opens a wizard used to simplify symbol creation See Symbol Wizard page 79 for more details e Symbol Attributes Allows you to create and modify symbol attributes for the current symbol file including invisible attri
201. ered by one SHIFT N decrements the number Thus if 6 is the next available pad number pressing N would result in the pad being assigned number 7 pressing SHIFT N would result in the pad being assigned number 5 You can use the unwind feature to reverse the renumbering process The BACKSPACE key unwinds the renumbering Right mouse click or press ESC to end the Renumber sequence The Undo command reverses the entire renumbered sequence You can also select a pad and choose Properties to open the Pad Properties dialog and assign a pad number Default Pin Designators in the Wizard While in the Pattern Wizard the default pin designators for ARRAY type patterns can be changed using the Default Pin Designator Assistant 72 Library Executive User s Guide Default Pin Designators in the Wizard Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor 1 Inthe Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog select the Pin Des check box in the Free Pads frame Options Display 2 Click OK to return to the Pattern Wizard 3 Click the Default Pin Designator button to display the Default Pin Designator Assistant Library Executive User s Guide 73 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Placing Points The example box in the center of the dialog shows how the different values affect the numbering Any changes made to the row and column values are immediately reflected here except for the Skip Characters 4 Specify the Beginning Row Value and
202. es Scan WIALE_TUTOR LIB Cf red Show Criteria And Or MDEMO LIB 1 ComponentName amp Ivi TLITOR LIB 2 ComponentLibrary 3 ComponentT ype 4 NumberDfPads 5 NumberOtPins 6 NumberDfParts Homogeneous 3 AlphaNumeric 3 HaslEEE HasDemorgan RefDesPrefix PattemName ComponentHeight Description Library Setup Add Row Add Column The first difference you might note is the list of open libraries on the left hand side Selecting the check box next to the library name indicates that you would like to search that library using Query You can open additional libraries by clicking the Library Setup button x fx x x x x x x x x x x x x Rz A second difference is the Scan button in the upper right hand corner Clicking the Scan button searches all open libraries for user defined component attributes and adds them to the pick list for the Fields column By default the pick list contains only the primary field ComponentName and the other predefined attributes User defined component attributes may also be typed directly into the Fields column if you know the name of the attribute Library Executive User s Guide Accessing Query and Query Results Chapter 8 Querying Libraries For the embedded query there can be only one Query Result table Using the Embedded Query This section contains a quick summary of using the Query embedded in PCB and Schematic 1 Choose library Query or
203. esponding components in another source The Cross Link Results Viewer displays a combination of the attributes in the two source files for the linked components Delete Deletes the selected library set You can also press the DELETE key Delete Attributes Deletes selected user defined attributes from a P CAD library Map Fields Opens the Map Fields dialog where you can map the field names imported from an external source file to field names recognized by Library Executive New Comma delimited Opens the Import Comma delimited File dialog where you can File select a non P CAD component data file to import into Library Executive New Library Set Adds a new library set to the Source Browser Open Opens the Component Information dialog See View Commands page 255 for additional information Place Opens the Place Component dialog in PCB or the Place Part dialog in Schematic with the selected component name selected for placement Library Executive User s Guide 17 Chapter 2 Library Basics Keyboard Shortcuts Choose this Command To do this Query Opens the Query dialog where you can search the selected source Query can be selected from a library library set an external source file or a Query Result Reload Reloads an external file a library or a library set s contents into P CAD Library Executive The contents of a library or external source file are read automatically when the lib
204. ew or edit a pattern or symbol follow these steps 1 Selecta pattern or symbol in the Source Browser 2 Choose the View command from the shortcut menu You can also view a pattern or symbol by double clicking its name in the Source Browser tree When you view a pattern for example the Pattern Viewer dialog opens RefDe 2 IN Ho ELLA ma e fi The P CAD Pattern Editor can be opened by clicking the Edit button on the Pattern Viewer dialog See The Pattern Editor page 59 for information on using the Pattern Editor The P CAD Symbol Editor can be opened by clicking the Edit button on the Symbol Viewer dialog See The Symbol Editor page 77 for information on using the Symbol Editor Deleting Library Attributes From the Source Browser you can remove user defined attributes from a P CAD library To delete attributes from a P CAD library 1 Selectthe library in the Source Browser tree 98 Library Executive User s Guide Accessing Other Features Chapter 7 The Source Browser 2 Choose Delete Attributes to open the Delete Attributes dialog Delete Attributes x Source CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Selected Attributes Will Be Deleted Cost Description OModityDate Part Number Quantity Vendor The name of the selected library appears in the Source box The user defined attributes that may be deleted from the library appear in the Selected Attributes Will Be Deleted box 3 Select the
205. features you can access from the Viewer Query You can access Query from the Viewer by choosing Query from the Table command menu With Query you further limit the component list of the imported source file by specifying desired search criteria Query results are stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on a query result allows you to view the query spreadsheet generate a report save the query to a library or query again Cross Link You can access Cross Link from the Viewer by choosing Cross Link from the Table command menu With Cross Link you can link a component attribute in the mapped imported source file with a matching attribute in any target source a P CAD library query result or cross link result All attributes from both the source file and the library are displayed in the Cross Link Results Viewer Cross Link results are stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on a cross link result allows you to view the cross link Viewer spreadsheet generate a report save the cross link result to a library query or cross link again Refer to Understanding Cross Linking page 130 for details about the cross link feature Verify From the Viewer you can verify the consistency between the imported components and a set of P CAD libraries A report is generated if any differences are found The Verify command is available from the Table menu or from the shortcut menu for a selected imported separated list
206. ference links from the Attributes dialog e Adding an Attribute Click the Add button to open the Place Attribute dialog Select the desired Attribute Category and attribute name from the Name list If you are adding a user defined attribute enter its Name in the Name box and its value in the Value box Click OK and the attribute is added to the table Place Attribute x Attribute Category Name Name user defined Pat Number ComponentHeight Description Value Link NoSwap PackageQutlineLayer RefDes I Visible Reference location D SwapEquivalence In Type x ve SPECCTRA Placement Value TextStyle T H120w10 v Test Styles Rotation r Justification see LES eee ecc Gea 252 Library Executive User s Guide Edit Component Attribute Chapter 19 Edit Commands e Viewing Attribute Properties Select an attribute from the table and click the Properties button or double click the attribute to open the Attribute Properties dialog This dialog is similar to the Place Attribute dialog except that only the Value field can be edited here See Attribute Property Dialog page 253 for more information e Deleting an Attribute Select an attribute in the table and click Delete or press the DELETE key e Launching a Reference Link When the special attribute Reference whose value is a reference link is added to the item you can select the Reference attribute and click the Launch button to start a progra
207. file then click OK The Library Translate dialog reappears and displays the name of the source library next to the Source Library button 8 Click Destination Library to open the Library File Listing dialog 9 Enter the name of the destination library then click OK The Library Translate dialog reappears and displays the name of the destination library next to the Destination Library button Remember not to overwrite a symbol library with the same first name 10 Click OK The Master Designer to P CAD PCB Layer Mapping dialog appears Library Executive User s Guide 225 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Translate 226 11 P CAD to ACCEL PCB Layer Mapping xi PCAD to ACCEL PCB Layer Map ACCEL Layer i Top Assy Le Map Selected Layer Default Map Unassign All Layers OK Cancel T L FLTARG NONE Tool Table X Use Table NONE Convert Pad Definitions from Embedded Aperture Table Pad Graphics Select the desired layers and map them accordingly Then click OK The translation of the P CAD PDIF part library begins While translating several messages are displayed indicating the system s progress During translation the program loads the pin mapping file creates the new pad styles and maps the appropriate pins to the new pad styles After translating the library a message box appears indicating if there were any errors or warnings If there are none you can click Close Mappin
208. file Viewer Step 3 Updating a P CAD Library with MRP Data The number of components available in your company inventory has changed since you created the component library To get a quick turn around on your design you would like to search for some components based on their availability You have now imported that new data into Library Executive In this section you will use the imported file to selectively update the Quantity attribute in a P CAD library This section assumes that you have already set up the Ale tutor lib so itis available for Library Executive If not open the Source Browser and select the DEFAULT_LIBRARY_SET Choose Add Library to add the sample library to the default set To update the Quantity attribute of the Ale tutor lib library follow these steps 1 From the Table command of the file Viewer choose Save to Library The Save Source dialog appears 172 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 6 7s Source C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp tet Save Mode Library C Create New 4 Update CAPCAD2001 TutorialAle_tutor lib Create new components T Update only components with matching library name Iv Create componenttime stamps if not present Attribute Conflict Resolution Favor Select the Update option button Click the Library button navigate to the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory andselect
209. file in the Source Browser tree For more information on verification see Library Verification page 137 Reports To generate a report on an imported source file from the Viewer choose Report from the Table menu or select an imported file from the Source Browser tree and choose Report from the shortcut menu 134 Library Executive User s Guide Accessing the Imported File Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source For additional information about generating reports refer to Reports page 145 Updating or Creating Libraries You can use imported separated list files to create or update P CAD libraries A new library can be created from an external source file Later you can easily update this library as the external source file changes To create or update P CAD libraries from an imported file choose Save To Library from the Table menu in the Viewer You can also create or update libraries from the Source Browser by selecting the external source file in the Source Browser tree and choosing Save To Library from the shortcut menu Placing Components To place components into P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic from the Viewer select the row containing the desired component information Choose Row Place and select the desired application PCB or Schematic You can also select the component from the Source Browser tree and choose Place PCB or Place Schematic from the shortcut menu For more information about placing
210. file is referenced by a unique Part Number In this lesson you will be importing the sample comma delimited file Ale crosslink txt This external source file does not contain a ComponentName field Importing this file will be used to Library Executive User s Guide 173 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources introduce the Cross Linking function of Library Executive For additional information about the Cross Link feature see the Importing Data from an External Source page 121 Because the imported file does not contain a ComponentName a few additional steps are necessary in comparison to Lesson 1 The first step serves the purpose of inserting the MRP database index identifier Part Number as an attribute of its associated component Since this attribute is saved with the library this step need only be completed once The remaining steps are the import and update process for an external file without a ComponentName These steps are completed every time you wish to update the P CAD library components from this external source file This lesson assumes that you have already set up the Ale tutor lib soitis available for Library Executive If not open the Source Browser and select the DEFAULT LIBRARY SET Choose Add Library to add the sample library to the default set You can follow along the next few sections using the sample files to complete each of these steps yourself Step 1 Adding the Par
211. g flipping and rotating Rotate or Flip a Pin In Symbol Editor pins can be flipped as well as rotated during placement To flip a pin as you are placing it press F while the pin is ghosted before final placement To rotate a pin as you are placing it press the R key while the pin is ghosted before final placement The resulting rotation angle is applied to the next pin you place Refer to your P CAD Schematic User s Guide for additional information To rotate or flip a pin after it has been placed select it and press R to rotate or F to flip The R key rotates the pin 90 degrees Pin Properties The Pin Properties dialog allows you to view or change pin properties When you select a pin and choose Properties the Pin Properties dialog opens 86 Library Executive User s Guide Pin Properties Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor m Text Style Length Inside Edge gt Inside Pin Name C Short None None C Clock C Open Pin Des PinStyle v Normal C Open High C Long Outside Edge E pen Low Text Styles User P HR L Baa DM C 38tate Display Default Pin Name 00 Omil E Roath n 9 Ue enerator Iv Pin Name fi C Hysteresis IV PinDes Default Pin Des c i fi r Outside Pin Number 20 None C Flow In C Flow Out C Flow Bi C Analog C Digital EN ON Changing Pin Properties The following options are available in the Pin Properties
212. g Layers in P CAD Library Applications Mapping layers makes it easier for you to control the data that you carry across by selecting the desired layers For each layer you select the system translates the data on that layer For each layer you don t select the system ignores the data on that layer When mapping layers in Library Executive you need to be aware of a few points The system always maps the REFDES layer and brings over the data on that layer Some library data has visibility control and some does not Graphic objects such as circles lines and rectangles do not have visibility control and cannot be hidden or displayed in Library Executive For these objects the data is translated mapped to the appropriate layer and displayed in your design Other data such as such as reference designator component type and value have visibility control In this case the data is translated mapped to the appropriate layer and hidden or displayed based on the layer visibility setting in Master Designer For example if the first component ever entered in the library has an attribute on the ATTR layer in Master Designer and that layer s visibility is set to ON or ABL Library Executive translates this Library Executive User s Guide Library Translate Chapter 15 Library Commands data and displays it On the other hand if the ATTR layer is set to OFF Library Executive sets this visibility to OFF e When you translate a PDIF symbol library
213. g by selecting the appropriate check boxes Select the desired file output destination Screen or File If File is selected define the Output Filename by typing the name in the box or clicking the Filename button and navigating to the desired file Click Generate The report file is generated and either saved to the specified file displayed directly on the screen or printed If you have an unsaved component you will be prompted as to whether you want to save changes before you exit the program Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 1 5 Library Commands Using the Library Commands With the Library commands you can create new libraries add new item aliases copy items from one library to another delete library items or rename library items You can also update older version libraries translate Tango format libraries into P CAD format and merge pattern and symbol libraries into integrated libraries P CAD libraries combine patterns symbols and components These sections of a library represent all of the information for a component such as component pin assignments and other electrical information and the graphical pattern and symbol structure Patterns and symbols referenced by a component must reside in the same library as the component Library New Library New allows you to create a new empty library Library Setup A library set is a group of P CAD library files You can perform several Library Executive operat
214. hat map physical pads in PCB to logical pins in Schematic Pad numbers are just identifiers for pads used to cross reference with the pin designators when assigning the pin designator values Similarly symbol pin numbers are just pin identifiers Using an ordered linear pad or pin numbering system makes identifying pad numbers and symbol pin numbers easier but you could just as easily number them randomly and still assign pin designator values to them In the component pattern symbol combination pattern and symbols contain only pad and symbol pin numbers whereas components contain pin designators Each pin designator references one pad number and one symbol pin number For example suppose you are creating a 6 pin component with pin designators A through F You could number your pads and assign pin designators as follows 10 s 20D ces 30 OD pattern component If your pads were numbered differently the mapping would change but the pin assignments would remain the same Library Executive User s Guide 51 Chapter 4 Libraries Pattern Library Naming Conventions pin des pad 30 Os 10 Os s0 Qa 3 B 1 C 6 D 4 E 5 F 2 pattern component Therefore the pad numbers are irrelevant except for the purpose of assigning pin designators Regardless of the numbering the pin designator assignments in this example are as follows Q g D Q B E C p This is analogous for Schematic symbol pin numbers Pattern
215. he following figure Library Browse Pattern Library Executive User s Guide 65 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Working with Pattern Files 3 Selecta pattern from the list e g DIP14 and click OK The pattern is loaded into Pattern Editor When a pattern is loaded from a library the library and pattern name appear in the title bar P CAD 2000 Pattern Editor Modfax0 DIP14 Primary i Pattem Edit View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help s oee Hae ma ose amp e e m gm ps X gt Click Left to single Select lt Ctri gt lt Left gt for multiple or drag for block select Notice that the pattern name and source library appear in the title bar even though this pattern has not been saved as a pat file Saving a Pattern to a Library Once you have created a pattern you can save it to a library after it has been validated 1 Choose Utils Validate If your pattern fails validation an error message appears For a list of error messages see Appendix B System Messages page 275 2 Choose Pattern Save or Pattern Save As The Pattern Save To Library dialog opens Pattern Save To Library i C Program Files P CAD 2001 Demo Demo lib Pattern Match Default Pin Des to Pad Numbers TT Create Component Component Cancel OK Fe 66 Library Executive User s Guide Pattern Attributes Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor 3 Select the library
216. he Allow Duplicates command sorts the field values grouping duplicate values together If you want unique field values use the Resolve Duplicates command The suffixes 1 2 3 etc are added to the end of repeated values The Resolve Duplicates command may be preferred for example when sorting the ComponentName field since P CAD requires a unique name for each component The Resolve Duplicates command is available only for fields with data type String Row Commands The Row commands are available when a row is selected from the Query Result Viewer either from the Row menu or the shortcut menu With the Row commands you can remove the component in the selected row You can place a component in a P CAD PCB or Schematic design You can also open a component to view its component information Command Description Delete Removes the currently selected row component from the Query Result Viewer Places the selected component in a running PCB or Schematic design Makes the program current with the Place Part or Place Component dialog open and the component selected Open Opens the Component Information dialog Library Executive User s Guide 115 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Query Results The Open command is only available if the row contains the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary field The Place command requires the row represents a valid component with an attached symbol or pattern For more i
217. he Source Browser 1 Select the component from the Source Browser tree 2 While PCB or Schematic is running choose the Place command 3 Select the desired application PCB or Schematic For more information about placing components in a P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic design see Component Placement page 163 Library Executive User s Guide 101 CHAPTER 8 Querying Libraries Using Query With P CAD Library Executive you can search for components using a wide variety of search criteria For example you may be searching for a component with a prescribed functionality that is available at a low price In Library Executive you simply specify these criteria in an easy to use spreadsheet form and a list of the ideal component s appears You can query P CAD libraries or library sets an external source file like the corporate component database or another query result to narrow your component search by additional criteria A query result can be used to update or create a P CAD library It can also be used to verify component data sources finding differences between a library and a select set of components This chapter details how to use the Library Executive Query Fields and Data Types To both search and enter data into P CAD Library Executive it is useful to understand the commonly used component attributes or fields and how they are stored in memory This section discusses both the fields that are immediately recognized b
218. he Update Design option button you can choose to update the design s component attributes with values from one open library Two options are available in the Design Verification dialog to allow you to select which open library is used to update the component attributes e Using selected libraries If the Using selected libraries option button is selected the design verifier uses the selections made in the Open Libraries list to determine the library used to update the component attributes If more than one library is selected then the first occurrence of the component found is used for the design update The libraries are searched in order from top to bottom of the list Click the Library Setup button to add delete or rearrange the libraries in the Open Libraries list e Using matching libraries If the Using matching libraries option button is selected then the check boxes in the Open Libraries list do not apply Components in the design with the ComponentLibrary attribute matching the name of one of the open libraries are updated These options are available only if the Update Design option button is selected Library Executive User s Guide 143 CHAPTER 1 1 Reports With P CAD Library Executive there are multiple reporting options and enhancements These enhancements span the P CAD products PCB Schematic and Library Executive From P CAD Library Executive two report options are available the basic source component reporting fea
219. he destination library as a name prefix Each symbol in a translated library is assigned a unique symbol name as follows DESTLIB XX A where DESTLIB is the name of the destination library XX is a unique number and A equals N ormal EEE or D eMorgan Tango PCB and Schematic When all your pattern and symbol libraries have been converted to P CAD format choose Library Merge Pattern to merge pattern and symbol libraries into integrated pattern symbol component libraries which can be used by all P CAD applications In this example merge accpcb1 1lib and accpcb2 lib into proschl lib 1 Choose library Merge Patterns to display the following dialog 194 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Library Merge Patterns r Source Libraries Add Library Merge Remove Library Close 2j r Destination Library C PC4D2001 DEMO PROSCH1 LIB 2 Click the Add Library button to display the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose libraries containing patterns The library names you add appear in the Source Libraries box You need to select all the pattern libraries that contain the patterns referenced in all components in the destination library In this example choose accpcb1 1ib and accpcb2 1lib 3 Click the Destination Library button to display the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose o
220. he steps used to translate a Master Designer PDIF PCB library or Master Designer PDIF Schematic library into a P CAD library Once translated you may merge the resulting P CAD libraries into a single P CAD integrated library Translating PCB and Schematic Libraries 1 Choose library Translate to open the Library Translate dialog Library Translate Source Library CAPCAD2001 DEMO DEMO LIB C PCAD2001 DEMO SOURCE1 LIB Source Format Destination Format C TangoPRO Binary P CAD Binary C TangoPRO ASCII C P CADASCI C P CAD Binary C P CAD ASCII Tango Schematic DOS C Tango PCB DOS C PDIF Translate Close 2 Select the PDIF check box as the Source Format type When PDIF is selected additional options appear in the Library Translate dialog 272 Library Executive User s Guide Translating Master Designer PDIF Libraries Appendix A Importing Master Designer Libraries Library Translate PDIF Cross Reference no file selected Pin to Padstack Map no file selected Source Library no library selected Destination Library no library selected Source Format j Destination Format C TangoPRO Binary P CAD Binary C TangoPRO ASCII C E GADASGII C P CAD Binary C P CAD ASCII C Tango Schematic DOS Graphics Scale 79 Sn C Tango PCB DOS Text Scale 76 100 00 con 3 Ifyou are using a cross refer
221. hed Pattern Section or Attached Symbol Section is selected the patterns and symbols published are those attached to the selected component s Generating the Report Output You can generate the published library by clicking OK in the Library Publisher dialog after having specified the Library Publisher output filenames sections formatting and item selection Microsoft Word 97 works in the background to generate a published library document of the specified name Open the document in Word to view make changes or to print To open the document you can select the file name in the recently used file list on Word s File menu If you run Word in the foreground after the Library Publisher has been started be careful not to quit the Word application Exiting Word before Library Publisher has finished will halt the publishing process Library Executive User s Guide Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic Chapter 11 Reports Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic The File Reports dialogs of P CAD PCB and P CAD Schematic provide enhanced capabilities for the Bill of Materials report when P CAD Library Executive is installed The BOM report may be customized to include selected component attributes including component attributes from an external source file The File Reports dialog provides the initial entry to the Custom Report feature and appears File Reports M ttributes atr MBill of Materials bom Glob
222. hickness lt 0 65 mm pitch 4 uon c Ultra thin profile 1 0 mm body thickness Library Executive User s Guide 53 Chapter 4 Libraries Pattern Library Naming Conventions 2 Terminal Pin Position Seating plane is the bottom of the package Designator Description A Axial Terminals extend from both ends in the direction of the major axis of a cylindrical or elliptical package B Bottom Terminals extend from the bottom of the package Dual Terminals are on opposite sides of a square or rectangular package or located in two parallel rows P Perpendicular Terminals are perpendicular to seating plane on a square or rectangular package Restrict to PGA family Q Quad Terminals are on the four sides of a square or rectangular package or located in four parallel rows Single Terminals are on one surface of a square or rectangular package in a single row Z Zig zag Terminals are on one surface of a square or rectangular package arranged in a staggered configuration 3 Package Outline Style Designator Description AB Axial Bipolar Capacitor CAN Can CC Chip Carrier CY Cylinder or Can DO Diode Outline FM Flange Mount FP Flatpack GA Grid Array IL In Line Package IP In Line Package Restrict to DIP SIP ZIP LF Long Form Horizontal Package MELF Metal Electrode Face PM Post Stud Mount RB Radial Bipolar Cap
223. hoose a library file and click Open the Library Browse dialog opens Library Browse Symbol DISCRETE 52 N DISCRETE 231 N RES1200 SHTINX SHTOUTX SYMBOLI1_N SYMBOL2_N SYMBOL4_N Library Executive User s Guide 81 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor 82 Working with Symbol Files Select a symbol from the list e g T 7400 and click OK The symbol is loaded into Symbol Editor When a symbol is loaded from a library the library and symbol name appear in the title bar The symbol name and source library appear in the title bar even though this symbol has not been saved asa sym file P CAD 2001 Symbol Editor Demo T 7400 of Symbol Edit View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help js xJ Pe fs lee HeH els prole NI A A B S E eTUes kel 4 Click Left to single Select Cii Lefbo for multiple or drag for block select Type 5000 0 fasoo o aes roo z M snee zT froomir Saving a Symbol to a Library Once a symbol is created you can save it to a library after it has been validated 1 Choose Utils Validate If your symbol fails validation an error message appears For a list of error messages see Appendix B System Messages page 275 Choose Symbol Save to open the Symbol Save To Library dialog shown below Symbol Save To Library Library D Program
224. i Gate components use the same matching criteria used for single gate components except the gate number is used in conjunction with the matching criteria and is not overwritten unless the gate numbering can not be determined View Source Browser The View Source Browser command opens the Source Browser shown in the following figure Source Browser G x s M DEFAULT LIBRARY SET p C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib aD CAPCAD2001 Demo Source lib C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp bet M Myset B 3 0 CAPCAD2001 Demo Demo lib t A Components iE Patterns Symbols D CAPCAD2001XDemo Sourcel lib From the Source Browser all data sources available in Library Executive can be accessed including P CAD libraries and library sets query results cross link results and an imported external source file Refer to The Source Browser page 91 for details on the Source Browser and its function View Comma separated File The View Comma separated File command opens the Viewer containing the imported external source file 260 Library Executive User s Guide View Toolbar Chapter 20 View Commands Viewer CAPCAD2001YTutorialVAle mrp txt Table Column Row 1 CAP300 CAP300 65753 Capacitor 2 CAP300 CAP300 90956 Radial Polar 3 CAP350 CAP350 14357 Capacitor 4 CAP400 CAP400 65775 Axial Polariz 5 CAP700 CAP700 80754 Axial Polariz amp CAP800 CAP800 4362 Axial Polariz 7 CAP100 CAPI00 4759 Axial Polariz 8 CAPI20 CAP120
225. ibrary Browse dialog Select an item to display it in the item list of the Library Rename dialog In the New Name box type the new name of your item Click Rename Both the old name and new name disappear if the rename action is successful You can continue renaming items in the same library by following steps 3 through 5 Click Close to exit the dialog If you click Close before Rename then the dialog closes and ignores the pending rename Library Translate Translates libraries in the following formats into P CAD binary and ASCII formatted libraries 220 P CAD Binary P CAD ASCII TangoPRO Binary TangoPRO ASCII Tango Schematic DOS Library Executive User s Guide Library Translate Chapter 15 Library Commands Tango PCB DOS PDIF P CAD uses one integrated library that contains components symbols and patterns These integrated libraries are used by all P CAD applications PCB makes certain checks when components are added to a PCB design In particular the symbols pattern and pin attributes like gate equivalence found in the library for a component are compared to those for any components of the same type already present in the design If the components are not the same PCB reports that the components do not match and does not allow you to add the component to the design The following recommendations should be considered when adding components PCB designs created using previous versions of P CAD PCB or P CAD PCB 6 4
226. ick DELETE to eliminate the original library Quantity values The updated attribute values are in the file Viewer and ready to be saved 9 Update the library from the new Cross Link results by choosing the Save to Library command The cross link result of step 1 contains all the information of the library updated with the map file contents The two are interchangeable If you choose to update your library with the Part Number then in step 3 cross link with the updated library If you choose not to update your library with the Part Number then in step 3 cross link with the map file cross link result The only fundamental difference between the two methods is that saving the index identifier to the library saves you a step in subsequent import processes Lesson 4 Using Query to Selectively Update a Library Query is a particularly useful tool when updating a library from an external source file With Query you can select components with particular characteristics to update For instance you could choose to update only components made by a particular vendor Or you could choose to update components modified after the date you last updated the library You can choose to query and update from any source in Library Executive an external source a query result a cross link result or a P CAD library In this lesson you will be updating components that are produced by a particular vendor This vendor has just changed its component prices so the Co
227. idden power and ground pins that are associated with pads 7 and 14 respectively 5 Let s shift the pin information in rows 7 through 12 down one row to make room for the hidden power pin data to be filled in later Select the information associated with gates 3 and 4 as shown below Library Executive User s Guide 33 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial 34 Pins View ioj x Component Info Pattern View Symbol View Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Creating a New Component 6 To quickly move the selected cells down to allow room to add power pin information for pin number 7 click the Shift Down button frs on the Library Executive main toolbar to move the selected data down one row Pins View ioj xj Pattern View Symbol View Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown Unknown 7 The Sym Pin Symbol Pin Number is the number of the corresponding pin on the attached symbol Now we will map the Symbol Pin to the physical Pin Designators based on specifications found in the manufacturer s data book Gne Sm Pr MN mNMAaaa 9M wN The Sym Pin information added automatically is only half correct Delete the Sym Pin data for pins 8 to 13 by selecting them and pressing the Delete key Type in the new values as shown right You can type directly in a highlighted cell or highlight the edit box at the top of the window and type in information To enter the data
228. ile and updated as the external source file changes You can also use query results or cross link results to create or update libraries To create or update libraries from the Source Browser select the external source file cross link result or query result from the Source Browser tree and choose the Save To Library command Verify P CAD Library Executive supports four consistency verifications from the Source Browser e Between a P CAD library or library set and another P CAD library or library set e Between an external source file and a P CAD library or library set e Between a Query Result and a P CAD library or library set e Between a Cross Link Result and a P CAD library or library set A difference report file is generated from the Source Browser tree by selecting a P CAD library or library set the external source file a cross link result or a query result and choosing the Verify command For more information on verification see Library Verification page 137 Library Executive User s Guide Accessing Other Features Chapter 7 The Source Browser Reports To generate a report using a P CAD library an external source file a cross link result or a query result from the Source Browser select the item from the Source Browser tree and choose the Report command For additional information about generating reports refer to Reports page 145 Component Placement To place components into P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic from t
229. ils The Pattern Format button is also available Click the Pattern Format button to select the contents of this section including pattern name attribute table a picture of the pattern etc Refer to Format Options page 149 for additional details 7 Selectthe Symbol Section check box if you want to include a report on the symbols in the selected P CAD library in the publisher output When this check box is selected the Select Symbols button becomes available allowing you to select the symbols included in this section All selected symbols from the library are included whether or not they are attached to any library components Refer to Format Options page 149 for additional details The Symbol Format button is also available Click the Symbol Format button to select the contents of this section including symbol name attribute table a picture of the symbol etc Refer to Format Options page 149 for additional details 8 When all options have been specified as desired click OK The published document includes a report on the specified library with the selected sections items and formatting options Microsoft Word 97 works in the background to generate a published library document of the specified name Open the document in Word to view to make changes or to print To open the document you can select the file name in the recently used file list on Word s File menu Format Options If you choose to include a section
230. in your P CAD libraries These imported attributes can be included in your Bill of Materials report directly from the File Report command in both P CAD PCB and Schematic The imported file must be in a simple separated list format If your external source file contains the ComponentName field refer to Importing a Source File with a ComponentName page 160 This field is essential for P CAD libraries since it is used as the basis for both search and placement of all library components in all P CAD products With the ComponentName in your external file component attributes in the file are easily associated with their appropriate component for the Bill of Materials report Many external component databases are organized without a unique component name For example the attribute Part Number may be the index that labels and identifies individual components If your external source file does not contain the ComponentName field an additional file called a map file is needed to match the imported attributes with their associated components Importing attributes from an external file without the ComponentName is discussed in Linking with a Map File page 161 Importing a Source File with a ComponentName If the imported source file contains the ComponentName field then the attributes are automatically linked with their corresponding component in your P CAD library In this case follow these steps to generate a Bill of Materials with imported compo
231. in your published output by selecting its check box you can modify the contents of the section by clicking its corresponding format button The format options available for each output section are detailed in Library Format Options page 150 Library Publisher uses Word s Normal dot template as a basis for the published output To select the font type font size and page layout for the published library modify your Normal dot template accordingly Library Executive User s Guide 149 Chapter 11 Reports Publishing a P CAD Library Library Format Options When including the Library Section click the Library Format button to open the Library Format Options dialog Iv File Name Set All Iv Fie Date amp Time Clear Al Iv File Size v Number of Components v Number of Patterns M Number of Symbols I List of Component Name IV List of Pattern Names IV List of Symbol Names This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the library section by selecting each option s check box When all desired library format options are selected click Done The selected options are saved and you are returned to the Library Publisher dialog For details about the Library Format options refer to Library Commands page 211 Component Format Options When including the Component Section click the Component Format button to open the Component Format Options dialog Component Format Options x IV Component Name Set All v RefDes Pref
232. ion about Query Cross Link Verify Report and Save To Library commands applied to the imported file see Using the Imported Source File page 134 Library Executive User s Guide Viewer Menu Commands Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Column Commands The Column commands are available from the Column menu and the shortcut menu when a column is selected in the Viewer These commands allow you to add remove and sort the columns of fields and their values Command Description Add Adds a column to the Viewer to the left of the currently selected column Opens a dialog where you can choose a new field name Removes the currently selected column from the Viewer Opens a dialog where you can specify a new name for the currently selected column Two methods are available to sort columns Allow Duplicates and Resolve Duplicates The Allow Duplicates command sorts the field values grouping duplicate values together The Resolve Duplicates command sorts the fields uniquely The suffixes 1 2 3 etc are added to the end of repeated values The Resolve Duplicates command may be preferred when sorting the ComponentName field since P CAD requires a unique name for each component The Resolve Duplicates command is available only for fields with data type String There is a different sorting method for String and Integer data types The default data type String is always used when saving attributes to a P
233. ions such as query and verify directly on a library set by choosing the Library Setup command You can organize and manage library file names and library sets in the Library Setup dialog Library Setup x Library Sets Libraries Sets Members Add Set CA ASourcel lib Add Library DEFAULT LIBRARY SET CAPCAD2001XDemolDemo lib Delete Remove Rename Library Executive User s Guide 211 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Alias The Library Setup dialog allows you to define the libraries contained within a library set e Library Sets frame Lists the presently defined library sets Selecting a library set from the Library Sets list displays the libraries contained in the set in the Members list Within the Library Sets frame the following activities are available e Add Set Allows you to specify the name of a new library set e Delete Deletes the selected library set Deleting a set removes the set and the libraries it contains e Rename Allows you to rename the selected library set e Members frame Displays the libraries that are contained within a selected library set Within the Members frame the following activities are available e Add Library Adds a library to the selected set e Remove Removes the selected library from the library set To be usable in P CAD Library Executive all available libraries must be in one or more library sets A default library set called DEFA
234. isn t swappable See the Utils Optimize Nets command section in the P CAD PCB User s Guide for information on swapping gates e Pin Eq Indicates which pins within a gate are logically equivalent and may be swapped by choosing the Utils Optimize Nets pin swap command The pin equivalence values must be identical for a swap to occur between two pins Non swappable pins are indicated with a zero value Jumper pins are listed as JMP n where all pins with the same n value are considered jumpered together A JMP1 jumpered pin is displayed as JMP e Elec Type The type of pin Options appear in a shortcut menu described in Electrical Pin Types page 11 If a cell is blank it has a value of zero or an electrical type of Unknown Electrical Pin Types The Elec Type cells are a combination of edit box and list Click in the cell to select it and then click the Down Arrow next to the box at the top of the window to display a list of electrical pin types Select the pin type you want from the list and it changes in the cell Library Executive User s Guide 11 Chapter 2 Library Basics About the Spreadsheet Views Unknown Passive Input Bidirectional Dpen H Dpen L Passive H Passive L 3 State Power You can also access electrical types by typing the first letter of a given type Where more than one type begins with the same letter e g Passive H and Passive L pressing the letter scrolls through the types Spreadsheet Edi
235. it Commands Edit Component Attribute 254 Text Style The attribute text style Rotation Shows the rotation amount if the pattern has been rotated Flipped This check box indicates whether or not the pattern has been flipped Justification Shows the reference point of the text string For example if the middle button is enabled the text reference point the lower left corner moves to the center of the bounding rectangle Attributes and Their Values The values given to Attributes become part of a design whenever the component is placed there The following rules dictate which value is used when a component is placed in a PCB or Schematic design If a component attribute has a value that value is used when the component is placed in either a PCB or Schematic design If a component attribute has no value but the same named attribute in the pattern has a value the pattern attribute s value is placed in a PCB design If a component attribute has no value but the same named attribute in the symbol has a value the symbol attribute s value is placed in a Schematic design Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 20 View Commands The View commands allow you to access the four modeless dialogs that provide different views of the current component Additional view commands let you show or hide the toolbar and prompt line areas The details of these features are provided below View Component Info The View Component Info comma
236. ited www altium com Table of Contents chapter1 Introduction to the Library Executive User s Guide About this Manual reete tende ee ei Tete deed cee 1 Installation and Setup I eeepc tee thi ee RD qose grin Dre Love teste o Eee Ea scone 2 System Requirements a r e e aA aa EAE EAE aa ne netr nn aA ana enn 2 Installing P CAD Producls itii iei eiai aeaeaei iiaa 2 chapter 2 Library Basics User Interface eret er en ses exe e e Haee ev vies bus e ev Tov a Vr e Ev ev V ve ee eh WE QE ec n 3 Menu Barenn nocet te a cvecen eri devoret Duvet t ro E Fe p Pe PEEL anaes Ca er v FRE ee 3 Toolbars ceo ce ot nan mo ferta Miet me un idi tr ON E E 3 Gustom Toolbalz ss endet i Poeti a es ca cba te oce ee is age o obtu Lee 5 Prompt Ines 3 ee er e eet rt RE he rao ute RR SEE FEN neces eden eo edes 5 Library Executive Layo Ut 2 eterne ee edet rete Dee tere ene eon 5 About the Spreadsheet Views eese eene rina anni 10 Spreadsheet Columns ccccccccececcecceceeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeeeeaaeaeceeeseseeeaeaeceeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeees 11 Spreadsheet Editing a a e a a aE e Tae a a e a E aa ae are ee aE ETES neS 12 Resizing Spreadsheet Views sssssssesse een eene rne 14 Menu Comtnalrids oreet corn atr het imtee e LEE te ntes te b du at DEP REA d AN 15 Viewer Menu Commands 5 derer mc too p ete decree seh Pe ET dep Ee CER a CE Ed 15 Table Gommands 5cnceti rtt preterea er eee rtv eve t eit yeu e
237. ited text file that contains two columns the primary key ComponentName and the database index identifier Part Number This map file is used to enter the Part Number attribute into the appropriate library component s attributes Ale_map txt Notepad OI x File Edit Search Help ComponentName Part Number CAP366 2387 04 CAP3G6RP 2387 65 CAP356 238766 CAP466 239767 CAP4EGAP 2387 68 P CAD Library File The remaining sample file is a P CAD library This library contains many of the same components found within the sample MRP databases These library components are complete and integrated with an attached pattern attached symbol and electrical information e Ale tutor lib This file is a P CAD library containing the components referenced in the external source file Viewer C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Table Column Row _ PamponentNamd Alias Componentlibrary ComponentType NumberOiPads NumberofFins Go 2 Not CAPCAD2001 Tutoriali Normal Not CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Normal Not CAPCAD2001XTutorial Normal Not C PCAD2001 Tutorial Normal Not CAPCAD2001YXTutorial Normal Lesson 1 Importing and Updating a Library from an MRP File This section illustrates the process of importing component data from a non P CAD source It shows the initial comma delimited source file importing and field mapping The imported data will then be used to update the library Ale tutor lib In this less
238. ive toolbar or choose View Source Browser Library Executive User s Guide 93 Chapter 7 The Source Browser The Source Browser Interface The Source Browser dialog displays information in a tree structure or hierarchy You can browse the tree to view its contents The source files in the Source Browser can be a library set a library an external source file a query result or a cross link result Right mouse clicking on a selected item in the tree opens the Library Executive shortcut command menu Refer to Source Browser Commands page 92 and Accessing Other Features page 99 for additional information Source Browser olx Sources M DEFAULT LIBRARY SET ae C 4ccell3 1 TUTORIALle_tutor lib ge C M4ccell3 1 DEMO Demo lib C Accell 3 1 TUTORIAL VAle mrp tst EE Query Result 1 mI p C N4ccell3 1 DEMO smlllib p C Mccell3 1 DEMO smi2 lib a Components Eb CAP300 E capsooaP Eb RES400 ME Patterns i Symbols The tree structure allows you to view all Library Executive source files and their contents at various levels of detail using the following commands and functions e Groupings containing collapsed levels are shown with a sign To expand the grouping simply click the sign Expanded groupings are shown with a sign To collapse the grouping simply click the sign e To refresh the Source Browser contents collapse the tree from the modified level For example when a component is removed from a librar
239. ix p Clear All Number of Pins IV Homogeneous v Gate Numbering IV Number of Gates IV Attached Pattern Name I List of Alias Names V Gate Table Iv Pin Table M Attribute Table This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the component section by selecting each option s check box 150 Library Executive User s Guide Publishing a P CAD Library Chapter 11 Reports When all desired component format options are selected click Done The selected options are saved and you are returned to the Library Publisher dialog For details about the Component Format options refer to Library Commands page 211 Pattern Format Options When including a Pattern Section in your published library click the Pattern Format button to open the Pattern Format Options dialog Pattern Format Options Lx Iv Pattern Name Set All IV Number of Pads Clear Al IV Bounding Rectangle Size I List of Pad Styles IV List of Comp References v List of Alias Names v Attribute Table v Picture of Pattern 10000m Min 0000in Max This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the pattern section by selecting each option s check box The pattern section check box can be selected in two locations If you select the Attached Pattern Section check box within the Component Section the pattern section will directly follow the component section of the component to which it is attached If you select the Pattern Section
240. jects The default data type String is always used when these attributes are saved Read only attributes are unmodifiable and cannot be saved to a P CAD library There is one exception to this rule when a new library is created the read only ComponentName field can be saved Complete integrated components can be created in this new library Read only attributes are displayed in red on the library Viewer and Query Result Table Setting up a Library Set This section illustrates the process of setting up a library set MYSET will contain the following libraries Demo lib and Ale tutor lib These libraries can be found in the Demo and Tutorial folders in the P CAD installation directory respectively To make the Demo 1iband Ale tutor lib libraries available for Library Executive you can define a library set containing the two libraries You can define the library set from the Source Browser or from the Library Setup dialog To use the Library Setup dialog follow these steps 1 Choose Library Setup to open the Library Setup dialog Library Setup x r Library Sets r Libraries Sets Members DEFAULT LIBRARY SET nem CA Me tutor lib 17 8 MYSET C PCAD2001 Demo Demo lib il z Delete Remove Rename Close 2 Click the Add Set button An edit box appears in the Library Sets box Type MYSET into the edit box to define your new library set Press ENTER 4 While MYSET is selected click the Add Lib
241. l Editor 265 QELY Li esee e eI EE ETS 263 ShortcutDirectory sess 264 Validate Component command 243 verification Of a desIBI cette ees 141 report 140 set up sesess wee 139 updating a design ees 143 Verify accessing from Source Browser 100 Verify dialog seen 139 Verify File command s 207 VerifyDate 47 140 SEACH 4 terere eror Hee ee 110 verifying an imported file 134 View Commands Character delimited File 260 Component Info Custom Toolbar Pattern View Pins View Prompt Line Source Browser Symbol View TOO DAR ss aite Viewer Column commands dialog lt a menu commands Query Results Row commands Table commands s viewing an imported file 135 Web Site Access 264 Library Executive User s Guide
242. l information refer to the View Commands chapter Click the Pattern View button From this dialog you can attach a pattern to the component To create a new pattern or edit an existing pattern click Edit Pattern The Pattern Editor appears To select an existing pattern click Select Pattern Click the Symbol View button From this dialog you can attach a symbol to the component To create a new symbol or edit an existing symbol click Edit Symbol The Symbol Editor appears To select an existing symbol click Select Symbol Return to the Component Information dialog to complete the integrated component Completion includes attaching the pattern and symbol adding component properties and editing the pins view spreadsheet to designate the component s electrical information Validate and save the component to a P CAD library by clicking the Validate button on the toolbar Then when no errors are found choose the Component Save command to save the component This command saves the pattern symbol and electrical information as well as all of the user defined attributes included in the imported MRP source Repeat from step 2 for all components in the source Converting Libraries Working with External Libraries Unlike Tango Schematic and Tango PCB which use separate symbol and pattern libraries P CAD applications use integrated libraries which contain components symbols and patterns To use your Tango pattern and symbol libra
243. l system to find the best PCB design at the lowest cost What Can Be Imported Any component library or component database can be imported into Library Executive For example you may have a corporate component database that changes regularly to reflect the variable inventory and cost of components This component database can be easily imported into P CAD updated regularly and searched for the optimal component to place in a design Before importing component data or a component library from a non P CAD source it must be converted to a simple ASCII file format The character delimited ASCII file understood by Library Executive is a basic inclusive format that can be created from any component database Most spreadsheet applications allow you to output an ASCII file containing the spreadsheet data in a character delimited file format See Character Separated File Format page 121 for details Character Separated File Format There are two different but closely related character delimited file formats that can be imported into Library Executive The difference between the two is solely on the file s first line The first line can contain one of the following e A list of character separated field names e Alistof character separated field values with no field name headers Library Executive User s Guide 121 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source What Can Be Imported 122 In the first format line 1 contains a list of
244. l using Symbol New to open the Symbol Wizard P CAD 2001 Symbol Editor Untitled2 Oj x Symbol Edit View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help s oleju e ex amp vjalels 400 0mil Symbol width 1000mi Pin Spacing 2 Number Pins Left 1 Number Pins Right I Symbol Outline ER oom j Line width Pin Name Iv PinDes Default Pin Name Default Pin Designator 1 il Current Pin Number iRefDes MIG mxLZ Click Left to single Select Ctrl Left for multiple or drag for block select fuos emo aeuo paeem I cli 2 Fillin the fields as illustrated above with a Symbol Width of 400 mil Pin Spacing of 100 mil 2 pins left 1 pin right and Symbol Outline Pin Name and Pin Des selected to display 3 Click Finish to close the Symbol Wizard The Symbol Editor is now displayed in which you can modify the new symbol if necessary Library Executive User s Guide 23 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial 24 Creating a New Symbol P CAD 2001 Symbol Editor Untitled2 ioj x Symbol Edi View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help s n s m amp Hek m amp v eje Untitled2 fRefDes EAIA AR Click Left to single Select Ctrl Left for multiple or drag for block select soo emo p A e a 4 Choose Options Display to turn off a pin display option Click on the Misc
245. lds to Cross Link Select Target Library Set To Cross Link All Libraries E DEFAULT_LIBRARY_SET C PCAD2001 Tutori e tutor lib Query Result 1 CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_crosslink tet Cross Link Result 1 In the Select Source Fields to Cross Link box select the box to the left of the Part Number field name In the Select Target Library Set to Cross Link box select the library Ale tutor lib file under DEFAULT_LIBRARY_SET Click OK The Cross Link Result Viewer appears with the combination of the library and source file information for components with matching Part Number attributes Viewer Cross Link Result 19 Table Column Row n 32487 Pana 4218 Pana 40458 Pana 4244 Pless 3489 Pless 8766 Pless 1279 Pless 8743 CTS 200481 CTS 54843 CTS 65438 CTS 7000 CTS 23511 CTS 65943 CTS 13083 CTS 35081 Yage 456892 Yage 97561 Yage 54324 Yage 44571 Yage CAP300 CAP450 CAP500 CAPS5004P CAP1000AP CAP1200AP POLCAP RES6SIPISOL RES DIPISOL RESBDIPISOL RES10SIPDT RES14DIPB RES14DIPDT RES14DIPI RES16DIPB RES400 RES850 RES300 RES1200 RES1300 lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not lt Not Not Not Not CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CA PCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CAPCAD2001 Tuto CA PCAD2001 Tuto
246. lect Symbols rre er i REPREHEN ERR PREND ERR IRR IER 250 Edit Select Pattern rio eee kanng e re ane 251 Edit Component Attribute siosaia eco Henne eddie due ted oie edes 252 Attrib te Property Dialog 2 tttm onte indita E Ete 0n 253 Attributes and Their Values nnnm trennen teh 254 View Commands View Component Info evel eee e eee ede dece i tege el ee Eee ere 255 milf bets aban iechs rea et a Eva annee saves N N a Na 256 Gales es sete cts sees entere enata Pesos cse E cetus eto meras nA Sce c Lose om D LLL t 256 MIew PINS VIQW 5 cte teret Remb eee ete e ee teer et dede du eee Redes cp eR REESE 256 View Pattern m 257 Prev Pad Next Pad epe eee estert dad os teen re ea Dea Ee as 257 Pattern SelectloDi s uoi cete topi cn deel ye ae are SU ue cusa pipe qr PERO REND 258 Attaching a Pattern eene nennen ener enne nennen 258 View Symbol VIEW z 2 ett rper HTC iO T Pepe Re RO etr a Rr Ere 258 Prev Pin Next PiN eii M 259 Prev Sym Next Sym eie dette e a aaa a E n Aaa N ER N aaae 259 Symbol Selection irina a eq Rer Pe Le eee Do T a E aAA i 259 Attaching a Symbol rr ERERR RR E URP ERREUR RE HRRER ERR DU ERAI EHER 259 Library Executive User s Guide vii View Source BrOWSer ccccccceseecececececeessececececeseeaseeeeeeeseaueaseeeeeueauseeeeeeseeaeaaeeeeeeeseeaeaas 260 View Comma Separated File
247. lect Target Library Set To Cross Link Cmp Name E All Libraries Description p DEFAULT LIBRARY SET Pat Name C APCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib CQuantity CAPCAD2001 Demo Source lib CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp tet The Cross Link dialog allows you to specify the field used as the unique external source file index as well as the library or library set to which the source file is linked The Cross Link dialog contains the following options e Select Source Fields to Cross Link Lists the field names of the imported external source file e Select Target Library Set to Cross Link Contains a tree of all libraries available to P CAD Library Executive Using the Cross Link Command To cross link the imported field an initial association must be made between the unique index value s in the external source file and the corresponding components in the P CAD libraries The Cross Link command links the source files as they are in memory If changes have been made to a library used as the cross link source or target choose Reload to refresh the library components in Library Executive s memory before conducting the Cross Link To cross link the imported fields 1 Choose Cross Link from the Table menu of the Viewer to open the Cross Link dialog 202 Library Executive User s Guide File Cross Link Chapter 14 File Commands Cross Link C PCAD2001 Demo Source1 lib Select Source Fields to Cross Link Select Target Library Set To
248. lect the contents of this section including pattern name attribute table a picture of the pattern etc Refer to Formatting Options page 232 for additional details e Symbol Section Select the Symbol Section check box to include a report on the symbols in the selected library in the publisher output e The Select Symbols button becomes available allowing you to select the symbols included in this section All selected symbols from the library are included whether or not they are attached to any library components Refer to Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols page 154 for additional details e The Symbol Format button becomes available allowing you to select the contents of this section including symbol name attribute table a picture of the symbol etc Refer to Formatting Options page 232 for additional details Formatting Options If you choose to include a section in your published output by selecting its check box you can modify the contents of the section by clicking its corresponding format button The format options available for each output section are detailed below Library Publisher uses Word s Normal dot template as a basis for the published output To select the font type font size and page layout for the published library modify your Normal dot template accordingly Library Format When including the Library Section you can click the Library Format button to open the Library Format Options dialog 232
249. library It will also list the components that have been placed in the design that are not found in the open libraries You can also use the Design Verification utility to update component attributes in your design For more information about updating your design using the Design Verification utility refer to Library Verification page 137 1 Inthe Design Verification dialog all predefined attributes are listed in the Library Properties Attributes box Leave all attribute check boxes in this list selected You will be verifying all component attributes In this case the library components that you are going to verify have no additional user defined attributes If the library had additional attributes that you wanted to include in the difference report you would click Scan to add them to the list Design components are verified against all open libraries in the Open Libraries list The Design Verification dialog appears Design Verification x Library Properties Attributes Sc oOpenLibreries AlphaNumeric E v ComponentHeight ziComponentLibrary WiComponentType Description EHaslEEE Homogeneous MLink viNoSwap a MNumberOfPads MNumberOfParts NumberOfPins MPackageOutlineLayer Part Number zl ReportFile jreporttt T Update Design F View Report b E Uibraties Close Library Setup 2 Type the report file name in the box and select the View Report check box 188 Library Executive
250. library files e Cut Removes any selected component row from the Viewer and moves it to the Clipboard e Copy Copies any selected item from the Viewer onto the Clipboard e Paste Pastes items from the Clipboard onto the Viewer e Map Fields Opens the Map Fields dialog where you can map the field names imported from an external source file to field names recognized by P CAD Library Executive e Cross Link Opens the Cross Link dialog where you can link component attributes in the selected file with their corresponding components in another source The Cross Link Results Viewer displays a combination of the attributes in the two source files for the linked components e Query Opens the Query dialog where you can narrow the component list of the imported library by including search criteria Library Executive User s Guide 15 Chapter 2 Library Basics Menu Commands e Verify Opens the Verify dialog where you can compare the components in the Viewer with components in a design or library e Report Opens the Report dialog where you can set up and generate a report on the components included in the Viewer e Save to Library Opens the Save Source dialog where you can save components in the Viewer to a P CAD library e Close Closes the Viewer The Verify and Save to Library commands are only available if the primary field ComponentName is present Column Commands The Column commands for a selected column are available from th
251. ll be updated in the library are listed in the Attribute Conflict Resolution section For Part Number select Source and then click OK to apply the update The Part Number and the ComponentName are now linked This allows you to reference data by the ComponentName or the Part Number fields Click OK The library has been updated to reflect the new PartNumber attribute value Step 3 Importing an MRP without a ComponentName Once the Part Number has been added to the sample library you never have to repeat the above step again The library components are now associated with the Part Number index of the company database From here on out to import the MRP sample file without a ComponentName you can start with the step you just completed The Ale crosslink txt file is a comma delimited external source file This sample file has been generated from a component database and includes the following attributes Part Number Vendor Quantity and Cost Note that there is no ComponentName field The Part Number which was added to the library in the step above will be used from this point forward to reference the library components Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import the map file by following these steps 1 Choose File Import to open the Import Separated List File dialog Import Separated List File x C A PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_crosslink tt First line c
252. lls the spreadsheet one page down If the spreadsheet is only one page scrolls to the bottom of the page 20 Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Library Executive Tutorial Welcome to the P CAD Library Executive tutorial In this chapter we will be investigating how to create libraries and components from scratch as well as how to use the Symbol and Pattern Editors After we have created a new symbol pattern and component we will have a quick look at the Source Browser In this tutorial we will create a symbol and pattern for a component which is based on the logical diagram of the 7400 below VEC GND RefDest When creating our new component we will follow these general steps mi TO 1 Create a new library or open an existing one in which to store the component Type RefDes 2 Create anew symbol e g NAND or use an existing P CAD supplied one which will represent the component parts in a Schematic design 3 Create a new pattern or use an existing P CAD supplied one e g DIP14 which will represent the component parts in a PCB design Library Executive User s Guide 21 Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Library 4 Createa new component complete with Pin View information which links the symbol pattern and component information together 5 Validate and save the component into a library For more information about the topics in this tutorial p
253. lt This section describes how and where to choose the Save To Library command to get the results you desire From the Source Browser 1 Select any library query result or external source file from the Source Browser tree 2 Choose Save to Library from the shortcut menu One of the following results occurs e Ifyou selecta library the components listed in that library are stored in the specified new P CAD library If modifications to that library were made while in Library Executive that same library can be updated with this command to reflect those changes e Ifyou select a query result the components listed in that Query Result table are stored or updated in the specified library e Ifyou select a cross link result the components listed in that Cross Link Result table are stored or updated in the specified library 46 Library Executive User s Guide Components Patterns and Symbols Chapter 4 Libraries e Ifyou select an external source file the components listed in the file Viewer are stored in the specified P CAD library Updates can be easily made to P CAD libraries from an external source file using this command making changes to your corporate component database easy to incorporate into your PCB designs From the Table Menu 1 Choose Save to Library from the Table menu in the Viewer for imported source files query results cross link results and P CAD libraries 2 The contents of the current table are saved to a lib
254. m link to a web address or open a document to display the referenced information Attribute Property Dialog The Attribute Property dialog similar to the Place Attribute dialog Attribute Properties x Attribute Category Name Name Description Value Octal BUFFERS and LINE DRIVERS with 3 State T ieitste Location TexSyle ossi zit EXE Rotation f0 0deg Justification LET sd E Flipped 4 CETE FERRE The Value field is the only field that can be edited for an existing attribute Information available in the Attribute Properties dialog includes e Category List Box Lists the attribute categories All Component Net Clearance Physical Electrical Placement Manufacturing Router and SPECCTRA e Name List Box Lists the pre defined attributes for the specified category The currently selected attribute also appears in the Name box unless User defined is selected In that case the Name box displays the user defined attribute name e Name Edit Box Displays the user defined name of the attribute e Value Enter a value for the attribute See Attributes and Their Values page 254 for an explanation of how component attribute values are placed in PCB and Schematic designs e Visible This check box indicates whether or not the attribute is visible e Location This frame shows the X and Y coordinates of the component s reference point Library Executive User s Guide 253 Chapter 19 Ed
255. m where instructions on how to use the help system are provided About P CAD Library Executive The About P CAD Library Executive command displays a screen that contains information about Library Executive including the product version number release date memory used and memory available Library Executive User s Guide 267 APPENDIX A Importing Master Designer Libraries This appendix discusses the differences between the Master Designer PDIF libraries and the P CAD libraries and lists the considerations for importing PDIF libraries You should read this section before importing any Master designer PDIF libraries PDIF Library Considerations This section discusses the differences between Master Designer PDIF libraries and P CAD libraries You may encounter some of these differences when translating Master Designer PDIF libraries Internal components All component information must reside in the Master Designer PDIF file External component references are not supported library file names Because a P CAD PCB library file and a P CAD Schematic library file may have the same name after translating to Master Designer PDIF be sure to place Master Designer PDIF Schematic libraries and Master Designer PDIF PCB libraries in separate directories Attached pattern names When translating a Master Designer PDIF Schematic library P CAD Library Executive takes the pattern name from the following sources listed in order of priority e the
256. made to row data are automatically updated in the Symbol View dialog View Pattern View The View Pattern View command opens the Pattern View dialog where you can assign pin data to a component Pattern View DIP14 Edit Pattern Component Info Pins View Symbol View G Gc S i Prev Pattern Graphic Next Pattern Graphic Current Pattern Graphics Primary Prev Pad Next Pad Pad t EE amp Ped Pindes Gate SymPin PinName GateEa PinEa v KIH gt JG Nec G Gc G The attached pattern appears in a browse window The Pattern View dialog may be resized to increase the display area of the browse window To expand the dialog vertically to display additional spreadsheet rows that may not be displayed press the SHIFT key while dragging an edge of the dialog to the left or right When a pad is selected in the browse window the following occurs e The pad is selected in the Pattern View browse window e The pad s corresponding pin is selected in the Symbol View browse window e The corresponding spreadsheet row is selected in the Pattern View and Symbol View dialogs e If pad numbers are missing from the rows or misnumbered the correspondence between rows and pads is not maintained Prev Pad Next Pad The Prev Pad and Next Pad buttons automatically select the next and previous pads The order of the pads is defined by the pad number sequence set during pattern creation
257. mber of pads in the ARRAY pattern Default Pin Designators For ARRAY patterns only Accesses the Default Pin Designator Assistant where you can designate the letters or numbers used as the beginning values for the Default Pin Des to name the rows and columns Specify the starting corner and choose the characters you want to skip when numbering Skipped characters can only be letters numbers cannot be skipped The characters chosen as the beginning of a row or column cannot be used as skipped characters and vice versa Silk Screen The silk screen may be turned on or off by selecting this check box Silk Line Width The line width used to create and display all silkscreen lines The value may be typed in the box using the appropriate mil or mm number Use the slide arrows to change the value up or down by 1 0mil or 0 10mm Use the SHIFT key with the slide arrows to increment the value by 0 1mil or 0 01mm Silk Rectangle Width The width of the silk screen for the pattern The value is measured from centerline to centerline The value may be typed in the box using the appropriate mil or mm number Use the slide arrows to change the value up or down by 25 0mil or 1 00mm Use the SHIFT key with the slide arrows to increment the value by 0 1mil or 0 01mm Silk Rectangle Height The height of the silk screen for the pattern The value is measured from centerline to centerline The value may be typed in the box using the appropriate mil or mm n
258. mbols it references must reside in the same library The following is an illustration of four components within a P CAD library all of which reference a DIP14 pattern Although not shown the same would hold true for components sharing symbols in Schematic QNX7 CUST1 SN7400N CUST2 DIP14 DIP14 DIP14 DIP14 DIP14 Renaming or deleting a pattern could have a profound impact on a library If you change the name of a DIP14 pattern to D14 for example the four components shown above would reference a nonexistent pattern The graphical pattern DIP14 only needs to be stored as one entity When you place a component the component locates the named pattern structure and imports it into the design along with the component information The same holds true for symbols A P CAD library could contain many components but only one pattern and one symbol and it would be complete as long as all the patterns and symbols that the components reference exist in the library It is likely that a library will have multiple components using the same patterns and symbols This saves space and makes global edits of a pattern or symbol efficient It is also potentially dangerous as any changes to a pattern or symbol affect all components referencing that pattern or symbol Component Types There are five component types Normal Power Sheet Connector Module and Link By specifying a component type you can properly associate the net con
259. ming Conventions Chapter 4 Libraries 1995 The system is based upon a minimum compulsory 2 to 4 letter code that describes the Package Outline Style Further optional characters are used to provide additional information such as the number of terminals and their position Seven fields are available for the assignment of a name to each pattern Pattern names of Chip Resistors Chip Capacitors and certain other packages do not follow this system The following fields make up the acronym for a pattern name 1 Features Package Specific Features 2 Position Terminal Position 3 Package Package Outline Style 4 Dimensions Major dimensions of package 5 Form Lead Form 6 Count Terminal Count 7 Supplementary Supplementary Information Examples TSSO6x14 G16 Thin Shrink TS Small Outline SO with package dimensions of 6 amp 14mm for the respective parameters of D amp H and 16 Gull G wing leads DIP 24 D31 24 pin Dual In Line Package with a silk screen length of 31mm for the dimension D 1 Package Specific Features nominal dimension Designator Description Bumpered Corner Bumpers present Employed with QFP family Ceramic Enlarged pitch 21 27 mm Fine pitch 20 50 mm Restrict to QFP family Low profile 1 4 mm body thickness Metal Rectangular Shrink pitch 20 65 mm All families except QFP Halaj ZIT majl Thin profile 1 0 mm body thickness Thin shrink 1 0 mm body t
260. mps if not present check box is selected the attributes CreateDate and ModifyDate are added to the component with the current date and time 6 The Attributes To Be Created box lists the attributes in the selected source All attributes in this list are saved to the specified library unless the corresponding check box in the Ignore column is selected 7 Click OK A new P CAD library has been created which contains the selected component attributes Updating an Existing Library To update an existing P CAD library follow these steps 1 Choose the Save to Library command Refer to Accessing the Save To Library Command page 46 for additional information The Save Source dialog appears Save Source Lx Source C A PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_mrp tt mapped Save Mode Create New C Update CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib F Greate new ampanents Jo Upsdete only components with metching library name Iv Create componenttime stamps if not present Attributes To Be Created L Attribute Name ignore r Description r 2 Select the Update option button 3 Enterthe desired library name in the box or click the Library button to navigate to and select the desired library The selected library name is now displayed If the Create new components box is selected components in the source that are not already in the selected library are added to the library Library Executive User s Guide 43 Chapter 4 Libr
261. n button if the first line of the separated list source file does not contain field name headers Default field names appear on the file Viewer List Separator Select from the list or enter the character you want to use as a delimiter in the List Separator box Comment Character Select from the list or enter the character you want to use as the Comment Character Importing a Separated List File To import a separated list file into P CAD Library Executive follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Choose File Import to open the Import Separated List File dialog Click Browse to navigate to and select the file containing the separated list file Click Open The name of the file to be imported is displayed next to the Browse button If the first line of the separated list file contains field names select the First line contains field names option button If the first line of the separated list file does not contain field names select the Generate default field names option button Default field names are attached to the imported data In both cases the imported field name headers must be mapped to field names recognized by P CAD in the second stage of the import process Click OK The Viewer dialog appears with the file contents in a spreadsheet format Library Executive User s Guide File Map Fields Chapter 14 File Commands File Map Fields When importing a separated list file from a non P CAD source the imported field names
262. n the pattern Bounding Rectangle Size The dimensions of the selection box surrounding the pattern graphics List of Pad Styles Lists all of the pad styles used in the current pattern List of Camp References A list of the component names in the current library that have this pattern attached List of Alias Names The alias names of equivalent patterns in the same library Attribute Table Lists the pattern attributes and their values Picture of Pattern frame Select this check box to include a picture of the pattern in the published output The Min Size and Max Size boxes become available where you can select the size range of the picture output Library Executive User s Guide 235 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Publisher 236 The minimum size sets the lower bound If the pattern is smaller than this minimum size it is enlarged The maximum size sets the upper bound If the pattern is larger than this maximum size it is reduced If the pattern picture is currently within the selected minimum maximum range it is fit to the next larger inch increment For example a picture with a bounding rectangle size of 4 21 inches would be fit to 4 5 inches The pattern pictures can be resized by selecting and modifying them in Word See your Microsoft Word 97 documentation for details Set All Selects all options e Clear All Clears all selected options e Done Saves the selected options and returns to the Lib
263. nal Source Cross Link CAPCAD2001YTutorialVAle map txt Select Source Fields to Cross Link Select Target Library Set To Cross Link jComponentName E All Libraries Part Number E MYSET CAPCAD2001 3DemoxDemo lib CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib E DEFAULT LIBRARY SET CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Query Result 1 CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_map tet You can also choose the Cross Link command from the File menu on the main Library Executive dialog or from the shortcut menu when the imported external file is selected in the Source Browser 2 In the Select Source Fields to Cross Link box select the check box to the left of the field name s to link to the source file created in Attaching the Index Identifier page 127 The Part Number is the unique index identifier for the corporate component database and the check box to the left of the Part Number field should be selected 3 In the Select Target Library Set to Cross Link box expand the groupings by clicking the sign to their left Navigate to the desired target source library or library set and select the target In this case a P CAD component library has been updated to include the index identifier of the imported external source If you do not wish to save the index identifier to your P CAD libraries this target may also be a Cross Link result 4 Click OK The selected target is searched for the chosen source field in this case the index identifier Part Num
264. nd completes the first step of importing component data from an external source The second step is to convert or map the file contents to attributes recognized by P CAD by choosing either the Map Keys or Cross Link commands The imported component data file creates or updates a P CAD library and you can Query Verify and Report on the imported components The Import Separated List File Dialog The Import Separated List File dialog is opened using one of the following methods e Choose File Import e Select the root of the Source Browser tree and choose New Character delimited File from the shortcut menu Library Executive User s Guide 197 Chapter 14 File Commands File Import 198 Import Separated List File x C Program Files N le map txt First line contains field names C Generate default field names List Separator Y Comment Character J h OK Cancel The Import Separated List File dialog allows you to specify the external source file and its organization with the following options Browse Opens a dialog where you can navigate to and select the external source file to import First line contains field names Select the First line contains field names option button if the first line of the separated list source file contains the field name headers for the field values These names appear on the file Viewer Generate default field names Select the Generate default field names optio
265. nd opens the Component Information dialog Component Information D x Select Pattern a Pattern View Sele nio Number of Gates p Symbol View Number of Pins p Component Type Refdes Prefix Normal Component Style Bate Numbering Altemate Views C Power Homogeneous Alphabetic IEEE Sheet Connector C Heterogeneous C Numeric DeMoraen Module From the Component Information dialog you can attach a pattern and set the component type the number of gates in the component alternate representations of the component and the RefDes prefix When creating a component you can enter a minimum of information before entering more detailed information in one of the other dialogs For example the number of pins must be entered Library Executive User s Guide 255 Chapter 20 View Commands View Pins View before proceeding to the Pins View dialog and the number of gates must be entered if you want to edit multiple gates from the Symbol View dialog Depending on how much information you provide some entries are filled in for you Pins When you attach a pattern pad numbers are supplied Pin Des values are filled in when you attach a symbol or a pattern whose Default Pin Designators have been specified When you select a symbol gate numbers and symbol pin numbers are automatically added Gate equivalence is automatically applied in Pins View If there is no attached pattern then you
266. ne of your symbol libraries as the destination library In this example you would choose prosch1 lib 4 Click Merge to begin the process For every component in the destination library the program searches the pattern libraries for the corresponding pattern The libraries are searched in the order they appear in the list 5 Repeatthe process for each symbol library 6 Click Close to exit the dialog Your destination libraries should now be fully integrated and ready to use with both P CAD Schematic and PCB Following this example prosch1 1ib is a fully integrated library Library Executive User s Guide 195 CHAPTER 1 4 File Commands In P CAD Library Executive the File menu commands allow you to import component information from any component library or database in a simple character delimited file format A P CAD library of the imported components can be generated or updated if desired Importing data from an external source is one of the many Library Executive enhancements Any other Library executive features can be accessed from the File menu including Query Verify and Reports File Import In P CAD Library Executive you can import a file containing component information from a variety of sources including your corporate component database The incoming file must be a simple separated list format The separated list file format is described in Importing Data from an External Source page 121 The File Import comma
267. nections for that component The component type is specified in the Component Information dialog e Normal The most common type of component for example diodes DIPs and resistors On a Normal component the pins are associated with the net to which they are connected Normal components appear in the netlist and the Bill of Materials Library Executive User s Guide 49 Chapter 4 Libraries Components Patterns and Symbols 50 e Power A special component used only in Schematic designs representing a connection to a power source This component type does not appear in the netlist or Bill of Materials However any pin connected to this component will be associated with the power net Sheet Connector A component with no net intelligence This component type is commonly used to import non intelligent graphics from a library such as company logos or a chart It does not appear in a netlist or Bill of Materials e Module Used with hierarchical designs a module component represents another sheet of circuitry in a design Module components are used on the parent sheet to maintain connections to the link components e Link Used with hierarchical designs to represent another sheet of circuitry in a design Links are used on the child sheet to maintain connections to the module components Pattern Graphics in the Library Executive Pattern graphics are the graphical representation of the pattern that is used when placing components in P
268. ned m Outside Pin Number g None C FlowIn C Flow Out C Flow Bi C Analog Digital Cancel E Noniose 10 Your symbol should now resemble the NAND gate symbol shown at the beginning of this section so let s save it to the library Mylibrary lib 11 Choose Symbol Save and the Symbol Save to Library displays Library D Program Files P CAD 2001 Demo Mylibrary lib Symbol Nano Match Default Pin Designators to Pin Numbers TT Create Component 4 Component INTITLED2 U Cancel 12 Choose the library we created earlier by clicking on Library and navigate to Mylibrary lib Type NAND in the Symbol field and click OK 13 Close the Symbol Editor by choosing Symbol Exit or click on the Close button xj Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Pattern Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial 14 You will be asked to save your symbol again but choose No since no changes have been made since you last saved it Creating a New Pattern Although we have a DIP14 already created and available through a number of P CAD supplied libraries we will take a quick detour to look at the Pattern Editor and how the Pattern Wizard would create a pattern to your specifications 1 Choose Pattern New from the Library Executive main menu to open the Pattern Wizard 2 Select DIP from the Pattern Type list and fill in the other fields as per the illustration below i e
269. nent attributes 1 In the Selection dialog click the External File button 2 Navigate to and select the external source file 3 Click OK The filename is displayed in the box 4 Click View if you wish to verify the file s contents The file is displayed on the screen 5 To import the file click Import The attributes contained within the external file appear in the Selected fields will be included in the report box 6 Selectand organize the attributes for the report contents Library Executive User s Guide Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic Chapter 11 Reports 7 Click OK to return to the File Reports dialog Linking with a Map File If the source file does not contain the P CAD primary key ComponentName then a Map file can also be imported to map the component index identifier from the source file to its associated library component This map file is a simple separated list file that contains the ComponentName in one column and the identifying attribute in the remaining column s which are used in the external source for example Part Number In this case you must load the map file The attributes are automatically linked with their corresponding component in your P CAD design Follow the steps in Importing a Source File with a ComponentName page 160 to generate a Bill of Materials with imported component attributes After importing the external file click the Map File button and choose the separated list map fil
270. nentName field which must be unique for P CAD products and a user defined PartNumber field which is the original name 7400 200 Library Executive User s Guide File Cross Link Chapter 14 File Commands Click the Delete Row button to delete a selected row You can only delete rows that have been added to the table 6 When all Original Field Names have been mapped to their desired New Field Name click the Map button The Viewer reappears with the fields mapped to the chosen P CAD values The identifier mapped appears next to the mapped file name Library Executive remembers the specified field mapping for the latest mapped file If changes are made to the corporate component database every week and you map the fields today then next week when you import the database to verify your P CAD library the mapping is completed automatically If you map a file with the same filename but different field names than the previously mapped file the original mapping will be overwritten File Cross Link When importing a separated list file from a non P CAD source the imported field names can be associated with field names recognized by P CAD These fields are properties and attributes that define a complete intelligent component This association can be completed by choosing either File Map Fields or File Cross Link Cross Link is preferable when the database does not contain a ComponentName field With Cross link the initial asso
271. neous component all gates use the same symbol e AlphaNumeric Whether the gate numbering in the reference designator is alphanumeric If True the gate numbering contains letters such as U1 A and U1 B If false the gate numbering is numeric only such as U1 1 and U1 2 e HasIEEE Whether the gate has an IEEE representation e HasDemorgan Whether the gate has a DeMorgan representation To search for True False values using the Query search criteria you can type a variety of expressions in the Query dialog These expressions are summarized in the following table Library Executive User s Guide 109 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Setting up a Query 110 Search Description Expressions Find the True values for this Boolean field True True Find the False values for this Boolean field No wildcards are allowed when searching for a True or False value ComponentType The ComponentType attribute has five possible values Normal Power Sheet Connector Module or Link The ComponentType attribute is not stored as a character string To search for any of these ComponentType values the full value must be entered in the search expression Wildcard characters are not allowed The search is not sensitive to case For example to search for a ComponentType of Power the following entries could be made in the Criteria And column Power Power power or power But you cannot search for Pow The wildcar
272. nete rentrer E tadir e kaniet 260 M fee 261 View Custom Toolbar prine poene nee lee eot Yr poene oe eee Ee epe a 261 View Prompt Lire iui nio edi qe eoe eti oet ante ed Eae eR ton a a EE e ada ee debes 261 chapter 21 Utils Commands Util QUST intet Seid Siecle e mde itin 263 Utils Shortcut Directory eon ecc eteceeeestuee ere cnet eoruin dee te free nne dne de needed ee 264 UNIES 264 Utils Schemaltic 2 o erecto piede ia coveted cedere te d edad ed tba ek d dude rude 264 Utils Pattern EGitor 2 contrito rentre Rer rt tene di p etg t fo tle addet 265 Utils Syrmbol Editor ite tere re ete aie RUE IEEE 265 WtilS CUSTOMIZE E 265 Displaying the Custom Toolbar emm 266 Executing a Custom Tool aede ideo pdt adi eene vicc 266 chapter 22 Help Commands Help Topics nie ime peu 267 How to Use Help 5 12 ciere iere aae rne duce cae ae SENEE deep ne De padece 267 About P CAD Library Executive ssesseeene nemen enne nnns 267 appendix A Importing Master Designer Libraries PDIF Library Considerations eese ient erento bentes 269 Translating Master Designer PDIF Libraries sessseseem 272 Translating PCB and Schematic Libraries see 272 Merging the Libraries eri retire e ned PNE NT e ha eR eee du tv 273 Import Consideratlons 3 3 eiui eet ette uite i Redi exo ie De d
273. nformation about placing a component from a Query Result Viewer into a PCB or Schematic design commands see Using Query Results page 116 Using Query Results After completing a Query all of the components satisfying the search criteria are displayed in a Query Results Viewer You can use these components as you would any other source in Library Executive and place components selected in the Query Results Viewer directly to a design in PCB or Schematic This section lists the primary features you can access from the Query Results Viewer Query Choose Query from the Table menu to open the Query dialog With Query you can further limit the component list of your Query Result by specifying additional search criteria Query results are stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on a query result allows you to view the query spreadsheet generate a report save the query to a library or query again Cross Link Choose Cross Link from the Table menu to open the Cross Link dialog With Cross Link you can link a component attribute in the query result with a matching attribute in a P CAD library or library set All attributes from both the query result and the library are displayed in the Cross Link Results Viewer Cross Link results are stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on a cross link result allows you to view the cross link Viewer spreadsheet generate a report save the result to a library query or cross li
274. ng You can rename components pattern and symbols but this is an action that must be undertaken with care If you prefer to use a different naming convention for your components patterns and symbols you can create aliases for them by choosing the Library Alias command without having to alter the original name Aliases are preferable for a number of reasons it s a safe way to use a variety of naming conventions there is no danger of making global mistakes which is possible when you rename and the flexibility of using aliases allows the component pattern or symbol to be referenced by any of its aliases Compact Program The COMPACT program is used to compress P CAD component libraries that were translated from P CAD PCB 6 400 pattern libraries or Tango Schematic part libraries Compacted libraries can be used directly without uncompressing The Library Translate command does not automatically run the COMPACT routine Uncompacted library files work they just take up more disk space than compacted library files The component libraries supplied with P CAD have already been compacted The COMPACT program must be run from a DOS prompt For example if you choose Library Translate to create a new P CAD library called Mycustom lib then you can create an equivalent compressed version of this called Custom 1ib as follows C COMPACT MYCUSTOM lib CUSTOM lib CUSTOM ERR The Custom err file contains a list of any errors encoun
275. ng information specific to the focus item F2 Moves the cursor to a cell where you can modify its contents Edit TAB Moves forward from left to right one cell at a time If you made a change to the previous cell the change takes effect when you press TAB SHIFT TAB Moves backwards through the cells one at a time Arrow keys If you haven t specified any change to a cell nothing entered in the edit box then the arrow keys will function normally moving between cells in any direction If you have made changes the arrow keys allow you to commit the change and move to another cell The SHIFT arrow keys extend the selection Library Executive User s Guide 19 Chapter 2 Library Basics Keyboard Shortcuts Press these keys To do this DELETE Deletes items from the selected cell or cells HOME Moves the cursor positioned in an edit box to the beginning left side of the box When the cursor is positioned in the spreadsheet it moves to the beginning of the row END Moves the cursor positioned in an edit box to the end right side of the box When the cursor is positioned in the spreadsheet it moves to the end of the row ENTER Transfers the change you make in the edit box to the cell that is being edited and moves the selection to the next cell below the current one PgUp Scrolls the spreadsheet one page up If the spreadsheet is only one page scrolls to the top of the page PgDn Scro
276. nk again Refer to Understanding Cross Linking page 130 for details about the cross link feature Verify From the Query Results Viewer you can verify the consistency between the queried components and a set of P CAD libraries A report is generated if any differences are found Choose Verify from the Table menu or from the shortcut menu in the Source Browser after selecting the query result from the Source Browser tree For more information see Library Verification page 137 Reports To generate a report on a query result from the Query Result Viewer choose Report from the Table menu or from the shortcut menu when a query result is selected in the Source Browser tree For additional information about generating reports refer to Reports page 145 116 Library Executive User s Guide Accessing Query and Query Results Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Updating or Creating Libraries You can use query results to create or update libraries If a library is created from the Query Result Viewer the library will include only the queried components If a library is updated from the Query Result Viewer only the select group of queried components in the table will be modified in the library The attributes in the Query Result Viewer will be created or updated in the P CAD library for components with the same name From the Query Result Viewer choose the Save To Library command from the Table menu You can also create or update librarie
277. nk produces a new file containing all six attributes The result differs from the first Cross Link Result in that there will be two Attr3 attributes one from Source 1 and another from Source 2 In this case there is no attempt at comparing the repeated attributes so components with matching or unmatching Attr3 values are included Cross Link Results are stored in the Source Browser You can select a result at any time in the future to use a particular combination of components and component attributes With a cross link result you can update a library search for a component with specific attributes generate a report verify attributes in a P CAD library and even cross link again to another Source file Viewer Menu Commands The following reference section describes how to use all of the menu commands for the Viewer These commands are listed in the order that they appear on the dialog menu Table Column and Row The Viewer displays the contents of both an external source file and the cross link results The Viewer for the external source file has the additional Table command Map Fields Library Executive User s Guide 131 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Viewer Menu Commands 132 Table Commands The Table commands allow you to access other features of P CAD Library Executive including Query Cross Link Verify Report and Save To Library They also allow you to rearrange the contents of the table by using cut cop
278. not need to alter the pattern that was created by the Pattern Wizard so we will save the pattern into our library by choosing Pattern Save Navigate to the library Mylibrary lib by clicking on the Library button enter the library pathname and click Open 5 Type DIP14 in the Pattern field and click OK Pattern Save To Library Library D SProgram Files P CAD 2001 Demo Mylibrary lib Pattern piPt4 Match Default Pin Des to Pad Numbers T Create Component ups cs OK Component is 6 Close the Pattern Editor by choosing Pattern Exit or clicking on the Close button xi 7 You will be asked to save your pattern again but choose No as no changes have been made AN Save changes to Mylibrary DIP14 Primary un wi Cancel 28 Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Component Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial 8 You are returned to the Library Executive window Now we will create a component that uses the symbol and pattern we have created Creating a New Component Creating a new component will link a symbol and pattern together with necessary pin information 1 Choose Component New in the Library Executive You are prompted to open the library into which this component will be stored pen 2 xl Look in E Demo x ex E3 Demo lib Modfax0 lib File name Mylibrary lib Files of type Library File lib x Cancel 2 SelectMylibrary lib from the
279. ns to copper pours Selecting this option automatically creates thermal ties to pads and vias in the same net You should select this option if you want to preserve the voids in your design Embedded Aperture Table Instructs PCB to convert pad definitions from the design s embedded aperture table Pad Graphics Instructs PCB to convert pad definitions from the design s pad graphics Important Layer Mapping Tips This section provides some important tips for mapping Master Designer layers to P CAD layers It also explains how Library Executive handles layers for which mapping is not recommended as well as user defined Master Designer layers Component Layers e Component Silk Layers SLKTOP SLKSCR Map these layers to the appropriate P CAD top or bottom silk layers Top Silk or Bottom Silk e Assembly or Fab Information DEVICE Map these layers to the appropriate P CAD top or bottom assembly layers Pad Layers e Pad Shapes on Signal Layers FLSOLD FLCOMP PINFTP If your Master Designer pad shapes are defined using aperture flashes map the flash layers to Top or Bottom as appropriate If your pad shapes are defined using graphics map the graphics layers to Top or Bottom e Paste Mask and Drill Layers Library Executive does not map these layers automatically because the solder mask swell and paste shrink sizes are determined automatically from the pad shape Library Executive User s Guide Library Merge Patterns Chapter 15
280. nt library that have this symbol attached e List of Alias Names The alias names of equivalent symbols in the same library e Attribute Table Lists the symbol attributes and their values e Picture of Symbol Select this option to include a picture of the symbol in the published output The Min Size and Max Size boxes become available and you can select the size range of the picture output The minimum size sets the lower bound If the symbol is smaller than this minimum size it is enlarged The maximum size sets the upper bound If the symbol is larger than this maximum size it is reduced If the symbol picture is currently within the selected minimum maximum range it is fit to the next larger inch increment For example a picture with a bounding rectangle size of 4 21 inches would be fit to 4 5 inches The symbol pictures can be resized by selecting and modifying them in Word See your Microsoft Word 97 documentation for details Set All Selects all options e Clear All Clears all selected options e Done Saves the selected options and returns to the Library Publisher dialog Footer Format When including the Footer Section click the Footer Format button to open the Footer Format Options dialog Footer Format Options Eg Predefined Options Footer Contents AlphaNumeric ComponentHeight ComponentLibrar ComponentT ype CreateDate Description HasDemorgan HaslEEE Homogeneous Link Move
281. ntains the combination of the Part Number and the library components 2 Choose File Import to import the map file 3 Add the Part Number by choosing the Cross Link command from the Table menu of the file Viewer 4 Checkthe ComponentName field in the Select Source Fields to Cross Link box and select the Ale tutor lib library in the Select Target Library Set to Cross Link box 5 Click OK to display the combination of the library and map file In this case it contains the Part Number attribute as well as the component attributes inside the library The data in this viewer can be used without saving it to a library until the Library Executive application is exited The Source Browser lists the result of the cross link that you have just completed e g Cross Link Result 1 180 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import the Ale crosslink txt file 7 Crosslink the imported file with the library map file Cross Link result generated in step 1 A new cross link result table is generated with a combination of all map file imported file and P CAD library component information This step is identical to cross linking except that instead of the updated library the cross link result generated in step 1 is selected as the target 8 Select the TARGET Quantity TARGET Cost and TARGET Vendor columns by clicking the column headers while pressing SHIFT Cl
282. nto both Schematic and PCB designs from the same library An integrated component has both the pattern and symbol information and graphics When translating a Master Designer PDIF library to a P CAD library the resulting library does not contain attached symbol or pattern information and is therefore not an integrated library However a Master Designer PDIF Schematic library can be translated into a P CAD Schematic only library and used to place symbols into P CAD Schematic Also a Master Designer PDIF PCB library can be translated into a P CAD PCB only library and used to place patterns into P CAD PCB Layer mapping differs from PCB When translating a Master Designer PDIF library to a P CAD library the default layer mapping from the following table is used P CAD Layer Library Layer COMP Top PADCOM Top PINTOP Top Library Executive User s Guide PDIF Library Considerations Appendix A Importing Master Designer Libraries P CAD Layer Library Layer SLKTOP Top Silk Library Executive maps all other layers to NONE See Mapping Layers from P CAD Binary and PDIF Files to PCB in the P CAD PCB User s Guide for a full description of the layer mapping process Unused pads Components created from the translation of Master Designer PDIF Schematic libraries contain one pin for each pin found If a pattern is attached to a Schematic component that has more pads than pins the extra pads will have
283. ociated with that particular P CAD library component are automatically included The ComponentName in P CAD is the key that references the rest of that component s attributes Depending on how your external component database is organized a specific attribute or set of attributes identifies a component and all its associated component attributes This attribute may or may not be the component name as used by P CAD In this document the attribute that identifies the component and its attributes is called the primary key when referring to P CAD s ComponentName The attribute s used to identify the component and its attribute in an external source file is called an index identifier The P CAD ComponentName must be associated with the imported data so that Library Executive can determine which library or design component the imported attributes belong to This association of the ComponentName field with the imported component data can be completed with one of two commands Map Fields or Cross Link The command of choice depends on the original contents of the imported character delimited file To import a character separated file containing component attribute data follow these steps 1 Choose the File Import command to open the Import Separated List File dialog Import Separated List File x First line contains field names C Generate default field names List Separator Y zl Comment Character OK Cancel You c
284. oe tates nado 274 appendix B System Messages Library Message Listing ssssssssssssssssseseeenenneneerennn nnne 275 Index a a RIMIS deu tue M Mos eec teh C AA M clade e 281 viii Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Introduction to the Library Executive User s Guide This introduction to the Library Executive User s Guide summarizes the powerful advanced features of Library Executive as well as details the contents of the manual to follow Library Executive is a utility with a user friendly interface used in conjunction with P CAD PCB and P CAD Schematic to efficiently create and maintain component data These components can then be placed into PCB and Schematic designs With Library Executive you can search libraries for a variety of attributes using the Query tool External data files may be imported queried or used to create or update your P CAD libraries Also components in a design can quickly be verified and modified if desired when updates are made to a library Many of these features including Query can be used directly from P CAD PCB and Schematic Library Executive is partnered with a Pattern Editor and Symbol Editor that include wizards that accelerate pattern and symbol creation Once created the patterns and symbols can be easily attached to components General knowledge of P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic may be a prerequisite to using certain Library Executive functions Refer to your P CAD PCB U
285. og is the point of access for the content and format options of the Library Publisher To set up the Library Publisher dialog follow these steps 1 Click the Source Library button to navigate to and select the directory and filename of the P CAD library you want to publish Click the Save To button to navigate to and select the directory and filename of the output file Select the Library Section check box if you want to include a report on the selected P CAD library in the publisher output When this check box is selected the Library Format button becomes available Click the library Format button to select the contents of this section including file name size component name list etc Refer to Format Options page 149 for additional details Select the Component Section check box if you want to include a report on the components in the selected P CAD library in the publisher output When this option is selected the Component Format button becomes available Click the Component Format button to select the contents of this section including component name pin table attribute table etc Refer to Format Options page 149 for additional details The Select Components button becomes available Click the Select Components button to choose which components from the selected library will be included in the report output Refer to Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols page 154 for additional details If the Component Section
286. om Libraries Integrated Libraries Integrated libraries contain intelligent components suitable for use with both P CAD Schematic and PCB The components in these libraries have logical pin designators and pin data specific to the type of the component e g SN7400N These components reference the appropriate Schematic symbol graphics and PCB pattern graphics also known as footprints or decals In a typical integrated library many components reference the same pattern graphic since those components have the same PCB pattern Note that the component gives the pattern and symbol graphics all their intelligence pattern graphics and symbol graphics do not contain any logical information such as pin designator values Pattern Libraries Pattern libraries contain generic components that have generic pin designators and pin data and a reference to a PCB pattern graphic These libraries do not contain Schematic symbol graphics and are unusable with P CAD Schematic If you use P CAD Schematic you must use the integrated libraries since the PCB specific libraries contain no symbol graphics If you import a netlist from P CAD Schematic it is recommend you use the integrated libraries in PCB This allows you to maintain synchronized PCB and schematic designs between P CAD Schematic and P CAD PCB in such areas as e Hotlink support e ECO support e Pin and gate swapping If you use a third party schematic editor to create netlists for PCB it is re
287. on and attached pattern section if selected of the component to which it is attached If you select the Symbol Section check box outside the Component Section the symbol section will follow after the component section and pattern section if selected for all components is completed In this case the symbol section will contain all of the selected symbols in the library consecutively independent of their associated component Each of these two symbol sections can be formatted separately Click the Symbol Format button to open the Symbol Format Options dialog When all desired symbol format options are selected click Done The selected options are saved and you are returned to the Library Publisher dialog For details about the Symbol Format options refer to Library Commands page 211 Footer Format Options When including the Footer Section click the Footer Format button to open the Footer Format Options dialog 152 Library Executive User s Guide Publishing a P CAD Library Chapter 11 Reports Footer Format ptions x Predefined Options Footer Contents Count AlphaNumeric Angle Attr Value ComponentHeight ComponentLibrar lt Remove Components ComponentT ype CreateD ate CurrentFootprint DCode Description x Move Down User Defined Attribute Dou Done This dialog allows you to specify the footer contents displayed on each page of the component section by selecting the desired pr
288. on you will be importing the sample comma delimited file Ale_mrp txt This sample file contains the primary key ComponentName It will be used to introduce the Map Fields function of Library Executive The MRP file Ale_mrp txt is an external source file that contains the ComponentName field This field is essential for P CAD libraries since it is used as the basis for both search and placement of all library components in all P CAD products With the ComponentName field in your MRP file it is only a few quick easy steps to update a P CAD library Many MRP databases are organized without a unique component name For example the attribute Part Number may be the index that labels and identifies individual components If your external Library Executive User s Guide 169 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources source file does not contain the ComponentName an additional process is needed to initially set up and automate the import process Using the sample files follow these steps to learn how to import and update a library from an MRP file Step 1 Import an MRP with a ComponentName The first step in importing any external source file is to put the data into a simple comma delimited file format The source file Ale mrp txt is already in the appropriate file format and can be imported directly into Library Executive The Importing Data from an External Source page 121 contains additional information on
289. on command moves the data from all selected cells to the clipboard overwriting the previous clipboard contents You must have one or more cells selected before you can cut Edit Cut Spreadsheet Selection does not function within the Component Information dialog The Paste CTRL V command copies the clipboard data to another cell or cells within the spreadsheet Data in the clipboard can also be pasted into a commercial spreadsheet where it can be edited and pasted back into Library Executive Edit Copy Spreadsheet Selection The Edit Copy Spreadsheet Selection command copies the data from all selected cells to the clipboard The original data is not erased from the cells Library Executive User s Guide 249 Chapter 19 Edit Commands Edit Paste Spreadsheet Selection Edit Copy Spreadsheet Selection does not function within the Component Information dialog You must have one or more cells selected before you can copy The Paste CTRL V command copies the clipboard data to another cell or cells Data in the clipboard can also be pasted into a commercial spreadsheet where it can be edited and pasted back into Library Executive Edit Paste Spreadsheet Selection The Edit Paste Spreadsheet Selection command copies the clipboard data to a cell or cells within the spreadsheet Data copied to the Clipboard from a commercial spreadsheet can be pasted into one of the view dialog spreadsheets by choosing the Edit Paste Spreadshee
290. ontains field names C Generate default field names List Separator Comment Character F OK Cancel 2 Click the Browse button Navigate to the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory and select the comma delimited source file Ale crosslink txt 3 Click the First line contains field names button since the first line of the sample file contains the field names that correspond to the file contents If the first line of the external source file did not contain field names the Generate default field names button should be selected 4 Enteror select a character in the List Separator box Enter or select a character in the Comment Character box 6 Click OK The external source file Viewer appears Viewer CAPCAD2001YXTutorialMAle crosslink txt Table Column Row _ Part Number Quantity VendorCost EM Pana 29 Pana Pana Pless Pless Pless Pless CTS CTS CTS CTS CTS CTS CTS CTS Yage Yage Yage Yege Yage Library Executive User s Guide 177 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 178 Import and Export from External Sources The field names are the column headers with the field values filling in the table contents Step 4 Cross Linking the Files To cross link the MRP file with the P CAD sample library 1 From the Table menu of the MRP file Viewer choose Cross Link to open the Cross Link dialog Cross Link C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_crosslink tct Select Source Fie
291. oocoasa Prev Pad Next Pad Library Executive User s Guide 7 Chapter 2 Library Basics User Interface In the Pattern View dialog you can associate pin information to each pattern pad A browse window displays the current pattern and the spreadsheet displays information about the pin pad association Click the Select Pattern button to open the Library Browse dialog where you can select a new pattern Symbol View The Symbol View dialog lets you define symbols for the component Symbol View 1 TPOPTEK_16_N Component Info Pins View Pattern View Prev Sym Next Sym Prev Pin Next Pin Pad 1 1 red Pde caet 99 1 1 3 7 Use the Symbol View dialog to build an association between symbol pin information and the pattern s pads A browse window displays the attached current symbol s and the spreadsheet displays information about the pin pad association Click the Select Symbol button to open the Library Browse dialog where you can select a new symbol Pins View The Pins View dialog is a spreadsheet view of the component as shown in the following figure Pins View Ol x Pattern View Symbol View cae Snr Prvane Gaeta Fra eee Te 1 Input 1 Input Output 2 Input 2 Input Output Power Output Input Input Output Input Input Power A B Y A B a G Y A B Y A B VI 8 Library Executive User s Guide User Interface Chapter 2 Library Basics This
292. operties or attributes To select the attributes you want displayed on the bottom of the component section s pages 1 Select a component or attribute from the list of Predefined Options 2 Click Add to move the selection to the Footer Contents list To include an attribute that is not predefined type the attribute name into the User Defined Attribute box Click Add The attribute will appear in the Footer Contents box The attribute value for the particular component will be found in the library and listed in the footer section You can also double click the attribute to add it To remove an attribute from the Footer Contents box select the attribute and click Remove You can also double click the attribute to remove it Text can be included in the footer For example the words Components Designed By can become a footer for your published document To include text type the text into the User Defined Attribute box Click Add Since the name is not recognized as an attribute an attribute value will not appear in the footer 3 The footer contents are the attributes and their values listed in the order that they appear in the Footer Contents box These attributes appear in order on the bottom of the pages in the component section from left to right To organize the Footer Contents box select the property or attribute you want to move click Move Up or Move Down These commands rearrange or modify the contents of this box by moving
293. or enter the character in the box Lines per Page Allows you to specify the number of lines per page in your query report Column Allows you to specify the number of columns per line Output Filename Displays the name of the report if you choose to save it to a file The default filename is library rpt Click the Filename button to change the default name Filename Click the Filename button to designate a report name other than the default name The filename appears in the Output Filename box Generating a Report File To generate a report on a query result cross link result an imported file or a P CAD library 1 Library Executive User s Guide Choose the Report command to open the Report dialog 209 Chapter 14 File Commands File Exit File Exit The File Exit command closes Library Executive 210 Other reports can be generated by selecting the item query result cross link result imported file or P CAD library in the Source Browser tree and selecting Report from the shortcut menu Select the desired report format check box in the Style Format frame If you choose Delimiter Separated a character delimited report output is generated automatically with formatting specifications If you choose Report an ASCII report file is generated The ASCII report is more readable and formatting specifications can be applied to the Page Format Header Footer Lines per Page and Columns Choose the desired page formattin
294. ormation to be placed in P CAD PCB If the component has an attached symbol it may be placed in P CAD Schematic If the component is selected in the Viewer the Viewer must include the ComponentName and ComponentLibrary fields If the component in the specified library has complete electrical and graphical information Library Executive quickly accesses the component and places it in the current design Accessing Component Placement Choose the Place command to place a component to a P CAD PCB or Schematic design The Place command can be accessed from the Source Browser and the Row menu The item selected when you choose the Place command defines the component you intend to place in the design For example choosing Place PCB from a Query Result table while a component row is selected opens the Place Component dialog in the current PCB design with the component selected This section describes how and where to choose the Place command to get the desired results Library Executive User s Guide 163 Chapter 12 Component Placement Import and Export from External Sources From the Source Browser From the Source Browser you can open a P CAD library directly and select a component to place into a design Select a component contained within a P CAD library in the Source Browser tree and choose Place from the shortcut menu Drag the mouse to the right to select the desired application name PCB or Schematic Refer to Placing Components in
295. ort and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 3 Click the First line contains field names button since the first line of the sample file contains the field names that correspond to the file contents If the first line of the external source file did not contain field names the Generate default field names button should be selected 4 Enteror select a character in the List Separator box 5 Enteror select a character in the Comment Character box 6 Click OK The external source file Viewer appears Viewer CAPCAD2001YTutoriaMAle map txt Table Column Row __EomponentNamd Part Number Lb 238704 CAP300RP 238705 CAP350 238706 CAP400 239707 CAPAD0AP 238708 CAP450 238709 CAPS00 238710 CAPSODAP 238711 CAPG DAP 238712 CAP700AP 238713 CAPBODAP 238714 CAPI000AP 236715 CAPI20DAP 238716 POLCAP 238801 RES 479802 RESGSIPB 438799 RESSSIPI 438601 RESGSIPISOL 438802 RES DIPISOL 438803 RES8DIPISOL 438804 RESBSIPB 438805 RESBSIPDT 438806 23 REsasIPI 43880 sf The field names are the column headers with the field values filling in the table contents Step 2 Updating the Library The Viewer appears with the two column contents of the map file ComponentName and Part Number At present the components in the P CAD sample library A1e tutor lib are only referenced by the ComponentName and the MRP database is only referenced by the Part Number The following ste
296. ou can choose the destination library This is typically a symbol library that has been converted to P CAD format The destination library shouldn t contain any patterns 4 Click Merge to begin the process For every component in the destination library the program searches the source libraries for the corresponding pattern The libraries are searched in the order they appear in the list If any patterns exist in the destination library a warning message appears If you choose to continue these patterns will not be replaced with patterns from the source libraries during the merge process However the pin mapping will be updated with the information from the source libraries 5 Click Close to exit the dialog Library Publisher Library Publisher generates complete customizable reports directly in Microsoft Word These reports can include pictures of the patterns and symbols in the library Microsoft Word 97 is required for the Library Publisher utility The Library Publisher Dialog When you choose Library Publisher the Library Publisher dialog opens 230 Library Executive User s Guide Library Publisher Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Publisher x Source Library C Program FilesXP CAD 2001 Tutorial Tutor lib C Program Files P CAD 2001 Lib Tutor doc Library Section Library Format Iv Component Section Component Format Select Components Iv Attached Pattern Section Pattern Format
297. page 3 for details on manipulating spreadsheets Individual read only field values cannot be modified although read only fields may be added or deleted from the table A read only field is displayed in red on the Viewer Query Result Menu Commands The following reference section describes how to use all of the menu commands for the Query Result Viewer These commands are listed in the order that they appear on the dialog menu Table Column and Row Table Commands The Table commands allow you to access other features of P CAD Library Executive including Query Cross Link Verify Report and Save To Library They also allow you to rearrange the contents of the table by using cut copy and paste The following table describes the Table commands Command Description Cut Deletes any selected component row from the Query Result Viewer and moves it to the Clipboard This command will not work on a read only field Copies selected item s from the Query Result Viewer onto the Clipboard Pastes items from the Clipboard onto the Query Results Viewer The Paste command will not work on a read only field Query Opens the Query dialog where you narrow the component list of the present Query Results Viewer by including more search criteria Cross Link Opens the Cross Link dialog where you can link component attributes in the selected file with their corresponding components in another source The Cross Link Results Viewer
298. phics within a library can only be carried out using Library Executive Orientations of the pattern graphics can also set here Target Pattern Tab This tab of the Library Pattern Graphics dialog allows you to nominate a target pattern from a selected source library for the purpose of attaching additional pattern graphics Library Pattern Graphics Target Pattern Alternates Orientations Library D Program Files P CAD 2001 Demo Demo lib Target Pattern CAP200HRP Pattem Graphics Cancel Apply Pattern Changes to Library The following fields are available e Library Button Click this button to launch the Library Select dialog from where you can browse to open the required library This is your selected source library The name of the opened library is displayed to the right of the button e Target Pattern This field shows the current nominated target pattern from the source library The target pattern is the pattern that you will attach additional pattern graphics to The dropdown list contains all the patterns in the selected source library By default the first pattern in the library is entered into the Target Pattern field To nominate a different pattern just click on an entry in the list e Pattern Graphics List Window This list window shows all of the pattern graphics attached to the nominated pattern in the Target Pattern field The default pattern graphic for a pattern is called Primary As
299. play the components satisfying your search criteria in a Query Result Viewer table For more information about the Query Result Viewer and how you can use query results in Library Executive see Query Results page 113 Query Results When you execute a Query the components found in the search appear on the Query Results Viewer This section describes the Query Result Viewer spreadsheet and how you can use it Query Result Viewer After executing a Query the Query Result Viewer spreadsheet appears Viewer Query Result 1 o x Table Column Row _ ModifyDate Alias ComponentLibrary ComponentType NumberOfPads NumberOfPins Numb fae CAPCAD2001 Tuto Normal 2 03 20 2000 C PCAD2001 Tuto Normal 3 03 20 2000 C PCAD2001 Tuto Normal 4 03 20 2000 C PCAD2001 Tuto Normal 03 20 2000 CAPCAD2001 Tuto Normal 8 03 20 2000 C PCAD2001 Tuto Normal 03 20 2000 C PCAD2001 Tuto Normal ey 03 20 2000 CAPCAD2001 Tuto Normal 03 20 2000 CAPCAD2ODTXTuto Normal The Query Result Viewer is a simple spreadsheet form it contains all of the components in the queried source that satisfy the selected criteria Across the top of the table are the selected display fields Their values for each of the components found are listed in the appropriate column Library Executive User s Guide 113 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Query Results The Query Result Viewer dialog is a spreadsheet Refer to Library Basics
300. ponent Type rc n Refdes Prefix Pins View Normal Component Style r Gate Numbering Altemate Views Patter View C Power Homogeneous Alphabetic IEEE C Sheet Connector C Heterogeneous C Numeric DeMorgan C Module Prev Sym Next Sym Prev Pin Next Pin s n Ps Pindes Gaet SymPin Pnname GateEa Pina Elec Type 4 gt Pattern View DIP14 JOT x Select Pattern Edit Patter Component Info Pins View Patter View Symbol View Se Syn Pn fF Nene ae Ea Fn Ea Eec Tyee 1 Uni 1 2 2 1 2 Unknown 3 3 1 3 Unknown Symbol View ie Unkneen Prey Patten Graphic 2 5 2 2 Unknown S 8 2 3 Unknown Next Pattern Graphic id 3 1 Unknown Current Pattern Graphics LX ea ioi Unknown Primary aa 3 3 Unknown 10 10 4 1 Unknown Prev Pad Next Pad n n 4 2 Unknown 25 12 i2 4 3 Unknown 1 Pod PinDes Gate Simi Fn Nene Gate Ea Pin Ea elec Typ i L i 1 m Msn y F G uu ASS Wy Microsot Word qi P CAD 2001 Library Ed Paint Shop Pro Inbox Outlook Express WB 5 04PM The final stage of setting up our new component is editing the Pins View spreadsheet so that the logical pins and the physical pins are correctly matched Editing the Pins View Spreadsheet You define the electrical properties of your component in the Pins View spreadsheet When you attach a pattern to a component pad numbers
301. ponent attributes in the design and generate a difference report directly The design components may be updated automatically to reflect these library changes Again you have been working on a design for the past six weeks It is almost complete but you want to check that changes made to the component library do not critically impact your design The report in lesson 6 lists all library components modified after the design placement date whether or not they exist in the design The difference report generated in this lesson lists only components with attribute discrepancies between the design and library Library Executive User s Guide 187 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources Step 1 Open a PCB or Schematic Design To access the Design Verification utility open a P CAD design by starting PCB You will be generating a difference report from a PCB design against a P CAD library 1 Choose File Open 2 Open a design file such as Demo1 u pcb in the Demo folder in the P CAD installation directory 3 Choose library Verify Design The Design Verification dialog appears Step 2 Set up the Design Verification Dialog In this section you will set up the Design Verification dialog to generate a difference report The difference report will be displayed to the screen as well as to a specified output file This report will contain components that have differing attributes in the design and the
302. ponent from that alias The destination library now contains an alias that is an actual component Library Delete The Library Delete command removes a selected library item This command deletes the item in name only if it has aliases The alternate names aliases still exist unless you delete them If an item has only one name and it is deleted then the item itself is deleted from the library The Library Alias command provides a way to check an item for an alias The library that you designate in the execution of Library Alias Library Delete or Library Rename remains current for the length of the Library Executive session If you delete a pattern or symbol the components in the library that reference that pattern or symbol become incomplete and cannot be placed To prevent this delete only a pattern alias or symbol alias Deleting a Library Item 1 Choose library Delete to open the Library Delete dialog Library Delete rary C A PCAD2001 Demo Demallib Delete ltem Component Component Delete C Pattern Close C Symbol 2 Click the Library button to open the Library Select dialog where you can navigate to and select the library from which you want to delete an item The selected library is displayed in the Library Delete dialog 3 Selectthe desired Delete Item option button Pattern Component or Symbol and the items within the displayed library will be listed in the Libr
303. preadsheet Selection Edit Commander ttti etes 250 attaching 251 pattern graphics libraries loading tentes multiple components sharing 49 next pad Es E C ER previous pad sssseeeneeene 257 renaming Selection teretes Pattern Commands Save As Pattern Editor eoe eere 59 accessing from Library Executive 245 attributes automated pattern creation 61 command summary 60 dialogs Atri DUtGS iere tee een 67 Save To Library Utils Renumber see 70 features sii eot ce ee files launching loading patterns sse 65 pad placement pad renumbering sss 70 Pattern Wizard sese 61 placing points Place Glue Point esses 74 Place Pick Point sees 74 Place Ref Point renumbering pin des ss 71 Rotate or Flip a Pad 70 saving a pattern to a library 66 Library Executive User s Guide Pattern Graphics sss Add remove rename in the Library Executive 50 68 in the Pattern Editor sss 68 Pattern Library naming conventions sseseeeeee 52 Pattern View dialog sedet oes 7 257 Pattern View View command 257 dialog entitas Pattern Wizard options P CAD ASCIL eter eterne 22
304. pressions search fields sese search output sse search results selecting fields sss selecting search criteria 107 update a library eee 117 using from PCB using from Schematic 118 using multiple search expressions 112 using query results sss verifying a library eee VIEWED aie Sareea nE nEs eve Sete eee eae ons Column commands Row commands esee Table commands wildcard characters Query File command Query Utils command quitting Library Executive 210 reference link tete reference point Rename Library command renaming a pattern symbol or component eerte 220 renumber report accessing from Source Browser Bill of Materials custom POEM ALS reren ssnin a e 156 selections eese 157 sorting file extension 157 generatilig anas ated esee 146 header lines per page 157 209 output destination sss 209 output filename page format sss separated list sss style format s Report File command 208 reporting on an imported file 134 reports libr
305. ps will link the Part Number to an associated ComponentName within the library 1 Save the Part Number attribute to the library by choosing the Save to Library command from the Table menu From the Table command of the file Viewer choose Save to Library The Save Source dialog appears Library Executive User s Guide 175 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 176 6 Import and Export from External Sources Save Source x Source C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_map tt Save Mode l C Create New CAPCAD2001 XTutorial amp Ale tutor lib F Create new components Update F Update only components with matching library name Iv Create componenttime stamps if not present Attribute Conflict Resolution Favor Attribute Name Ignore SourcelLibrary Part Number fai fx fai E E OK Cancel Select the Update option button Click the Library button navigate to the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory and select the Ale_tutor lib library Click Open The selected library name displays in the edit box There are no new components in the imported MRP file Leave the Create new components box cleared Since the MRP file does not contain a ComponentLibrary attribute leave the Update only components with matching library name box cleared Select the Create component time stamps if not present check box when adding or updating the ModifyDate attribute in the component library All attributes that wi
306. r IsLike means is similar to For example IsLike 5 could be 50 510 5 etc If not used with a wildcard operator IsLike is equivalent to IsNotLike If used with a wildcard operator IsNotLike means is not similar to For example IsNotLike 5 could be 14 or 20 or 42 but not 50 510 or 5 If not used with a wildcard operator IsNotLike is equivalent to lt gt To specify search criteria the operator is generally followed by alphanumeric characters as shown in the following spreadsheet Field Show Criteria And Or ComponentName X IsLike DIP2 Alias 3 ComponentLibrary x 4 ComponentType X Exist 5 NumberDfPads x 6 NumberDfPins x Number fParts X 6 8 Homogeneous True 9 AlphaNumeric E HaslEEE fa The four operators Exist NotExist AnyValue and NoValue are not followed by alphanumeric characters 108 Library Executive User s Guide Setting up a Query Chapter 8 Querying Libraries For the above query one component found could be DIP24 a homogeneous component with 6 parts and a ComponentType attribute Notice that you can search for a homogeneous component without displaying the Homogeneous field value in the query result Because of the search criteria all components in the query result will have a value True for the Homogeneous field This value however is not displayed in the Query Result because its Show box is cleared If a search criteria entry is not prece
307. r Libraries Import Considerations Library Merge Patterns r Source Libraries Add Library Merge Bemove Library Close m Destination Library CAPCAD2001DEMOXDEMO LIB 2 Select the newly created P CAD library translated from the Master Designer PCB PDIF library as the Source Libraries 3 Specify the Destination Library as the P CAD library translated from the Master Designer Schematic PDIF library 4 Click the Merge button Library Executive merges the Master Designer PDIF PCB library into the Master Designer PDIF Schematic library You can now use this library with both P CAD PCB and P CAD Schematic Import Considerations This section lists considerations for importing into P CAD Library Executive e Copper Pours in components are demoted to polygons e Cutouts in components are ignored 274 Library Executive User s Guide APPENDIX B System Messages This appendix provides a listing of system messages by message number Many of these messages relate to the verification process A detailed explanation of each message is included Library Message Listing Error Number Message Comment 5635 Duplicate pin des found in spreadsheet while loading pattern 5636 Duplicate pad numbers found at rows and 5637 Pad number at row ___is out of range 5700 Unable to allocate memory for pin data Component not verified 5701 Gate Number out of range in row
308. r mapping Map Selected Layer Assigns the selected Master Designer layer to the selected PCB layer Library Executive User s Guide 227 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Translate 228 Create New Layer Opens the Options Layers dialog so you can create a new layer or modify an existing one Default Map Maps the PCB design signal to signal plane to plane and non signal to non signal to non signal to non signal This option saves you having to create layers manually The default layer map set varies depending on whether you select embedded aperture tables or pad graphics to convert your pad definitions Auto Map All Layers Automatically maps all unassigned Master Designer layers to PCB layers of the same name If a layer does not have NONE next to it PCB leaves the current assignment Unassign All Layers Assigns lt NONE gt to all the Master Designer layers in the list Tool Table Lets you select which tool table to use Tool tables specify the hole size to use for each pad type in the converted design Use Table Indicates whether or not to use the Tool Table PCB needs the tool table to apply the correct hole sizes If you don t specify a tool table PCB uses a default hole size for the pad types Polygons Indicates to convert polygons to polygons You should select this option if you never ran the Merge Polygon Voids command on the Environment Menu in Master Designer 8 5 Copper Pours Instructs PCB to convert polygo
309. rary From the File Menu 1 Choose Save to Library from the File Menu 2 The mapped imported source file is saved to a library Time Stamps In Library Executive you can automatically mark the time when a component in a P CAD library was created modified or verified These times are saved in the user defined attributes CreateDate ModifyDate and VerifyDate fields Time Stamp makes keeping track of libraries effortless The Time Stamp feature of Library Executive can save you both time and headaches especially if more than one designer is using and modifying the same component libraries For example you may want to find all components in a P CAD library that have been modified after a certain date With this feature you can quickly find what changes have been made since you last used the library Time stamps are available from these Library Executive commands and features e Save To Library The Save To Library command controls both the CreateDate and ModifyDate fields The Save To Library command is discussed in to Creating a New Library page 42 e Verify The Verify command controls the VerifyDate field For additional information on the Verify command see Chapter 10 Library Verification page 137 e Query Time Stamps can also be used in the Query utility For information on how to search for a CreateDate ModifyDate or VerifyDate field refer to Querying Libraries page 103 Components Patterns and Symbols P CAD integr
310. rary Publisher dialog Symbol Format When including a Symbol Section in your published library click the Symbol Format button to open the Symbol Format Options dialog Symbol Format Options x M Symbol Name Set All M Number of Pins Clear All Iv Bounding Rectangle Size v List of Comp References M List of Alias Names v Attribute Table Iv Picture of Symbol 0000m Min amp 0000m Max This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the Symbol Section The Symbol Section check box can be selected in two locations If you select the Attached Symbol Section check box within the Component Section the Symbol Section will directly follow the Component Section and attached Pattern Section if selected of the component to which it is attached If you select the Symbol Section box outside the Component Section the symbol section will follow after the Component Section and Pattern Section if selected for all components and contain all of the selected symbols in the library consecutively independent of their associated component The options in the Symbol Format Options dialog are Symbol Name The name of the symbol e Number of Pins The number of pins in the symbol Library Executive User s Guide Library Publisher Chapter 15 Library Commands Bounding Rectangle Size The dimensions of the selection box surrounding the symbol graphics e List of Comp References A list of the component names in the curre
311. rary button to navigate to and select the libraries you want to add to the set Library Executive User s Guide 45 Chapter 4 Libraries Creating and Updating Libraries 5 Navigate to the Demo folder in the P CAD installation directory and choose Demo lib Click Open Demo 1ib appears in the Members box 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add the library Ale tutor libinthe Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory to the library set MYSET 7 Click Close To view the contents of the library set click the Source Browser button on the toolbar to access the Source Browser tree 8 Expand both the root of the tree and library set MYSET to view its contents Source Browser ol x W DEFAULT LIBRARY SET amp Hl CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib W MYSET amp f CAPCAD2001 Demo Dema lib amp Hl CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib To add another library to the set you can simply select the set in the Source Browser tree and choose Add library from the shortcut menu Accessing the Save To Library Command Choose the Save To Library command to update or create a P CAD component library The Save To Library command can be accessed from the Source Browser the File Menu and the Table Menu The location from which you choose the Save To Library command defines the components you intend to store in the library For example choosing Save To Library from a Query Result table stores the components listed in that Query Resu
312. rary command from the Table menu to open the Save Source dialog Save Source x Source Cross Link Result 20 Save Mode E Library C Create New EX Update c PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Create new components Update only components with matching library name Iv Create componenttime stamps if not present Attribute Conflict Resolution Favor Attribute Name ignore Sourcefibrary Part Number Ix Ix Ix ET 5 RefDesPrefix 6 Description 2 Select the Update option button 3 Click the Library button navigate to the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory andselectthe Ale tutor lib library Click Open The selected library name displays in the edit box There are no new components in the imported MRP file Leave the Create new components box cleared Since the MRP file does not contain a ComponentLibrary attribute leave the Update only components with matching library name box cleared Library Executive User s Guide 179 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources 4 Select the Create component time stamps if not present check box when adding or updating the ModifyDate attribute in the component library 5 Select the Source check box only to the right of the attribute Quantity since only that attribute will be updated 6 Click Ignore to the right of all remaining attributes 7 Click OK Notice that
313. rary components are viewed queried verified or used in a report If for example the library contents are modified by another designer you can refresh the library contents in Library Executive by selecting the library and choosing Reload Remove Removes the selected source from the Source Browser You can also press the DELETE key Rename Renames the library set Report Opens the Report dialog where you can set up and generate a report on the selected source Save to Library Opens the Save Source dialog where you can create or update a P CAD library from the selected source Verify Opens the Verify dialog where you can generate a difference report comparing the selected source to a P CAD library or library set View Opens the selected pattern symbol or source Viewer Keyboard Shortcuts The Library Executive spreadsheet editors have specific P CAD keyboard features in addition to some standard Windows accelerators shortcut keys They are listed in the following table Press these keys To do this ALT F4 Closes the active dialog If no dialog is active this works as a shortcut for Component Exit or File Exit which exits the Library Exit Executive program If the current component has been modified since the last save you will be prompted whether you want to save the changes The program will write information to the cmp ini file when you exit CTRL C A shortcut for Edit Copy
314. rce Browser You can also press the DELETE key 92 Library Executive User s Guide The Source Browser Interface Chapter 7 The Source Browser The following diagram illustrates the shortcut commands available for each source in the Source Browser New Library Set Delete New Comma delimited File Rename Add Library Source Browser IISQUE View a Sources Heload B IT DEFAULT LIBRARY SET idus B D C Accelt 3 1DEMOSsmI2 lib Eres line E Components RUN Vey Gb CAP300 Em enm Mm e Gb RES400 Schematic SE Patterns Report CAP300 RES400 Ez Remove a Symbols View DISCRETE 208 N Reload DISCRETE 224 N E o ENT ET Query BH C M4ccell3 1 DEMO ALE_SAMPLE_MRP_FILE Cross Link E Cross Link Result 1 Verify E Query Result 1 Report Remove Save To Library sis Delete Attributes BEWVS Reload View Query Cross Link Query Verify Cross Link Report Verify Save To Library Report Save To Library Map Fields This chapter summarizes the Source Browser its contents and its function as the take off point to the other Library Executive features For additional information about the use of Query Cross Link Verify Reports Place and Save To Library from the Source Browser refer to Accessing Other Features page 99 The Source Browser Interface To open the Source Browser click the Source Browser button on the Library Execut
315. reation of the new component The Component Name dialog displays 36 Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Component Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial tees 7400 v 3 Name the new component 7400 and click OK 4 Close the Component Information dialog by clicking on the Close button x Using the Source Browser The Source Browser can be used to display all of the component data currently available in the P CAD Library Executive We will add our new library to the Default Library Set that will load every time you access the Library Executive and then check the contents of the new library using the Source Browser 1 Toaccess the Source Browser click the Source Browser button on the Library Executive toolbar or choose View Source Browser from the menu The Source Browser window displays Source Browser Pm x D DEFAULT LIBRARY SET The Source Browser is organized in a tree like structure that shows the relationship between the component data sources The tree structure allows you to view all Library Executive library sets and their contents at various levels of detail by expanding or collapsing the branches of the tree To expand a branch simply click the 4 to the right of its name Expanded branches are shown with a sign To collapse the branch click the sign 2 To add our new library to the Default Library Set right click on DEFAULT_LIBRARY_SET and choose Add Library from the shortcut m
316. rent sorting orders See Viewer Menu Commands page 131 for more information Library Executive User s Guide 125 Chapter 9 Importing Data from an External Source Importing a Character Separated File Display Selecting Boolean data type displays True or False attribute values Selecting Integer displays these attributes as the integers 0 or 1 The mapped field values are attributes that can be used to update verify or search components in the imported file or library Read only attributes are for search and display purposes only The default data type String is always used when saving the remaining attributes to a P CAD library Read only attributes cannot be modified nor saved to a P CAD library These attributes are displayed in red on the imported file Viewer When the Original Field Name is mapped to a New Field Name the field type is automatically updated in the Mapping column The field type indicates whether the attribute is a primary key a predefined attribute or a user defined attribute 5 You can map the original field name to more than one P CAD recognized field name Click the Add Row button to add an additional row to the end of the table A list of original field names from the separated list source file is available in the first column This one to many mapping may be useful when your corporate database is indexed differently than a P CAD library For example the database contains two 7400 components produced b
317. ress F1 for online Help Creating a New Library First we will create a new library to house the symbol pattern and component we will make To create a new library 1 Open P CAD Library Executive You can open the Library Executive as a program by itself or by choosing Utils Library Executive from the main menu of P CAD Schematic or P CAD PCB The Library Executive window opens A Default Library Set appears in the Source Browser window P CAD 2001 Library Executive File Library Component Pattern Symbol Edit View Utis Help n s m x s e Bye sl e viele Source Browser Sources D DEFAULT LIBRARY SET ACCEL Technologies Inc 2 Choose library New The Library New dialog displays Library New 2 x Save in C3 Demo E e E Demo lib Modfax0 lib File name Mvlibran iH I Save as type Library File 16 z Cancel n LA 3 Navigate to the folder you want the library saved into e g the Demo folder in the P CAD installation directory 4 Type in the new library name e g Mylibrary 1ib and click Save A new library has been created in the Demo folder 22 Library Executive User s Guide Creating a New Symbol Chapter 3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New Symbol The new symbol we will create will be based on a symbol created by the Symbol Wizard This will give us the basic shape we require and then we will use the Symbol Editor to make some alterations 1 Create the new symbo
318. rget s are reported including the following information component name attribute source value and library value For each component multiple attributes and values may be reported depending on the attributes selected in the Select Source Attributes to Verify list of the Verify dialog The following file excerpt is a simple example of a verification report 140 Library Executive User s Guide Using Verify from PCB and Schematic Chapter 10 Library Verification j repart tc Notepad ol x Eile Edit Search Help Verify Source C PCAD2001 Demo Sourcel lib Against Target Library C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Component Property Source Target CAP1000AP ComponentLibrary C PCAD2001 Demo Source1 lib NumberOfPads cc 2 NumberOfPins 0 2 NumberOfParts e 1 AlphaNumeric True False RefDesPrefix c PatternName CAP1000AP CreateDate 03 30 2000 12 00 22 lt Not Exist gt ModifyDate 03 30 2000 12 00 22 03 20 2000 12 11 08 Part Number 435 5487 238715 RES ComponentLibrary C PCAD2001 Demo Sourcel lib NumberOfPads 9 2 NumberOfPins 9 2 NumberOfParts 9 1 AlphaNumeric True False RefDesPrefix R PatternName RES300 CreateDate 03 30 2000 12 00 22 lt Not Exist gt ModifyDate 03 30 2000 12 00 22 03 20 2000 08 20 54 Part Number 334 4589 479802 s J n The verification report is a difference report It does not include attributes that are the same in both the source and the target library It also does not include attributes th
319. riel Normal From the Viewer dialog you can access many of the Library Executive features and functions including query verification and reports Also components selected in the Viewer can be placed directly into a P CAD PCB or Schematic design The file Viewer dialog is a spreadsheet Refer to the information in About the Spreadsheet Views page 10 for details on manipulating spreadsheets Each of the Viewer dialogs are identical independent of the source However the commands that may be accessed from the Viewer menu vary For a summary of the Viewer dialog menu commands refer to Viewer Menu Commands page 15 For information on the Imported Source File Viewer refer to Importing Data from an External Source page 121 For information on the Query Results Viewer refer to Querying Libraries page 103 The commands accessible from a P CAD library and Cross Link Results Viewers are the same as from a Query Result Viewer About the Spreadsheet Views 10 In Library Executive each of the three view dialogs Pattern View Symbol View and Pins View contains a spreadsheet displaying information about the pin pad association of the component The Query dialog and the file Viewer are also spreadsheets These dialogs display the component attributes and or their search criteria This section describes the spreadsheet views of Library Executive It includes detailed definitions of the fundamental building blocks of a component Info
320. rientations Tab This dialog allows you to specify which pattern graphics are to be used for a specific orientation Library Pattern Graphics Target Pattem Altemates Orientations h Primary Pattern Graphics fPimay el ao T Display Pattern in Orientation o 8H P 180 fmm y 270 pmo i Bottom Rotation Pimm E 9 wa Sid Q 180 Imo 1 270 Paw Use Rotation Cancel Apply Pattern Changes to Library The dialog contains the following fields Primary Pattern Graphics This field allows you to select which pattern graphics are the primary or default pattern graphics for the pattern The drop down list shows all of the associated pattern graphics for the pattern The default entry is Primary You can select any of the pattern graphics in the list to change the default primary pattern Top and Bottom Rotation Frames This frame contains editable fields for selecting which of the associated pattern graphics will be used for specific rotations Up to eight different pattern graphics can be used to represent various component orientations depending on whether the component is flipped Bottom Rotation or unflipped Top Rotation and whether it is rotated by 0 90 180 or 270 By default all fields will be filled with the name of the selected Primary pattern graphics To select a different pattern graphic for a rotation left click on an entry in the drop down list The Primary pa
321. ries with P CAD Schematic and P CAD PCB you must translate them first using Library Executive Once your libraries have been translated if you intend Library Executive User s Guide 191 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources to use them with both P CAD applications you need to merge the converted pattern libraries into the converted symbol libraries This section uses a simple example to walk you through three conversion scenarios e You want to convert Tango PCB libraries into P CAD format e You want to convert Tango Schematic into P CAD format e You want to create integrated P CAD libraries from converted pattern and symbol libraries Conversion Example For this example make the following assumptions e You have two Tango PCB pattern libraries pcb1 1ib and pcb2 1lib e Pcbl lib contains a pattern called DIP14 e Pcb2 1ib contains a pattern called LLC20 e You have one Tango Schematic library sch1 1ib e Schl lib contains two components called SN5400J and SN5400FK e Component SN5400 has a reference to a pattern called DIP14 e Component SN5400FK has a reference to a pattern called LLC20 Tango PCB Only To translate your Tango PCB pattern libraries choose the Library Translate command The Library Translate dialog appears 1 First you would translate pcb1 1ib 2 Click the Source Library button to display the Library File Listing dialog where you can choose your pattern
322. rmat Options Eg Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Component Name Set All RefDes Prefix Clear All Number of Pins Homogeneous Bate Numbering Number of Gates Attached Pattern Name List of Alias Names Gate Table Pin Table Attribute Table This dialog allows you to specify the contents of the component section These options are described below Component Name The name of the component Re Des Prefix The reference designator prefix Number of Pins The number of pins on the component Homogeneous Whether or not the component is homogeneous In a homogeneous component all gates use the same symbol Gate Numbering Whether the gate numbering in the reference designator is alphabetic or numeric Number of Gates The number of gates in the component Attached Pattern Name The name of the pattern attached to the component List of Alias Names The alias names of equivalent components in the same library Gate Table Publishes the Gate Table for the component This table is displayed in the Component Information dialog and includes the following information Gate Gate Eq Normal IEEE and DeMorgan Refer to View Commands page 255 for additional details Pin Table Publishes the Pin Table for the component This table is displayed in the Pins View dialog and includes the following information Pin Gate Sym Pin Pin Name Gate Eq Pin Eq and Elec Type Refer to View Commands page 255 for addition
323. rmation about spreadsheet editing techniques and shortcuts can be found in Spreadsheet Editing page 12 Library Executive User s Guide About the Spreadsheet Views Chapter 2 Library Basics Spreadsheet Columns The columns which appear in all three common Library view dialogs are used as follows e Row Number Each row number represents a pattern pad if a pattern is attached Pins View GI x Pattern View Symbol View Pad 1 1 Pad PinDes Gate SymPin PinName GateEa FinEa Elec Type 1 1 3 A 1 1 Input 2 2 1 2 B 1 1 Input e Pin Des The pin designator is the name assigned to each pad pin association e Gate The gate number defines the gate on which the pin is located In multi gate components the gates are uniquely numbered from 1 through n e Sym Pin The number of the pin on the attached symbol Symbol pin numbers must be unique and must exist in the attached symbol e Pin Name The pin name for the corresponding pad pin association e Gate Eq The gate equivalence column indicates which gates within a component or between components of the same type are logically equivalent and may be swapped by choosing the Utils Optimize Nets gate swap command For two gates to be considered logically equivalent the Gate Eq values must be identical and non zero Equivalent gates must have the same number of pins A zero value shown as a blank in the spreadsheet indicates that the gate
324. rom the Field list e To add additional fields to a filled spreadsheet click the Add Row button A new row appears at the end of the Field list 106 Library Executive User s Guide Setting up a Query Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Search Fields A search field is used to specify your component search criteria To make a field a search field you must define search criteria in the Criteria And and Or columns of the Query dialog See Selecting the Search Criteria page 107 and And Versus Or page 112 for more information Display Fields A display field is included in the query results To make a field a display field select the Show check box next to the field name in the Field list You can search for a field and not display its value in the Query Result table To do so specify a search criterion for the field but clear its Show check box Selecting the Search Criteria To complete any component search you must specify what you are looking for Search criteria define a condition that a component attribute must satisfy in order for the component to be acceptable To specify search criteria you must determine three things e The Field you wish to search e The Data Type of that Field e The Query operator and values to limit the Field values This section discusses query operators including wildcard characters These are the fundamentals needed to create any component search Special Search Criteria by Data Type page 109
325. rrors You cannot save a component using the Save or Save As command if an error exists Library Executive User s Guide 243 CHAPTER 1 T Pattern Commands The Library Executive Pattern commands accesses the P CAD Pattern Editor In the Pattern Editor you can quickly create a new pattern using the Pattern Wizard or edit an existing pattern These patterns can at some future time be attached to a design component All Pattern commands are accessible in Library Executive only The Pattern menu accesses the P CAD Pattern Editor an application that simplifies and automates pattern creation The Pattern Editor is partnered with the Library Executive and is one of the many P CAD Library Executive enhancements Pattern New The Pattern New command starts the Pattern Editor program with the Pattern Wizard in the workspace Pattern Open The Pattern Open command starts the Pattern Editor program and opens a dialog where you can navigate to and choose the pattern to be edited The pattern can be in a pattern file pat ora component library 1ib Library Executive User s Guide 245 CHAPTER 1 8 Symbol Commands The Library Executive Symbol commands accesses the P CAD Symbol Editor In the Symbol Editor you can quickly create a new symbol using the Symbol Wizard or edit an existing symbol These symbols can at some future time be attached to a design component All Symbol commands are accessible in Library Executive only Th
326. rt limitations eee 122 importing eec ee ise ete io 198 comma delimited file example ecdesiae taste 168 Comma separated File View command 260 compact program 57 compacting libraries sess 57 component j O searching from PCB sss searching from Schematic Component Attr Edit command 281 282 Component Commands ze ERES OPO Noro rit ertet e oia DAVE sce Sedit etude in ari ist Dunes Save As Validate tette Component Info View command 255 Component Information dialog 255 Component Viewer accessing from Source Browser 96 ComponentName see 105 associating with imported attributes 127 importing a file With sess 169 importing a file without 127 components adding attributes ee sss 130 description sercsissnenserinianrioriiraia 48 importing attributes sss 121 placing from an imported file 135 placing from the Source Browser 164 placing from the Viewer placing requirements ss publishing library components PEN AMC aerei recita elo rf dis saving errors nisa ar ER saving to a different name or library 243 search output sse 113 searching for sss 103 setting up a search sss 108
327. rting Data from an External Source sources have one common attribute This common attribute will be used to link the sources together In this example the common attribute will be ComponentName but it could be anything With these two source files you could e Combine the attributes in Source 1 and 2 to produce a component containing complete attribute information from both sources that can be placed on a PCB or Schematic design e Use a combination of attributes from both sources to verify or update components in a P CAD library e Generate a report about the components which includes the attributes from both sources Source 1 is a P CAD library that has all the component attributes needed for an integrated library component and contains four attributes ComponentName Attr1 Attr2 and Attr3 Source 2 contains component attributes from an external source and also includes information about cost and availability of some of the library Source 1 components Specifically source 2 has the ComponentName and Attr3 attributes Instead of Attr1 and Attr2 this source contains Attr5 and Attr6 Cross Link Example 1 In example number one both ComponentName and Attr3 are used to link the fields between the two source files The result of this cross link is a file containing only components matching the ComponentName and Attr3 field values Cross Link Example 2 In this example only the field ComponentName is used This second cross li
328. rting pad number and increment value before placing pads See Pad Placement page 69 for details e Place Ref Point Place Glue Point Place Pick Point and Place Test Point Separate place commands replace the PCB Place Point command Toolbar buttons provide easy access to these commands See Placing Points page 74 for details e Utils Renumber Unlike PCB pad renumbering in Pattern Editor can be performed automatically by dragging the mouse over a series of pads Pads can also be renumbered manually by selecting one pad at a time See Renumbering Pads page 70 for details e Utils Validate Allows you to validate a pattern before saving it to a library See Working with Pattern Files page 65 for details Pattern Wizard Pattern Wizard automates pattern generation providing a quick way to create a pattern A pattern created with Pattern Wizard is like any other pattern you can modify it save it as a pattern file and save it to a library To open Pattern Wizard 1 Make sure no pads have been placed in the active window 2 Choose Pattern Pattern Wizard to open the Pattern Wizard dialog shown in the following figure Library Executive User s Guide 61 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Pattern Wizard 62 F P CAD 2001 Pattern Editor Modfax Untitled3 Primary ioj x il Pattem Edit View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help mI x fe ojejele Haele mila tester ef sl
329. ry Verify View and Reload are also accessible through the shortcut menus Browsing Components Patterns and Symbols 96 From the Source Browser you can view the contents of a library including its components patterns and symbols by following these steps 1 Expand a library set and one of the libraries contained within it by clicking the sign to their left Inside a library are three items components patterns and symbols In the Source Browser tree shown in the following figure some of these items have been expanded to expose the contents of the library Source Browser Ol x Sources a DEFAULT LIBRARY SET a C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutorlib 0 CAPCAD2001 Demo Dema lib Components amp di Patterns t Symbols af CA PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Library Executive User s Guide Browsing Components Patterns and Symbols Chapter 7 The Source Browser The component icon in the Source Browser indicates whether the component has an attached pattern or symbol as shown below Component Icon Description s A component with no pattern or symbol attached EE A component with only a pattern attached ET A component with only a symbol attached B1 A component with both a pattern and symbol attached 2 Ifyou select a component in the Source Browser tree you can choose the Open or Place commands from the shortcut menu to open or place the selected item 3 You can
330. ry Executive User s Guide chapter 14 chapter 15 vi Converting LIbraries 5 inier it tete Etre pre Ve ELE vna tee ERR Eyes 191 Working with External Libraries sem 191 Uude 192 Tango Schematic Only i center eee d rete ee eB eoe ue e ce ego tete os 193 Tango PCB and Schematic sssini oike en t ederet reo qned ru ties 194 File Commands File Import e tiere oxi beni 197 The Import Separated List File Dialog e m 197 Importing a Separated List File rnissu een 198 Fil Map FIGIdS 22 E cesbabenyaveeneee 199 The Map Fields Dialog ii ciccsceccceateetesscdeee seh ctnyeacngerdecds erevernessdeachetdtpoeeeusutesvbeatinecsutees 199 Using the Map Fields Command seen eene 200 File Cross Link einer ctt Leer eire tede tee dI eerte Ed edd deerunt 201 The Cross Link Dialog ento pei teet eine nnn eder ka deret ka tire ean dentur 201 Using the Cross Link Command seen emen emere 202 INIM CE 204 File Save To Library A E backs chen nade E AT E a cea LARReR UT Ae RR RERO 205 Pile Verifye aE 207 File Reporta c 208 Generating a Report Fileki e aa a ede Qai nei i uadon 209 Fil EXI 045 rti ERE e NER M EAE SE E E Gushas tees evan EA EET 210 Library Commands Using the Library Commands sss enm eene nennen enne 211 library Ie c EM MN
331. s 5 NumberOfPins amp NumberOfParts 7 Homogeneous 8 AlphaNumeric 3 HesIEEE 10 HasDemorgan 31 RetDesPrefix 32 PettenNeme 13 ComponentHeight 14 Description 35 Link isl Library Setup AddRow Add Column Query Step 2 Setting up the Query Dialog In this case you would like to place a capacitor In the sample library all capacitors have the letters CAP somewhere in their component name The expression for this search criteria is ComponentName IsLike CAP The two wildcards indicate that CAP can be in the beginning end or middle of the name Since there is only one criterion it will be placed in the Criteria And column of the Query dialog 1 Ifthe Ale tutor lib is not in the Open Libraries box click the Library Setup button and add the sample library Click OK to return to the Query dialog 2 Inthe Open Libraries box verify that the Ale tutor lib is selected If there are any other open libraries clear the check box to their left 3 Click in the Criteria And column to the right of the ComponentName field an arrow appears Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features 4 Click the arrow to display a list from which you should select the IsLike operator Enter the expression IsLike CAP The embedded Query dialog should look like the following Query Lx Open Libraries SetAll Clear All Sc
332. s query results cross link results and P CAD libraries From the File Menu Choose Verify from the File menu to verify the mapped imported source file against a specified P CAD library or library set 138 Library Executive User s Guide Setting up the Verify Dialog Chapter 10 Library Verification Setting up the Verify Dialog To compare a P CAD library or library set to a source follow these steps 1 Choose Verify to open the Verify dialog Verify C PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib Select Source Attributes To Verify Select Target Library Set Library To Verify MAlias E DEFAULT LIBRARY SET MAlphaNumeric CAPCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_tutor lib ViComponentLibrary CAPCAD2001 Demo Source lib v ComponentName ComponentType Cost Description MHasDemorgan vi HaslEEE Homogeneous ModifyDate viNumberOfPads viNumberOfParts viNumberOfPins Lan aieo il Browse T List components not found in library I Verify only components with matching library reportot Set component verify time stamp View Report i See Accessing the Verify Command above for details on how to choose the Verify command to check the consistency of different sources 2 The Select Source Attributes to Verify box lists the attributes in the selected source All selected attributes are verified against a P CAD library or library set Selected attributes are indicated by the check mark The Verify command uses source component
333. s a row to the query table The Add Column button adds another Or column to the Query dialog e Query Click the Query button to begin the search for components satisfying the specified criteria Additional information on the Query utility can be found in Querying Libraries page 103 Utils Shortcut Directory At the time you installed your P CAD product suite a sub directory named ShortcutDirectory was created in the P CAD directory The ShortcutDirectory contains a list of web addresses for semiconductor manufacturers To access this directory 1 Choose the Utils ShortcutDirectory command to open the ShortcutDirectory in Windows Explorer 2 Select the desired address and choose Open from the shortcut menu or double click on the desired address to start the shortcut Shortcuts to any web site can be added to the ShortcutDirectory Utils PCB Starts P CAD PCB if that program is installed on your computer Refer to your P CAD PCB User s Guide for additional information Utils Schematic 264 Starts P CAD Schematic if that program is installed on your computer Refer to your P CAD Schematic User s Guide for additional information Library Executive User s Guide Utils Pattern Editor Chapter 21 Utils Commands Utils Pattern Editor Starts P CAD Pattern Editor Utils Symbol Editor Starts P CAD Symbol Editor Utils Customize The Utils Customize command allows you to define access to other applications from
334. s from the Source Browser by selecting the query result from the Source Browser tree and choosing Save To Library from the shortcut menu Placing Components To place a component into P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic from the Query Result Viewer 1 Select the row containing the desired component information 2 Choose Place in the Row menu 3 Dragthe mouse to the right over the arrowhead to select the desired application PCB or Schematic If you have accessed Query from either a PCB Component Properties dialog or a Schematic Parts Properties dialog a Replace button appears in the upper left corner of the Query Result Viewer To replace the current component with a selected component in the Query Result Viewer click the Replace button You can also select the component from the Source Browser tree and choose Place PCB or Place Schematic from the shortcut menu For more information about placing components in a P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic design see Component Placement page 163 Accessing Query and Query Results There are several locations in Library Executive from which you can access the Query dialog and the Query Result Viewers Accessing Query from the Source Browser Query results are stored on the Source Browser tree The shortcut menu on a query result allows you to view the query Viewer spreadsheet generate a report save the query to a library or query again You can access the Query dialog from the Source Browser
335. s of simple lessons that will teach you how to work with the extended Library Executive features including e Importing and Updating a Library from an external source file e Importing an external source file without the ComponentName field e Using Query to selectively update a library e Using Query to find and place a component e Reporting on component library updates e Verifying your design against a library e Verifying your libraries against an external source file e Creating a component from the imported file with help from the Pattern and Symbol Editors e Converting libraries from other sources e g Tango Getting Setup for Learning The following information is needed to perform the lessons you will learn in these lessons The Sample Files Four sample files are used in the following lessons These files include two external source files a map file and one P CAD library All of the sample files can be found in the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory Make a backup of the original sample files before beginning these lessons Modifications made to the source file such as during field mapping are saved automatically Library Executive User s Guide 167 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources 168 The external source files contain attributes that are associated with many of the components included in the sample P CAD library For example one such attribute is Qu
336. scription This is a description of what the component actually is Manufacturer This is the company that actually makes the component Class This is the general class that the component falls into e g Communication Logic Sub Class This is the more specific sub class that the component falls into e g for the Logic class the component might fall into the sub class of Gate Register Switch etc Datasheet Date Rev This is the date revision number of the datasheet associated with the component Package Code This is the manufacturer s code for the component package Package Type This is the type of package that the component comes in e g DIP CAN Footprint Code This is the name of the associated pattern that is used for the component in the PCB Editor SIM Model File This is the associated model file for the component If the component has an entry in this field then the component can be simulated Revision History This is an entry showing when the component was first available in P CAD and any subsequent modifications that have been made Each library name is based on the manufacturer s name and the library sub class The library class is also included when necessary to distinguish between sub classes For example the NEC 8 bit Microcontrollers are in a library called NEC Microcontroller 8 Bit lib and the Analog Devices operational amplifiers are in a library called AD Operational Amplifier lib
337. ser s Guide or P CAD Schematic User s Guide for information about these products About this Manual This manual is a combined user s guide and reference manual for P CAD Library Executive Chapter 2 Chapter 2 is useful for setting up and learning how to use the basics of Library Executive Chapter 3 Chapter 3 consists of a tutorial that takes you through the process of creating a new library with new symbols patterns and components Chapter 4 Chapter 4 describes library concepts such as how patterns symbols and components occupy the same library the use of component pattern and symbol aliases and the important distinction between pin designators and pad or pin numbers Chapter 5 and 6 Chapter 5 and 6 summarize the features available in the Pattern Editor and Symbol Editor These editors include the Pattern and Symbol Wizard quick and easy utilities that jump start component creation Library Executive User s Guide 1 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Library Executive User s Guide Installation and Setup Chapter 7 to 13 Chapters 7 through 13 describes the Source Browser and Query features as well as how to import component data from a non P CAD source update create and verify libraries and produce reports Chapter 14 to 22 Chapters 14 through 22 contain the Command Reference for Library Executive They are useful for looking up specific information about the program commands They list and describe all of the menu commands in
338. sie nus Ir Ext ia Number Of Pads Down rm zl Number Of Pads Across ionomi 2 Pad to Pad Spacing On Center 300 0mi Pattern width Em H Pattem Height hoo 4 Pad 1 Position Pad Style Pad 1 Default Rotate Pad Style Other Joss rl v Rotate V Sik Screen iOm 4 Sik Line width nomi sik Rectangle Width 700 0mil sik Rectangle Height Arc v Notch Type Current Pattem Graphics Primary Click Left to single Select Ctrl Left for multiple or drag for block select 320800 0 94000 Abs 100 0 wr ro zw fno zl Pattern Wizard displays the last pattern you created The left side of the wizard contains the fields you need to complete to create a pattern the right side displays the pattern you are creating in a window Notice this window is like any other Pattern Editor window You can resize this window use zoom in and out and place objects into it The Pattern Wizard contains the following items e Pattern Type The pattern type may be set to DIP QUAD or ARRAY to indicate the type of pattern you want to create The remaining fields change depending on your selection e Number of Pads Down A DIP pattern specifies the number of total pads For example 14 pads indicate 7 pads on each side of the DIP pattern For QUAD or ARRAY pattern types specifies the number of pads along each side of the pattern e Number of Pads Across Specifies the number of
339. space until a custom tool has been added Once a tool has been added the toolbar automatically appears with the other Library Executive toolbars The appearance of the Custom Toolbar in the workspace is turned on or off by choosing the View Custom Toolbar command Executing a Custom Tool To start an application added as a Custom Tool choose one of these methods Click the desired button on the Custom Toolbar Choose the tool from the list at the bottom of the Utils menu While the Utils menu is active select a custom tool by pressing the menu shortcut key assigned to it For instance if Notepad was set up with the N shortcut key press the N key Library Executive User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Help Commands P CAD Library Executive provide extensive online help that contains both reference and tutorial information but differs from the manual in its format and accessibility The main advantages to online help are the availability of hypertext links between related subjects an electronic cross reference utility and the keyword search function an electronic index Help Topics The Library Executive Help Topics command displays the online help for Library Executive It includes the Contents tab which is structured to match the order of commands as they appear in the product and the Index tab which lets you look up a specific concept or keyword How to Use Help The How to Use Help command connects you to the Windows help syste
340. specifying an empty row unused pad or power pin They must both be set to a non zero value to specify any other pin 5718 Pin number _ in row _ exceeds the The pin number in any row can never exceed the number of pads pins number of pads when a pattern is attached or can never exceed the total number of pins when no pattern is attached reentering the gate equivalence for each gate in the Component Information dialog 5720 Gate has multiple Gate Eq values Multiple rows with the same gate number have first found in row amp differing gate equivalences 5721 Equivalent gates and 4 have a Multiple gates with the same gate equivalence different number of pins value other than 0 must have the same number of pins 5722 Gate is missing Gate numbers must The spreadsheet is missing information for a gate be contiguous for homogeneous There are no rows that correspond to the gate components number found in the Component Information 5719 The gate equivalence specified in It is possible to get the gate equivalence to differ Component Information for gate between the spreadsheet values and the values does not match the pin s gate specified in the Component Information dialog equivalence specified in row Correct the values so that they match by dialog Library Executive User s Guide 277 Appendix B System Messages Library Message Listing Error Number Message Comment 5723 The same pin on equi
341. splay of the Pin Des in the Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog To number the pin designators on the pads you placed 1 Choose the Select tool 2 Changeto the layer on which the pads are placed Library Executive User s Guide 71 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Default Pin Designators in the Wizard 3 SNO nox Choose Utils Renumber to open the Utils Renumber dialog Utils Renumber Type Pad Number Cancel di Starting PinDes fi Increment Value Select Default Pin Designator for the Type Specify Starting PinDes and Increment Value as appropriate Click OK Notice that the cursor changes to the crosshair shape You are in a temporary mode of assigning numbers so every time you hold down the left button and drag it over a pad you renumber that pad s Default Pin Designator You can also click a pad to renumber it For example the Default Pin Designator of the first pad you drag the mouse over would be number A1 if Starting PinDes was specified as A the second pad number A2 if the Increment Value was specified as 1 As you drag the mouse over a pad while in the Renumber Pin Des mode it shows that a default pin designator has been assigned Once a pad s DPD is renumbered you cannot change its DPD without rerunning the Renumber command The Status Line information area displays the Default Pin Designator every time you re number The N key increments the pad about to be renumb
342. sponding value in the right column e Adding an Attribute Click the Add button to open the Attribute Property dialog Enter a name and value for the attribute and set attribute properties Click OK and the attribute is added to the table Library Executive User s Guide 67 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Pattern Graphics in the Pattern Editor e Viewing or Changing Attribute Properties Select an attribute from the table and click the Properties button or double click the attribute to open the Attribute Property dialog to view or change an attribute s properties e Deleting an Attribute Select an attribute in the table and click Delete or press the DELETE key e Launching a reference link When the special attribute Reference whose value is a reference link is added to the pattern you can select the Reference attribute and click the Launch button to start an application access a web address or open a document For details about this function refer to your P CAD PCB User s Guide Pattern Graphics in the Pattern Editor 68 This feature allows you to set up multiple and varying pattern graphics for the patterns associated with components This allows differing pattern graphics to be automatically applied for a component depending on whether the component is placed on the top or bottom of the board how it is rotated and the chosen direction of solder flow Pattern graphics can be added to a primary base pattern through the Pattern E
343. ss link result an imported file or a P CAD library 1 Choose the Report command to open the Report dialog When reporting on an imported file choose File Report Other reports can be generated by selecting the item query result cross link result imported file or P CAD library in the Source Browser tree and choosing Report from the shortcut menu A report on the current Viewer contents can be made by choosing the Table Report command The Report command reports on the current contents of Library Executive memory as displayed in the Viewer Report does not report on the original source file If changes have been made to a library choose Reload to refresh the library components in Library Executive memory before generating the report The Report dialog displays 146 Library Executive User s Guide Publishing a P CAD Library Chapter 11 Reports Report C Program FilesXP CAD 2001 Demo Modfax0_lib Header Footer Page Format r Style Format Dutput Destination Jv Use Header cj i C Screen Iv use Footer E Report Ol File V Date Page List Separator C Printer Jv Pagination z E m Eas Lines per Page jes Dutput Filename Filename REPORT TXT Columns o ce 2 Selectthe report format in the Style Format frame e Delimiter Separated A delimiter separated report output with formatting specifications e Report Generates an ASCII report file The ASCII report is more rea
344. st attribute in the library will be updated This lesson assumes that you have already set up the Ale tutor lib so itis available for Library Executive If not open the Source Browser and select the DEFAULT LIBRARY SET Choose Add Library to add the sample library to the default set You can follow along the next few sections using the sample files to complete each of these steps yourself Step 1 Select the Source to Query Again you will be using the sample file Ale crosslink txt to update the sample library Ale tutor 1ib If this file is not presently in your Source Browser import the file To select the A1e crosslink txt file to Query 1 Click the Source Browser toolbar button to open the Source Browser tree 2 SelectAle crosslink txt and choose Query from the shortcut menu Library Executive User s Guide 181 Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Import and Export from External Sources Query CAPCAD2001YTutoriaMAle crosslink txt Setall Clear all Iv New Result Table Field Show Criteria And Tr Part Number fx 2 Quantity fx Vendor x 4 Cost fx Add Bow Add Column Query Cancel Step 2 Setting Up the Query Dialog In this case you want to update only components that are produced by CTS The expression for this search criterion is Vendor CTS Since there is only one criterion it will be placed in the Criteria And column of the Query dialog To set up the Query dialog follow these
345. stom Tools executing ids eon tuor ess Customize Utils command Cut Spreadsheet Selection Edit command M 249 D data types eerte 105 as search criteria 109 dates TOI atte ert ee er ete searching for sse default pin designators Delete Library command deleting a library item sse 219 attributes 5 eee hop neis 98 design updating after verification 143 dialog convention esee 3 dialogs Attributes saunris an 67 Library Executive User s Guide Component Format Options 150 Component Information ate Component Name sse Component Open sse Cross Link n Cross Link Result Viewer 203 Customize Report sss 155 File Reports Footer Format Options 152 Import Files Library Alias Library Browse 65 213 Library Copy ceesseesssessssesessesesseseseeseseees Library Delete X Library Format Options 150 Library Merge Patterns 229 Library Publisher S Library Rename sese Library Setup sssseeeeee Library Translate Map Fields eee Master Designer to P CAD SCH Layer MapplHhg cederet tete 223 Open New Component 241 Open Pattern Editor Pattern Format Options x Pattern Save To Library
346. t Number Attribute to a Library When importing an MRP file that does not contain the ComponentName field some connection must be defined that associates a P CAD library component with its MRP entry This association can be completed in a variety of ways The most automated technique is through the use of a map file In this section you will be completing the miniature import update process of adding the Part Number attribute to a P CAD component library This attribute is the unique index identifier of the MRP database Once added Library Executive will automatically know which component you are referring to when you import a component identified solely by a Part Number The map file is a simple comma delimited external source file This file provides the cross reference between the ComponentName and Part Number fields With the information in the map file you will merge the external file s data with the associated component data in the P CAD library To add the Part Number to the library 1 Choose File Import to open the Import Separated List File dialog Import Separated List File Ix CA PCAD2001 Tutorial Ale_map tt First line contains field names C Generate defaultfield names List Separator EA na Comment Character 2 Click the Browse button Navigate to the Tutorial folder in the P CAD installation directory and select the comma delimited source file Ale map txt 174 Library Executive User s Guide Imp
347. t Pattern The Edit Select Pattern command allows you to select a pattern from the current library and attach it to the current component You can attach a pattern if it resides in the same library as the component When you choose Edit Select Pattern the Library Browse dialog opens displaying all patterns in the current library Library Browse Pattern RefDes x ACE 8 C 3 Jd Gd c ad 2 Library Executive User s Guide 251 Chapter 19 Edit Commands Edit Component Attribute Select a pattern and click OK The Pins View spreadsheet automatically adds a row for each pad in the pattern and automatically fills in the PinDes column Edit Component Attribute The Edit Component Attribute command allows you to view add modify or delete component attributes and values If you assign an attribute to a component it is attached to that component when you place it in P CAD PCB or P CAD Schematic When you choose the Edit Component Attribute command the Attributes dialog opens Attributes ic MECECGNEEENUENENSEN 7 NM RCNEEEEUEDNT Description Octal BUFFERS and LINE DRIVERS with 3 State Outputs Add Delete Properties UTI The dialog contains a two column table showing a collection of component attributes Within the collection each attribute s name and value appear in the column You can view add modify or delete a collection of component attributes and access re
348. t Selection command Edit Paste Spreadsheet Selection does not function within the Component Information dialog Edit Slide Selection Up The Edit Slide Selection Up command moves the selected spreadsheet information up one row You can use this command to slide cells partial or entire rows and one or more complete rows Edit Slide Selection Down The Edit Slide Selection Down command moves the selected spreadsheet information down one row You can use this command to slide cells partial or entire rows and one or more complete rows Edit Select Symbols The Edit Select Symbols command allows you to select one or more symbols from the current library to attach to the current component You can attach only symbols that reside in the same library as the component This command also can be chosen by clicking the Select Symbol button and by double clicking in either the Normal or Alternate Representations columns of the Component Information dialog When you choose the Edit Select Symbols command the Library Browse dialog opens displaying all symbols in the current library 250 Library Executive User s Guide Edit Select Pattern Chapter 19 Edit Commands Library Browse Symbol DISCRETE 52 N x i Cancel Select a symbol and click OK For homogeneous components the symbol is filled in for each gate in the component For heterogeneous components you need to assign a symbol to each gate Edit Selec
349. t sources can be linked together with the Cross Link command A Cross Link Result is added to the Source Browser after a Cross Link is complete This Cross Link Result contains a combination of the attributes in both sources For more information see Understanding Cross Linking page 130 Library Executive User s Guide 91 Chapter 7 The Source Browser Source Browser Commands From the Source Browser you can access almost all of the Library Executive commands These commands are detailed in Source Browser Shortcut Menu Commands page 17 A brief summary of each can be found in Source Browser Commands page 92 Source Browser Commands When you select a source in the Library Executive Source Browser and right mouse click a shortcut menu opens providing access to common commands performed on a selected object This menu changes depending on the object selected The commands available are summarized in the following table Choose this To do this Command Add Library Add a library to the selected library set New Comma Open the mport Comma delimited File dialog delimited File New Library Set Add a new library set Open the Component Information dialog Open the Place Component or Place Part dialog in the selected P CAD application Query Open the Query dialog Reload Reload an external file a library or a library set s contents into P CAD Library Executive Remove Remove the selected source from the Sou
350. target values from the target field are distinguished by their column header TARGET FieldName The field values for each of the components found are listed in the appropriate column For details on manipulating the Cross Link Result Viewer spreadsheet see Library Basics page 3 Understanding Cross Linking Cross linking is one of the most powerful features of P CAD Library Executive You can cross link between any two sources in P CAD Library Executive an external source file a P CAD library or library set a query result and a cross link result The output is a result in the Viewer spreadsheet that contains a combination of the component attributes originally in both sources The Cross Link command links the source files as they are in memory If changes have been made to a library used as the cross link source or target the Reload command refreshes the library components in Library Executive s memory before the Cross Link is performed To understand how cross linking can be used to combine data from various sources consider the following examples Setting up a Cross Link The examples in this section both work with the same two source files Source 1 contains 3 components A B and C source 2 contains only two components A and C Each of these sources contains different component attributes The only requirement for cross linking is that the two 130 Library Executive User s Guide Viewer Menu Commands Chapter 9 Impo
351. ted during placement using one of the following methods e To flip a pad as you are placing it press F while the pad is ghosted before final placement When you flip a pad the hole range does not flip with it e To rotate a pad as you are placing it press the R key while the pad is ghosted before final placement The resulting rotation angle is applied to the next pad you place Refer to your P CAD PCB User s Guide for additional information e To rotate or flip a pad after it has been placed select it and press R to rotate or F to flip The R key rotates the pad 90 degrees SHIFT R rotates by the rotation increment set in Options Configure Renumbering Pads The renumbering function in Pattern Editor unlike PCB supports single select pad renumbering and drag select for multiple pad renumbering Remember to turn on the display of the Pad Numbers in the Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog To number the pads you placed 1 Choose the Select tool 2 Changeto the layer on which the pads are placed 3 Choose Utils Renumber to open the Utils Renumber dialog 70 Library Executive User s Guide Renumbering Default Pin Designators Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor r Type C Default Pin Designator Cancel 1 Start Pad Number fi Increment Value 4 Specify Starting Pad Number and Increment Pad Number as appropriate 5 Click OK Notice that the cursor changes to the crosshair shape Yo
352. tered during the compaction process Once compaction is complete you can delete the original Mycustom lib file and the Custom err file Library Executive User s Guide 57 CHAPTER 5 The Pattern Editor Introducing Pattern Editor Pattern Editor allows you to create and modify patterns quickly Once created a pattern can be saved to a library or saved as a pattern file This file can be modified allowing you to create new patterns Pattern Editor includes the Pattern Wizard which automates pattern generation Pattern Editor contains a user friendly interface which is very similar to P CAD PCB This chapter lists the features which are unique to Pattern Editor It then describes the Pattern Editor interface detailing those features which are distinct from P CAD PCB Pattern Editor Features This section highlights some of the important Pattern Editor features The ability to load and save patterns or partially created patterns from a P CAD library Pattern Wizard automates pattern creation Utils Validate command allows you to validate a pattern before saving it to a library Enhanced Place Pad command to support automatic incrementing of pad numbers Enhanced manual pad renumbering supports single select pad renumbering and drag select for multiple pad renumbering The ability to automatically match a pin s default pin designator to the pin number All pattern attributes including RefDes and Type available from a single At
353. tern libraries there are two equivalence columns in the Pins View dialog that should be correctly completed the Gate Eq column and the Pin Eq column These columns and their contents are detailed in Library Basics page 3 The Gate Eq should be set to reflect actual gate equivalences If this information is not set correctly the Schematic Utils Renumber command the automatic RefDes increment feature in the Place 56 Library Executive User s Guide Errors that Prevent Saving a Component Chapter 4 Libraries Part command and the gate swapping functionality of the PCB Utils Optimize Nets command may not behave as expected The Pin Eq should be set to reflect actual pin equivalences If this information is not set correctly the pin swapping functionality of the PCB Utils Optimize Nets command may not behave as expected When the gate equivalence of a pin is filled in all other pins in that gate automatically have their gate equivalence changed to match Errors that Prevent Saving a Component You cannot save a component using the Save or Save As command if an error exists For a list of error messages see System Messages page 275 Copying Renaming and Using Aliases When you copy a component to another library you generally need to copy its pattern and symbol too If patterns and symbols referenced by the component are not in the same library as the component the component cannot be placed since its graphics are missi
354. that you want to make to the pattern graphics orientations click the Apply Pattern Changes to Library button to update and save to the source library the changes you have made to the target pattern e OK and Cancel Buttons Use the OK button to close the dialog after having updated and saved the pattern to the source library using the Apply Pattern Changes to Library button Use the Cancel button to exit the dialog without effecting any changes made Library Copy The Library Copy command copies an item from one file to another You can copy more than one object at a time from one library to another When you copy a component you can also copy the pattern and symbol that it references The source and destination libraries designated remain current for the length of the P CAD session Copying a Library Item 1 Choose library Copy to open the Library Copy dialog Library Executive User s Guide 217 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Copy 218 S sBwM Library Copy Source Library CAPCAD2001 Demo Dema lib CA PCAD2001 Demo Source lib m ltem Names r Copy Item Browse To Add Component C Pattern Item Types Component Multiple Source Names Symbol Destination Preferences C Overwrite Items Preserve Items M Copy Patterns w component Iv Copy Symbols w component Copy Single Destination Name enel Close Click Source Library to open the Library Select dialog
355. the Ale tutor lib library Click Open The selected library name displays in the edit box There are no new components in the imported MRP file Leave the Create new components box cleared Since the MRP file does not contain a ComponentLibrary attribute leave the Update only components with matching library name box cleared Select the Create component time stamps if not present check box when adding or updating the ModifyDate attribute in the component library All attributes that will be updated in the library are listed in the Attribute Conflict Resolution section In this section you can specify how to handle discrepancies between the source and the target library Since you wish to update only the Quantity attribute click the Source box to its right The MRP file data will be favored and the Quantity attribute will be updated Click the Ignore box to the right of all other attributes Click OK The library has been updated to reflect the new Quantity attribute values Lesson 2 Importing an MRP File Without a ComponentName This lesson also illustrates the process of importing data from a non P CAD source The imported data will again be used to update the P CAD library Ale tutor lib using ComponentName as the primary key The difference between the two lessons is the data contained within the MRP file Lesson 2 imports a comma delimited source file that does not contain the primary key ComponentName Instead the data in this
356. the Library Alias dialog 212 Library Executive User s Guide Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Alias no library selected Library Alias Alias Item Component Component New Alias C Pattem Aliases C Symbol Add Close 2 Select the Component or Pattern or Symbol option button in the Alias Item frame If the appropriate library is not current click the Library button to navigate to and select the library you want click OK and the Alias dialog is redisplayed Click the button below the Library button to open the Library Browse dialog where you can select the desired Component Pattern or Symbol Select the desired item and click OK Symbol Cancel When you return to the Library Alias dialog the Pattern Component or Symbol you chose is displayed in the Pattern Component or Symbol list Enter the desired alias name in the New Alias box Click Add and the new alias is listed in the Aliases list 5 Library Executive User s Guide 213 Chapter 15 Library Commands Library Pattern Graphics Library Pattern Graphics 214 When you choose Library Pattern Graphics the resulting Library Pattern Graphics dialog allows you to open a source library choose a target pattern to which you want to add additional pattern graphics and then search through a list of all patterns in the library and select a pattern graphics to attach to the target pattern This assignment of pattern gra
357. the selected attribute higher or lower in the list 4 Click Done The properties and attributes in the Footer Contents box are used to create a footer for the published library document Library Executive User s Guide 153 Chapter 11 Reports Publishing a P CAD Library 154 Selecting Components Patterns and Symbols When a Component Pattern or Symbol section is included in your published library you can select the items you want to include The Select Components Select Patterns and Select Symbols buttons open their corresponding component pattern or symbol selection list dialogs A sample selection list dialog appears as shown in the following dialog Selection List x Set All Clear All wj CAP300 vj CONN2UF v CONN20M GND V GNDANALOG MILCDDRYR44 w POLCAP MIRES4SIPISOL MUNTITLED wIVCC A list of all components patterns or symbols in the selected library is displayed If an item is selected the corresponding component pattern or symbol is included in the published output 1 Toselect all check boxes click the Select All button To clear all check boxes click the Clear All button Click an item to toggle its check box between selected and cleared 2 When the desired items are selected click Done The selected items will be published in their component pattern or symbol section The selection dialog is not available for attached patterns and symbols in the component section If Attac
358. tic incrementing of pin numbers easy to use display characteristics and a display area that shows how the pin will appear Pin Properties includes ability to increment pin names Enhanced manual pin renumbering supports single select pin renumbering and drag select for multiple pin renumbering The ability to automatically match a pin s default pin designator to the pin number Library Executive User s Guide 77 Chapter 6 The Symbol Editor The Symbol Editor Interface e All symbol attributes including RefDes and Type available from a single Attributes dialog e Unique keyboard shortcuts e Access from other programs in the P CAD product suite The Symbol Editor Interface 78 Symbol Editor is very similar to P CAD Schematic so much of it will be familiar This section details those functions that are unique to Symbol Editor If you need information about common features consult your P CAD user documentation Starting Symbol Editor In addition to starting Symbol Editor from Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 and Windows NT you can start it from other P CAD programs by choosing the Utils Symbol Editor command Symbol Editor can also be accessed from Library Executive by choosing the Symbol New or Symbol Open command Symbol Editor can be started from the Library Executive Source Browser by choosing View in the shortcut menu for a selected item in the Source Browser tree You can then view a symbol in the Symbol View
359. ting This section describes some common spreadsheet editing functions and also provides a list of keyboard shortcuts To perform this task Follow these steps Edit a cell Type directly in a highlighted cell or select the cell and enter information When you move off the cell using one of the arrow or mouse keys or press ENTER the new information appears in the cell ESC cancels the changes When a list is available the contents of a cell can be modified either by selecting an option from the list or typing the entry directly Select a cell or cells To select a single cell press the left mouse button and drag the cursor to select additional cells You can also hold down the SHIFT key and use the arrow keys to select multiple cells Select a column Pad PinDes Gate SymPintt Pin Name GateEq PinEq Elec Type Click the column heading button to select all cells in the corresponding column Select a row sy Click the row button to highlight an entire row Ea Cut a cell or cells Choose the Edit Cut command to remove the selection and place it onto the Clipboard The selection can be a cell or a cell range Shortcuts Click the Cut button XJ Press the CTRL X keys 12 Library Executive User s Guide About the Spreadsheet Views Chapter 2 Library Basics To perform this task Follow these steps Copy a cell or cells Choose the Edit Copy command to copy the selec
360. tion onto the Clipboard The selection can be a cell or a cell range Shortcuts Click the Copy button Press the CTRL C keys Paste information into a cell or cells Choose the Edit Paste command to paste the contents of the Clipboard into a cell If you select multiple cells the contents of the Clipboard will be pasted into each cell The paste area can be a single cell or a cell range If the paste area is a single cell this cell is the upper left corner of the paste area the rest of the copied data is pasted below and to the right of this cell Shortcuts Click the Paste button amp Press the CTRL V keys Slide selected cells up or down To slide row 12 up to row 10 1 Selectthe columns in row 12 that you want to slide 2 Press the CTRL key and slide the row up Before sliding row 12 data into row 10 3 Notice that row 10 and 11 have been pushed down After sliding row 12 data into row 10 Shortcuts Press the CTRL UP keys Press the CTRL DOWN keys Library Executive User s Guide 13 Chapter 2 Library Basics 14 About the Spreadsheet Views To perform this task Follow these steps Undo a task Choose the Edit Undo command to undo the previous action Shortcuts Click the Undo button Press the CTRL Z keys Move between cells Press the TAB key to move to the next cell SHIFT TAB to move back to the previous cell Shortcuts Click a cell
361. to reduce the number of pins by 1 When there is an attached pattern then every row corresponds to a pad in that pattern Only unused pads may have an blank pin designator An unused pad is specified by a completely empty row Library Executive User s Guide Library Message Listing Appendix B System Messages Error Number Message Comment 5713 Invalid characters in PinDes in row The pin designator is not allowed to have any of Bad characters are COMMA DASH the following characters Comma Dash SPACE TAB BRACKET PAREN HI Bracket or Paren or Space Tab or ASCII characters whose ASCII value are larger than 128 5714 POWER pin can t have missing A pin with electrical type Power must specify the PinName in row pin name since it is used as the default net name of that pin 5715 Invalid characters in PinName in row The pin name is not allowed to have any of the Bad character are SPACE TAB HI following characters Space Tab or characters ASCII whose ASCII value are larger than 128 5716 Gate Number out of range in row The value entered in the Gate column of the 1 to spreadsheet must be less than the number of gates specified in the Component Information dialog 5717 Gate amp Pin numbers must both be The combination of gate number and pin number zero or both be non zero in row uniquely specify a component pin They must both be zero when
362. to 2000 used to display an attribute File Extension The File Extension edit box displays the default extension for the selected report You can also enter a new extension if desired Separated List The Separated List frame is available when the Separated List report style has been selected In this frame you can Include Report Preface and or Include Column Headers by selecting the appropriate check box Selection Tab The Selection tab lists the report fields allows you to choose which are displayed in the report and provides the ability to define selection criteria The Customize Report Selection tab appears Customize Report Bill of Materials 717159 x 50 XI 6 Description Move Up Move Down Add Column Import Files Library Executive User s Guide 157 Chapter 11 Reports Bill of Materials from PCB and Schematic 158 The columns in the Selection spreadsheet are e Field The list of fields specific to the selected report e Show The Show option turns on the display of selected fields in the report Cleared fields do not appear in the report output e Criteria And Contains the selection criteria used to filter the report data e Or Additional selection criteria can be entered here if necessary Operators used in the Criteria And and Or columns are identical to those used in the Query dialog The columns in the spreadsheet can be resized by moving the column sep
363. tributes dialog Separate commands for placing reference points Place Ref Point glue points Place Glue Point and pick points Place Pick Point Pattern graphics can be added or removed Unique keyboard shortcuts and access from other programs in the P CAD suite of products Library Executive User s Guide 59 Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor The Pattern Editor Interface The Pattern Editor Interface 60 Pattern Editor is very similar to P CAD PCB so much of it will be familiar This section details those functions which are unique to Pattern Editor If you need information about common features consult your P CAD user documentation Starting Pattern Editor In addition to starting Pattern Editor from Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 and Windows NT you can start it from other P CAD programs by choosing the Utils Pattern Editor command You can also access Pattern Editor from Library Executive by choosing the Pattern New or Pattern Open commands Pattern Editor is also available from the Source Browser By choosing the View command in the shortcut menu for a selected item in the Source Browser tree you can view a pattern in the Pattern Viewer dialog The Edit button on the Pattern Viewer dialog also opens the Pattern Editor When you start Pattern Editor the interface appears as shown in the following figure ili Patten Edit View Place Options Library Utils Macro Window Help 18 xj A v he 2 E RR Z
364. ttern graphic will be used for all other rotations Library Executive User s Guide Library Copy Chapter 15 Library Commands e Display Window The display window on the right hand side of the tab gives a graphical representation of the pattern graphic selected The window is shared by the Primary Pattern Graphics field and the individual rotation fields Selecting an entry in any of these fields will display the corresponding pattern graphic in the window e Display Pattern in Orientation This check box allows you to view the selected pattern graphic from the Rotation frames in terms of its actual orientation If you check this box you will be able to see how the graphic will appear when the component is placed with a particular rotation If this box is unchecked you will see the default Top Rotation 0 entry e Use Rotation This check box allows you to enable disable the orientations section of the page for editing purposes This is especially useful if you don t want to work on all specific rotations If the box is checked all of the specific rotation fields are enabled and you can set specific pattern graphics to specific orientations If this box is unchecked the Top Rotation 0 field is available only All other specific orientation fields are disabled This command enabled or disabled only applies whilst you are actually in the Orientations tab e Apply Pattern Changes to Library Button When you have made all of the changes
365. ture and the advanced library publisher From PCB and Schematic the Bill of Materials has been enhanced with the purchase of Library Executive to include imported component attributes With the Library Executive report command you can generate a report file containing details of the components in the selected source An ASCII or comma delimited report can be generated of the following sources e An external source file e A P CAD library or library set e A query or cross link result The Library Publisher command of P CAD Library Executive generates a detailed report of components patterns and symbols in a P CAD library The report is output to Microsoft Word 97 and can contain a variety of reporting options including pictures P CAD Library Executive also provides enhanced reporting capabilities for PCB and Schematic When generating a Bill of Materials you can select and organize the component attributes to include in the report output These attributes can even be imported from an external source file This chapter describes the reporting capabilities available with P CAD Library Executive Reports in P CAD Library Executive From Library Executive you can generate a report file from the following sources e an external library source file e a query result Across link result Library Executive User s Guide 145 Chapter 11 Reports Reports in P CAD Library Executive e Another P CAD library or library set Depending on
366. u are in a temporary mode of assigning numbers so every time you hold down the left button and drag it over a pad you renumber that pad you can also click a pad to renumber it For example the first pad you drag the mouse over would be number 1 if Starting Pad Number was specified as 1 the second pad number 2 if the Increment Pad Number was specified as 1 As you drag the mouse over a pad while in the Renumber mode it shows that a number has been assigned Once a pad is renumbered you cannot change its number without choosing the Renumber command again The Status line information area displays the pad number every time you re number a pad The N key increments the pad about to be renumbered by one SHIFT N decrements the number Thus if 6 is the next available pad number pressing N would result in the pad being assigned number 7 pressing SHIFT N would result in the pad being assigned number 5 You can use the unwind feature to reverse the renumbering process The BACKSPACE key unwinds the renumbering 6 Right click or press ESC to end the Renumber sequence The Undo command reverses the entire renumbered sequence You can also select a pad and choose Properties to open the Pad Properties dialog and assign a pad number Renumbering Default Pin Designators The renumbering function in Pattern Editor unlike in PCB supports single select pad renumbering and drag select for multiple pad renumbering Remember to turn on the di
367. u or the Table menu The location from which you choose the Verify command defines the components you intend to use as a source for the comparison For example choosing Verify from a Query Result table generates a report of the differences between the components listed in that Query Result and a P CAD library or library set This section describes how and where to choose the Verify command to get the results you want From the Source Browser Choose Verify from the shortcut menu for a selected library library set query result or external source file in the Source Browser tree The following list describes the results for each selected item e library The components listed in that library are compared to components in another specified P CAD library or library set e Library set The components listed in all libraries in that set are compared to components in another specified P CAD library or library set e Query result The components listed in that Query Result Viewer are compared to components in the specified P CAD library or library set e Cross link result The components listed in that Cross Link Result Viewer are compared to components in the specified P CAD library or library set e External source file The component attributes listed in the file Viewer are compared to components in the specified P CAD library or library set From the Table Menu Choose Verify in the Table menu of the Viewer to verify imported source file
368. umber Use the slide arrows to change the value up or down by 25 0mil or 1 00mm Use the SHIFT key with the slide arrows to increment the value by 0 1mil or 0 01mm Notch Type For DIP patterns the Notch Type may be either None Arc Square or Triangle For QUAD and ARRAY patterns the Notch Type may be either None Upper Left Upper Right Lower Left or Lower Left Current Pattern Graphics Displays the pattern graphic name linked to the component Library Executive User s Guide Working with Pattern Files Chapter 5 The Pattern Editor Working with Pattern Files In Pattern Editor patterns can be saved as pattern files pat This allows you to save partially created patterns and to create pattern templates that you can use to create new patterns Before a pattern can be copied to a library it must pass a validation test If it fails you can save itas a pat file and return to it at a later time Loading a Pattern from a Library 1 You can load an existing pattern from a library and modify it to create a new pattern When you choose Pattern Open the Open dialog appears pen L2 x Lookin E Demo gt BI fai je Demo lib i Demol lib ja Modfax0 lib File name n Files of type Pater pat lib Cancel 2 Notice that this dialog allows you to open pattern files pat and library files 115 When you choose a library file and click Open the Library Browse dialog opens as shown in t
369. ure provides general information about a component Library Executive User s Guide User Interface Chapter 2 Library Basics Component Information 7 400 m x Select Pattern prs Pattem View Select Symbol Number of Gates Boo Symbol View ference Number of Pads ia r Component Type Sana Refdes Prefix IU Normal Component Style Gate Numbering Alternate Views Power Homogeneous Alphabetic IV IEEE C Sheet Connector C Heterogeneous C Numeric v DeMorgan C Module C Link DeMorgan TPOPTEK 16 N TPOPTEK 16 I TPOPTEK 16 D TPOPTEK 16 N TPOPTEK 16 I TPOPTEK 16 D 1 TPOPTEK 16 N TPOPTEK 16 I TPOPTEK 16 D 1 TPOPTEK 16 N TPOPTEK 18 I TPO PTEK 16 D za From this dialog you can set the component type as homogeneous or heterogeneous select alternate views set the number of gates and gate numbering style define the total number of pins attach patterns and symbols and assign a reference designator prefix The maximum number of gates per component is 5 000 You can have as many as 10 000 pins per component Pattern View The Pattern View dialog lets you select a pattern for the component and displays the information as shown in the following figure Pattern View DIP14 Select Pattern Edit Pattern R ef D e S Component Info J Pins View Symbol View Prev Pattern Graphic Nest Pattern Graphic Current Pattern Graphics Primary eooc
370. ut 127 prompt line displaying Prompt Line View command 261 Publisher Library command 230 publishing a library FOLATE i eoe riter evertit ee formatting the page footer 152 OULPUL REIR 154 239 selecting components symbols and patter NS cnet reae 154 238 Q ITI ig EE ME 103 accessing iudei demere des 117 from Source Browser 99 from the File Menu 118 from the Source Browser 117 from the Utils Menu eee 117 add column rtt 205 add TOW eee 205 And Vs Or search sss 112 create a library sss 117 data types ttes 105 defining search criteria 108 display fields sees 107 executing a Query sssseee 113 Fields utri ttt tete 103 Menu Commands eee 114 new result table sees 205 Operators redria e e ni 107 placing a component 117 Query Result Viewer dialog 9 Replace button sse 117 report on a query result 116 report results ete teet 145 EI Tro PER 205 a cross link result 116 a query result sss 116 287 288 by data types for ComponentType TOr dates 4 2 ccena for dates and times for times for True False eee search criteria eese search ex
371. v ag redu aetti 15 Column COMMANGG ccccceseseececeeececeesececceeceaueaseceeeeeseaueaeeceeeeseaueaseeeesenseaueaeeeeatees 16 ROW Gomtmands 152 2 correre nee cera o Pa eek sa cen Pro Lug Pene eaa vua caen Ca e ovn ua d Ene vada 16 Source Browser Shortcut Menu Commands sse eene 17 Keyboard Shortc ts eerte d e E noe Rege PH nee desto dees asec 18 chapter3 Library Executive Tutorial Creating a New L Dri aera Tra sees eeae cece ennt a aa a aae e aa sten innere nnns sr snis 22 Creating a New Symbol ccccccccceceeccceceeeeeeeeeeae cece eeeeaaeaeceseeeseesacaeceeeeeseeneaeeeeeeeeeneees 23 Modifying Symbol 1 eed ettet ette Pee oes ego ai teed a re ngo te ELE Rio dus 24 Creating a New Pattern 20 0 2 cccccccccceceeeeeenncce cece eeeeeeaeeeceeeeeesaeaeaecesesesaceeaeaeeeeesaseecaeeeeeeeess 27 Creating a New Component ssssssssseeeeeneeeene nennen enne tenunan enne 29 Adding th Symbol nee nines nine eee cede eee Erde ei ede h 30 Adding tlie Pattern ieri ceciderit dieere eie re tede de edite 31 Editing the Pins View Spreadsheet sssessseeee e emm 32 Validating and Saving a Component sse eme een 36 Using the Source Browser sssssssssssssssses esent rennen nn nnns 37 Library Executive User s Guide chapter4 Libraries Integrated Pattern and Custom Libraries sssssssseesseeeeenne 39 Integr
372. valent gates Equivalent gates are considered to have exactly must have the same Pin Eq See row the same symbols and symbol information and 5724 The same pin on equivalent gates Equivalent gates are considered to have exactly must have the same Electrical Type the same symbols and symbol information See row and 5725 The same pin on equivalent gates of Equivalent gates are considered to have exactly a homogeneous component must the same symbols and symbol information have the same Pin Name See row and 5726 Equivalent pins can not have different electrical types in the same gate See row and 5727 Gate Number greater than number The gate number specified in the spreadsheet is of gates in row larger than the number of gates specified in the Component Information dialog 5728 Pin Number greater than number The pin number specified in the spreadsheet is of pins in row larger than the numbers of pins specified in the Component Information dialog 5729 Duplicate Pin Number found in The combination of gate number and pin number gate in row has already been specified Make sure that a common pin s pin number does not match another pin s pin number 5730 Pin Number could not be found for The pin number specified in the spreadsheet gate in row could not be found in the symbol corresponding to the gate number 5731 Common pin defined for gate num The gate equivalence used to spe
373. x to generate or update the VerifyDate attribute in the selected libraries You can also choose to verify only components with matching ComponentLibrary attributes in the MRP source and P CAD library For more information about this and other Verify selections refer to Library Verification page 137 Step 3 Generate the Difference Report The Verify difference report is similar to that generated by the Design Verification utility discussed in Lesson 6 Library Executive User s Guide Import and Export from External Sources Chapter 13 Extended Library Features Lesson 9 Library Creation Using Pattern and Symbol Editor From any source you can generate a P CAD library The only requirement is that it contain a ComponentName field The other essential attributes that define the pattern symbol and electrical properties of the component are generated using the tools in Library Executive The process of creating an integrated component library is summarized in this lesson For more information references are included to other sections of this manual 1 Select a source with a ComponentName field This source could for instance be an imported MRP file Display the source in the file Viewer Select a component from this source by clicking on the row number to its left The component that you would like to make integrated is now highlighted Choose Open from the Row menu The Component Information dialog is displayed For additiona
374. y and the Library check box is selected the library is favored The library attribute value remains unchanged e Ifthe attribute in the source does not exist in the library component and the Ignore check box is cleared it is added 4 Click OK The library has been updated to reflect the new attribute values Any new components have been added if the Create new components check box was selected Refer to Creating a New Library page 42 for details about the completeness of components created by the Save To Library command Saving a Library You can create or update a P CAD library from a variety of sources e a modified P CAD library e an imported library from an external source e a query result e across link result The only requirement is that you have the primary field ComponentName uniquely defined 44 Library Executive User s Guide Creating and Updating Libraries Chapter 4 Libraries To save a source to a P CAD library choose the Save to Library command Refer to Setting up a Library Set page 45 for more information What is Saved You can customize which component attributes are stored in a P CAD library For example if pricing is important for component selection you can choose to save the Cost attribute Later you can query on this attribute for component selection Many attributes can be saved to a P CAD library including user defined attributes that can be tailored to enhance your particular PCB design pro
375. y collapse both the component level and the library level to refresh their contents Expand the levels again to view their current contents e To refresh the Library Executive memory so that the Viewer contents reflect recent changes to a library or library set choose Reload Since Query Verify Cross Link and Report functions operate on the source in memory choosing the Reload command assures you that you are operating on the most current library contents 94 Library Executive User s Guide Library Sets Chapter 7 The Source Browser Library Sets A library set is a group of P CAD library files In the Source Browser you can open up a library set to view its contents including the components and their associated symbols and patterns You can also perform operations such as query and verify on the library set or its contents This section discusses the creation and use of library sets Operations on library sets and other Source Browser contents are summarized in Accessing Other Features page 99 Library Setup The Library Setup dialog provides the methods to organize and manage library file names and library sets 1 Choose library Setup to open the Library Setup dialog Library Setup x Library Sets Libraries Sets Members DEFAULT LIBRARY SET Add Set Agd Libre Delete Remove Rename 2 Selecta library set from the Library Sets list The libraries contained in the set are listed in the Members
376. y two different manufacturers The database field Part Number can be mapped to both a ComponentName field which must be unique for P CAD products and a predefined Part Number field which is the original name 7400 Click the Delete Row button to delete a selected row You can only delete rows that have been added to the table 6 When all Original Field Names have been mapped to their desired New Field Name click the Map button You are reminded that the original imported file is mapped any changes you have made to the file contents in the Viewer are lost during the mapping process 7 The Viewer reappears with the fields mapped to the chosen P CAD values The word mapped will appear next to the mapped file name Library Executive remembers the specified field mapping for the latest mapped file For example changes are made to your corporate component database every week With Library Executive mapping you can periodically update your component libraries If you map the fields today then next week when you import the database again to verify your P CAD library the mapping is completed automatically If you import a file with the same filename but different field names than the previously imported file the original mapping will be overwritten Cross Linking The Cross Link command links attributes from two sources and combines them into one Although the Cross Link command can link any two source files in Library Executive it
377. y P CAD Library Executive and their data types Additional user defined fields may also be included Fields Fields are the names recognized by P CAD Library Executive for component attributes Fields include attributes and property names such as ComponentName RefDesPrefix and NumberOfPins In general a property is an intrinsic building block of a component For example the number of pads on the component is a property An attribute is additional component information that may be relevant to the design manufacture or production of the printed circuit board Throughout this document the term attribute is used to generally describe both component properties and attributes Library Executive User s Guide 103 Chapter 8 Querying Libraries 104 A list of field names is included in the following table Fields and Data Types Field Names Read only Field Type Data Type ComponentName RefDesPrefix PatternName NumberOfPads NumberOfPins NumberOfParts ComponentLibrary ComponentType Homogeneous AlphaNumeric HasIEEE HasDemorgan Value ComponentHeight Description Link NoSwap Part Number SwapEquivalence Tolerance Wattage PowerConsumption Manufacturer Supplier Cost Leadtime Yes Primary key String Yes Yes Yes Yes Library Executive User s Guide Fields and Data Types Chapter 8 Querying Libraries Field Names Read only Field Type Data Type
378. y and paste Of particular importance for importing files from an external source are the Map Fields and Cross Link commands which can be accessed from the Table menu Command Description Cut Deletes any selected component row from the Viewer and moves it to the Clipboard Copies selected item s from the Query Result Viewer onto the Clipboard Pastes items from the Clipboard onto the Viewer Query Opens the Query dialog where you can narrow the component list of the imported file by including search criteria Cross Link Opens the Cross Link dialog where you can link component attributes in the selected file with their corresponding components in another source The Cross Link Results Viewer displays a combination of the attributes in the two source files for the linked components Verify Opens the Verify dialog where you can compare the components in the Viewer with components in a library Report Opens the Report dialog where you can generate a report on the components included in the Viewer Save To Library Opens the Save Source dialog where you can save the components in the Viewer to a P CAD library Map Fields Opens the Map Fields dialog where you can map the field names imported from an external source file to field names recognized by P CAD Library Executive Closes the Viewer The Verify and Save To Library commands are only available if the primary field ComponentName is present For more informat
379. y command 212 aliases eo o S CREATING ice te tee eiat renaming using instead of renaming 57 attaching Index Identifier sss 127 attributes adding eee Attributes dialog sss Attributes Property dialog changing esee combining from different sources 130 ComponentName esee 105 components esent 252 ComponentType eeene 110 creation date cross linking data types sisii asa S Delete dialog deleting fields certes importing from non P CAD file modification date sss 47 pattern Reference m reference links tette 253 Library Executive User s Guide Index saving to a library 45 selecting for query sss 106 selecting search criteria Symbol eitis 79 83 updating in a library eese 43 user defined PCI E verification date sss verifying in libraries viewing propreties sese B DaSICS seisecctiasstvivovsnsstersntanstvanteotbenvtaunetie tans 3 Bill of Materials see 155 customized report sss 156 formatting 156 importing component attributes 160 161 importing files sss 158 160 selection criteria C character delimited files impo
380. you want to save the pattern to then specify a pattern name If the pattern was loaded from a library that library appears in the Library box and the pattern name appears in the Pattern box 4 Ifyou want to just create a pattern not a component click OK To automatically create a component that corresponds to the pattern select the Create Component check box and give the component a new name in the Component box before you click OK If the existing default pin designators are correct for the new pattern you do not have to change them You can set the default pin designators to Match Default Pin Des to Pin Numbers by selecting that check box If the Create Component box is left cleared an electrically complete component can be generated with this pattern Saving a Pattern as a Pattern File The Pattern Save to File and Pattern Save to File As commands save a pattern as a pattern file pat without having to save them to a library allowing you to keep patterns for later use Pattern Attributes All pattern level attributes including invisible attributes like RefDes and Type can be viewed and modified by choosing the Pattern Attributes command When you choose Attributes the Attributes dialog opens E GNNNNENI Type In the Attributes dialog you can view add modify or delete attributes or access a web site The dialog contains a two column table showing the name of the attribute in the left column and corre

Library Executive

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents